Programmer Manual

TDS Family Digitizing Oscilloscopes

(TDS 410A, 420A, 460A, 520A, 524A, 540A, 544A,
620A, 640A, 644A, 684A, 744A & 784A)
070-8709-07
Copyright E Tektronix, Inc. 1995. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers
and are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions.

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software – Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.

Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes
that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.

Printed in the U.S.A.

Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 1000, Wilsonville, OR 97070–1000

TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.

 WARRANTY

Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) years
from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either
will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the
defective product.

In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the
warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for
packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid.
Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the
Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any
other charges for products returned to any other locations.

This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting
from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair
damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a product that has been
modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or
difficulty of servicing the product.

THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX
AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Table of Contents

Getting Started
Overview of the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
Setting Up Remote Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

Syntax and Commands

Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
Command and Query Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
Clearing the TDS Family Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
Command Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
Constructed Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Argument Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
Syntax Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
Command Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Acquisition Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Alias Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
Application Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
Calibration and Diagnostic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
Cursor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
File System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
Hardcopy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Horizontal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Limit Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
Measurement Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
RS-232 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
Save and Recall Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
Status and Error Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
Trigger Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
Vertical Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31
Waveform Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
Zoom Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37
Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–39
Status and Events
Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Event Handling Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Synchronization Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12

Programming Examples
Compiling the Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual i

Table of Contents

Appendices
Appendix A: Character Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
Appendix B: Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–1
Appendix C: Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–1
GPIB Function Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–1
Interface Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–2
Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–1
Glossary and Index

ii TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Table of Contents

List of Figures

Figure 1–1: Common Message Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

Figure 1–2: Functional Groupings and an Alphabetical List of
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
Figure 1–3: Service Requests (SRQs) Provide for Event (Interrupt)
Driven Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
Figure 1–4: The Disks That Accompany This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
Figure 1–5: GPIB Connector Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
Figure 1–6: How to Stack GPIB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
Figure 1–7: Typical GPIB Network Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
Figure 1–8: Selecting the I/O System in the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
Figure 1–9: Selecting the GPIB Address in the GPIB Configuration
Side Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6

Figure 2–1: Command Message Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2

Figure 2–2: Block Argument Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
Figure 2–3: Typical Syntax Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
Figure 2–4: Message Window Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–197
Figure 2–5: LESSThan and MOREThan Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–239

Figure 3–1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

Figure 3–2: The Status Byte Register (SBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
Figure 3–3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) . . . . 3–3
Figure 3–4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
Figure 3–5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER) . . . . . . . . . 3–4
Figure 3–6: Status and Event Handling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
Figure 3–7: Command Processing Without Using Synchronization . 3–8
Figure 3–8: Processing Sequence With Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8

Figure 4–1: Equipment Needed to Run the Example Programs . . . . . 4–1

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual iii

Table of Contents

List of Tables

Table 2–1: BNF Symbols and Meanings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

Table 2–2: Command Message Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
Table 2–3: Comparison of Header Off and On Responses . . . . . . . . . 2–3
Table 2–4: Acquisition Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Table 2–5: Alias Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
Table 2–6: Application Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
Table 2–7: Calibration and Diagnostic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
Table 2–8: Cursor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
Table 2–9: Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
Table 2–10: File System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
Table 2–11: Hardcopy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Table 2–12: Horizontal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Table 2–13: Limit Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
Table 2–14: Measurement Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
Table 2–15: Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
Table 2–16: RS-232 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
Table 2–17: Save and Recall Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
Table 2–18: Status and Error Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
Table 2–19: Trigger Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
Table 2–20: Vertical Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31
Table 2–21: Waveform Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–35
Table 2–22: Zoom Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37
Table 2–23: Waveform Data Points Supported for Reference
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54
Table 2–24: Commands that Affect BUSY? Response . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–60
Table 2–25: Offset Ranges for the TDS 4XXA, 54XA, 6XXA, & 7XXA
(All Channels) and the TDS 520A & 524A
(Channel 1 & Channel 2) using a 1x Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65
Table 2–26: Offset Ranges for the TDS 520A & 524A (Aux 1 & Aux 2)
using a 1x Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65
Table 2–27: DATa and WFMPre Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–90
Table 2–28: XY Format Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–112
Table 2–30: Record Length Values (<NR1>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–154
Table 2–31: Commands that Generate an Operation Complete
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–201
Table 2–32: Additional WFMPre Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–295

iv TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Table of Contents

Table 3–1: SESR Bit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

Table 3–2: SBR Bit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
Table 3–3: No Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
Table 3–4: Command Error Messages – CME Bit 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
Table 3–5: Execution Error Messages – EXE Bit 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
Table 3–6: Device Error Messages – DDE Bit 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Table 3–7: System Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Table 3–8: Execution Warning Messages – EXE Bit 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
Table 3–9: Internal Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19

Table A–1: The TDS Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

Table A–2: ASCII & GPIB Code Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–2
Table C–1: TDS Family Oscilloscope Standard Interface Message . . C–2
Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D–1

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual v

Table of Contents

vi TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Preface

This programmer manual covers the TDS 410A, 420A, 460A, 520A, 524A,
540A, 544A, 620A, 640A, 644A, 684A, 744A, & 784A. It also covers Advanced
DSP Math (optional on the TDS420A, 460A, 520A, 540A, 620A, & 640A), the
RS-232/Centronics Interface (optional on the TDS 410A, 420A, 460A, 520A,
540A, 620A, & 640A), and the Option 05 Video Trigger. This manual provides
information on operating your oscilloscope using the General Purpose Interface
Bus (GPIB) interface.

Related Manuals
Table i lists other documentation for the TDS 410A, 420A, 460A, 520A, 524A,
540A, 544A, 620A, 640A, 644A, 684A, 744A, & 784A digitizing oscilloscopes.

Table i: Other Documentation

Manual Tek Part Number

  

TDS 410A, 420A, & 460A 070–8034–XX
TDS 520A, TDS 524A, TDS 540A, & TDS 544A 070–8710–XX
TDS 620A, TDS 640A, & TDS 644A 070–8715–XX
TDS 684A, 744A, & 784A 070–8991–XX
TDS 500A & 600A Option 05 Video Trigger 070–8748–XX
TDS Reference
TDS 410A, 420A, & 460A 070–8035–XX
TDS 500A & TDS 600A 070–8711–XX
TDS 684A, 744A, & 784A 070–8999–XX
TDS Performance Verification
TDS 410A, 420A, & 460A 070–8721–XX
TDS 520A, 524A, 540A, & 544A 070–8712–XX
TDS 620A, 640A, & 644A 070–8717–XX
TDS 684A, 744A, & 784A 070–8990–XX

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual vii

Preface

Table i: Other Documentation (Cont.)

Manual Tek Part Number

TDS Service Manual
TDS 410A, 420A, & 460A 070–8036–XX
TDS 520A, 524A, 540A, & 544A 070–8713–XX
TDS 620A, 640A, & 644A 070–8718–XX
TDS 684A, 744A, & 784A 070–8992–XX

viii TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Getting Started

You can write computer programs that remotely set the oscilloscope front panel
controls or take measurements and read those measurements for further analysis
or storage.
To help you get started with programmng the oscilloscope, this section includes
the following:
H Overview of the Manual – summarizes the type of programming information
contained in each major section of this manual.
H Setting Up Remote Communications – describes how to physically connect
the oscilloscope to a controller and set the appropriate front panel controls.

Overview of the Manual

The information contained in each major section of this manual is described
below.

Syntax and Commands The Syntax and Commands section (Section 2) describes the structure and
content of the messages your program sends to the digitizing oscilloscope.
Figure 1–1 shows a syntax diagram and command parts as described in the
Command Syntax subsection.

Command Parts Header Comma


 


Mnemonics Space Arguments

Syntax Diagram

  
    
 

Figure 1–1: Common Message Elements

Section 2 also describes the effect of each command and provides examples of
how you might use it. The Command Groups subsection provides a list by
functional area. The Command Descriptions subsection arranges commands
alphabetically (Figure 1–2).

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 1–1

Getting Started

Application Menu Commands ACQuire:NUMACq? (Query Only)

Zoom Zoom
A Alias Commands S ACQuire:MODe
A
A A Acquisition Commands G S ACQuire? (Query Only)
A A
A A ACQuire:MODe E G Syntax: . . .
A A ACQuire:NUMACq?
A ACQuire:NUMAVg E Group: . . .
A
A ACQuire:NUMEnv Examples: . . .
A ACQuire:REPEt
ACQuire:STATE
ACQuire:STOPAfter

Commands Grouped in Functional Areas and Commands Listed Alphabetically

Figure 1–2: Functional Groupings and an Alphabetical List of Commands

Status and Events The program may request information from the oscilloscope. The oscilloscope
provides information in the form of status and error messages. Figure 1–3
illustrates the basic operation of this system.
The Status and Events section (Section 3) starting on page 3–1 describes how to
use service requests (SRQs) and various event messages in your programs.

Your program requests

status and event reports.
Controller TDS sends status and event reports.

Digitizing Oscilloscope (Rear Panel)

GPIB Cable

Figure 1–3: Service Requests (SRQs) Provide for Event (Interrupt) Driven Programs

Programming Examples The Programming Examples section (Section 4) starting on page 4–1 describes
some example digitizing oscilloscope programs and how to compile them. The
disks that come with this manual (Figure 1–4) have an executable and a
Microsoft QuickBASIC 4.5 and a Microsoft QuickC 2.5 source code version of
each program.

1–2 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Getting Started

TDS Example
Programs

TDS Example
Programs

Figure 1–4: The Disks That Accompany This Manual

Setting Up Remote Communications

Even the best instrument control program will not do much if the instrument is
not connected to the controller.
The digitizing oscilloscope has a 24-pin GPIB connector on its rear panel, as
shown in Figure 1–5. This connector has a D-type shell and conforms to IEEE
Std 488.1–1987.
Attach an IEEE Std 488.1–1987 GPIB cable (available from Tektronix as part
number 012–0991–00) to this connector.

GPIB Connector Port

Figure 1–5: GPIB Connector Location

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 1–3

Getting Started

If needed, you can stack GPIB connectors as shown in Figure 1–6.

Figure 1–6: How to Stack GPIB Connectors

GPIB Requirements Observe these rules when you use your digitizing oscilloscope with a GPIB
network:
H Assign a unique device address to each device on the bus. No two devices
can share the same device address.
H Do not connect more than 15 devices to any one bus.
H Connect one device for every 2 meters (6 feet) of cable used.
H Do not use more than 20 meters (65 feet) of cable to connect devices to a
bus.
H Turn on at least two-thirds of the devices on the network while using the
network.
H Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear configuration as shown
in Figure 1–7. Do not use loop or parallel configurations.

1–4 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Getting Started

GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device

GPIB Device GPIB Device

GPIB Device GPIB Device

Figure 1–7: Typical GPIB Network Configurations

Appendix C: Interface Specifications gives more information on the GPIB

configuration of the digitizing oscilloscope.

Setting the GPIB You need to set the GPIB parameters of the digitizing oscilloscope to match the
Parameters configuration of the bus. Once you have set these parameters, you can control the
digitizing oscilloscope through the GPIB interface.
1. Press the UTILITY (SHIFT DISPLAY) button to display the Utility menu.
2. Press the System button in the main menu until it highlights the I/O
selection in the pop-up menu. See Figure 1–8.

Figure 1–8: Selecting the I/O System in the Main Menu

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 1–5

Getting Started

3. Press the Port button in the main menu until it highlights the GPIB
selection in the pop-up menu. See Figure 1–9.
4. Press the Configure button in the main menu to display the GPIB Configu-
ration side menu. See Figure 1–9.
5. Press the Talk/Listen Address side menu button, and set the GPIB address
using either the general purpose knob or, if available, the keypad.

Figure 1–9: Selecting the GPIB Address in the GPIB Configuration Side Menu

The digitizing oscilloscope is set up for bidirectional communication with your

controller. If you wish to isolate the digitizing oscilloscope from the bus:
H Press the Off Bus side menu button. This disables all communication with
the controller.
If you wish to enter a special mode of operation to communicate directly with
non-488.2 hard copy devices:
H Press the Hardcopy side menu button to have the digitizing oscilloscope
send hard copy information only when you press the HARDCOPY button
(and accept a HARDCOPY ABORT command).

1–6 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Command Syntax

You can control the digitizing oscilloscope through the GPIB interface using
commands and queries. This section describes the syntax these commands and
queries use. It also describes the conventions the digitizing oscilloscope uses to
process them. The next section, entitled Command Groups, lists the commands
and queries themselves.
You transmit commands to the digitizing oscilloscope using the enhanced
American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) character
encoding. Appendix A: Character Charts on page A–2 contains a chart of the
ASCII character set.
This manual describes commands and queries using Backus-Naur Form (BNF)
notation and syntax diagrams.
This manual uses the following BNF symbols:

Table 2–1: BNF Symbols and Meanings

Symbol Meaning
 Defined element
 Is defined as
 Exclusive OR
 Group; one element is required
 Optional; can be omitted
 Previous element(s) may be repeated

 Comment

Command and Query Structure

Commands consist of set commands and query commands (usually simply called
commands and queries). Commands modify instrument settings or tell the
digitizing oscilloscope to perform a specific action. Queries cause the digitizing
oscilloscope to return data and information about its status.
Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The query form of the
command differs from the set form by its question mark on the end. For
example, the set command
  has a query form
 .
Not all commands have both a set and a query form. Some commands have set
only and some have query only.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–1

Command Syntax

A command message is a command or query name followed by any information

the digitizing oscilloscope needs to execute the command or query. Command
messages may contain five element types, defined in Table 2–2 and shown in the
example in Figure 2–1.

Table 2–2: Command Message Elements

Symbol Meaning
<Header> The basic command name. If the header ends with a question
mark, the command is a query. The header may begin with a
colon (:) character. If the command is concatenated with other
commands, the beginning colon is required. Never use the
beginning colon with command headers beginning with a star
(*).
<Mnemonic> A header subfunction. Some command headers have only one
mnemonic. If a command header has multiple mnemonics, a
colon (:) character always separates them from each other.
<Argument> A quantity, quality, restriction, or limit associated with the
header. Some commands have no argument while others have
multiple arguments. A <Space> separates arguments from the
header. A <Comma> separates arguments from each other.
<Comma> A single comma between arguments of multiple-argument
commands. It may optionally have white space characters
before and after the comma.
<Space> A white space character between command header and
argument. It may optionally consist of multiple white space
characters.

Command Parts Header Comma

SAVe:WAVEform CH1,REF3

Mnemonics Space Arguments

Syntax Diagram

SAVe : WAVEform <Space> <wfm> <Comma> REF <x>

Figure 2–1: Command Message Elements

Commands Commands have the structure:

H [:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]...]

2–2 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Syntax

A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchi-

cal or tree structure. The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each
subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off the previous one. Commands at a
higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level. The leading colon (:)
always returns you to the base of the command tree.

Queries Queries have the structure:

H [:]<Header>?
H [:]<Header>?[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]...]
You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless
otherwise noted. These branch queries return information about all the mnemon-
ics below the specified branch or level. For example, MEASUreĆ
ment:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIRection? returns the starting point and direction of
the edge of a delayed measurement, while MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
returns the current settings of all delayed measurement parameters, and
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? returns all the measurement parameters for the
specified measurement.

Headers in Query You can control whether the digitizing oscilloscope returns headers as part of the
Responses query response. Use the HEADer command to control this feature. If header is on,
the query response returns command headers and formats itself as a valid set
command. When header is off, the response includes only the values. This may
make it easier to parse and extract the information from the response. Table 2–3
shows the difference in responses.

Table 2–3: Comparison of Header Off and On Responses

Query Header Off Response Header On Response

APPMenu:TITLe? "Test Setup" :APPMENU:TITLE "Test
Setup"
ACQuire:NUMAVg? 100 :ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 100

Clearing the TDS Family Oscilloscope

You can clear the Output Queue and reset the digitizing oscilloscope to accept a
new command or query by using the Device Clear (DCL) GPIB command.

Command Entry
H You can enter commands in upper or lower case.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–3

Command Syntax

H You can precede any command with white space characters. White space
characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00
through 09 and 0B through 20 hexadecimal (0 through 9 and 11 through 32
decimal).
H The digitizing oscilloscope ignores commands consisting of any combina-
tion of white space characters and line feeds.

Abbreviating Commands You can abbreviate many digitizing oscilloscope commands. Each command
listing in the Commands section shows the minimum acceptable abbreviations in
capitals. For example, you can enter the command  $"% simply as
  or !$.

NOTE. Keep in mind that abbreviation rules change over time as new TDS
models get introduced. Thus, for the most robust code, use the full spelling.
Avoid using the command abbreviations.

If you use the 

" command to have command headers included as part of
query responses, you can further control whether the returned headers are
abbreviated or are full-length. The # command lets you control this.

Concatenating Commands You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a
semicolon (;). The digitizing oscilloscope executes concatenated commands in
the order received.
When concatenating commands and queries, you must follow these rules:
1. Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning
colon on all commands but the first. For example, the commands &
"
  and  $"  would be concatenated into a
single command:
"
  $" 
2. If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemon-
ic, you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning
colon. For example, you can concatenate the commands  $"

  and  $"  into a single command:
 $"
    
The longer version works equally well:
 $"
   $" 
3. Never precede a star (*) command with a colon:
 $"
  

2–4 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Syntax

Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was not
there so
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*TRG;NUMAVg 10
will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions
for averaging to 10.
4. When you concatenate queries, the responses to all the queries are concate-
nated into a single response message. For example, if the display intensity
for text is 80% and for the waveform it is 90%, the concatenated query
DISplay:INTENsity:TEXt?;WAVEform?
will return either :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:TEXT 80;:DISPLAY:INTENSIĆ
TY:WAVEFORM 90 if header is on or 80;90 if header is off.
5. Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message. For
example,
ACQuire:MODe NORMal;NUMAVg?;STATE?
is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to normal. The message
then queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition
state. Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order
received.
Here are some invalid concatenations:
H DISPlay:INTENsity:TEXt 80;ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
(no colon before ACQuire)
H DISPlay:INTENsity:TEXt 80;:WAVEform 90
(extra colon before WAVEform — could use DISPlay:INTENsity:WAVEform
instead)
H DISPlay:INTENsity:TEXt 80;:*TRG
(colon before a star (*) command)
H APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM1 "foo";LABel:BOTTOM2 "fee"
(levels of the mnemonics are different — either remove the second use of
LABel: or place :APPMenu: in front of LABel:BOTTOM2)

Message Terminators This manual uses <EOM> (End of message) to represent a message terminator.

Symbol Meaning
<EOM> Message terminator

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–5

Command Syntax

The end-of-message terminator may be the END message (EOI asserted

concurrently with the last data byte), the ASCII code for line feed (LF) sent as
the last data byte, or both. The digitizing oscilloscope always terminates
messages with LF and EOI. It allows white space before the terminator. For
example, it allows CR LF.

Constructed Mnemonics
Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. For example, a
channel mnemonic can be either CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4. You use these mnemon-
ics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic. For example, there is a
CH1:VOLts command, and there is also a CH2:VOLts command. In the command
descriptions, this list of choices is abbreviated as CH<x>.

Application Menu When the application menu is displayed, commands may specify which menu
Mnemonics button to use.

Symbol Meaning
BOTTOM<x> A main menu button selector; <x> is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
Main menu buttons are located along the bottom of the display
and are numbered left to right, starting with 1.
RIGHT<x> A side menu button selector; <x> is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Side menu
buttons are located along the right side of the display and are
numbered top to bottom, starting with 1.

Cursor Position When cursors are displayed, commands may specify which cursor of the pair to
Mnemonics use.

Symbol Meaning
POSITION<x> A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.

Measurement Specifier Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the
Mnemonics header. Up to four automated measurements may be displayed with each
displayed waveform. The displayed measurements are specified in this way:

Symbol Meaning
MEAS<x> A measurement specifier; <x> is either 1 [top], 2, 3, or
4[bottom].

2–6 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Syntax

Channel Mnemonics Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Symbol Meaning
 A channel specifier;  is either
, , , or .
For the TDS 410A, which has only two channels,  is either

or .
For the TDS 520A, 524A, and 620A,  and  represent
the front-panel inputs labeled AUX 1 and AUX 2 respectively.

Math Waveform Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in the
Mnemonics header.

Symbol Meaning
 A math waveform specifier;  is
, , or .

Reference Waveform Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the
Mnemonics header.

Symbol Meaning

 A reference waveform specifier;  is either
, , , or .

Waveform Mnemonics In some commands, you can specify a waveform regardless of whether it is a
channel waveform, a math waveform, or a reference waveform. Specify such a
waveform as follows:

Symbol Meaning
 Can be ,  or


Argument Types
The argument of a command may be in one of several forms. The individual
descriptions of each command tell which argument types to use with that
command.

Numeric Arguments Many digitizing oscilloscope commands require numeric arguments. The syntax
shows the format that the digitizing oscilloscope returns in response to a query.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–7

Command Syntax

This is also the preferred format when sending the command to the digitizing
oscilloscope though any of the formats will be accepted. This manual represents
these arguments as follows:

Symbol Meaning
<NR1> Signed integer value
<NR2> Floating point value without an exponent
<NR3> Floating point value with an exponent

Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting, either by

rounding or truncating, when an invalid number is input unless otherwise noted
in the command description.

Quoted String Arguments Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string, which is
simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote (') or double
quote ("). For example:
"this is a quoted string"

Symbol Meaning
<QString> Quoted string of ASCII text

Follow these rules when you use quoted strings:

1. A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7-bit ASCII
character set. (See Appendix A: Character Charts on page A–2).
2. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string:
"this is a valid string"
3. You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the
previous rule:
"this is an 'acceptable' string"
4. You can include a quote character within a string simply by repeating the
quote. For example,
"here is a "" mark"
5. Strings can have upper or lower case characters.
6. If you use a GPIB network, you cannot terminate a quoted string with the
END message before the closing delimiter.

2–8 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Syntax

7. A carriage return or line feed imbedded in a quoted string does not terminate
the string, but is treated as just another character in the string.
8. The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000
characters.
Here are some invalid strings:
H "Invalid string argument'
(quotes are not of the same type)
H "test<EOI>"
(termination character is embedded in the string)

Block Arguments Several digitizing oscilloscope commands use a block argument form:

Symbol Meaning
<NZDig> A nonzero digit character, in the range 1–9
<Dig> A digit character, in the range 0–9
<DChar> A character with the hex equivalent of 00 through FF
hexadecimal (0 through 255 decimal)
<Block> A block of data bytes, defined as:
<Block> ::=
{ #<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...]
| #0[<DChar>...]<terminator> }

<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together, the
<Dig> elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many <DChar>
elements follow.
Figure 2–2 provides a diagram of block argument use.

Block Argument

ALIas:DEFINE SETUp1",#231AUTOSet EXECute;:SELect:REF1 ON

Block Header Specifies Data Length

Specifies Number of
Length Digits that Follow

Figure 2–2: Block Argument Example

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–9

Command Syntax

Syntax Diagrams
The syntax diagrams in this manual use the following symbols and notation:
H Circles and ovals contain literal elements. You must send most elements
exactly as shown. The command mnemonics are shown in both upper and
lower case to distinguish between complete and abbreviated spellings. These
elements are not case sensitive. You can omit the lower case portion of the
mnemonic.
H Boxes contain the defined elements described earlier in this section, such as

 or 
.
H Elements are connected by arrows that show the allowed paths through the
diagram and, thus, the orders in which you can send the elements. Parallel
paths show that you must take one and only one of the paths. A path around
a group of elements shows that those elements are optional. Loops show
elements that you can repeat.
Figure 2–3 shows the structure of a few typical syntax diagrams.

Figure 2–3: Typical Syntax Diagrams

2–10 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Command Groups

This section lists TDS Family Oscilloscope commands in two ways. It first
presents them by functional groups. It then lists them alphabetically. The
functional group list starts below. The alphabetical list provides more detail on
each command and starts on page 2–39.
The TDS Family Oscilloscope GPIB interface conforms to Tektronix standard
codes and formats and IEEE Std 488.2–1987 except where noted.

Acquisition Commands
Acquisition commands affect waveform acquisition. These commands control
mode, averaging, enveloping, and single-waveform acquisition. (Persistence
controls are in the Display Commands section on page 2–14.) Table 2–4 lists
these commands.

Table 2–4: Acquisition Commands

Header Description
ACQuire? Return acquisition parameters
ACQuire:AUTOSAve Save waveforms to reference memory
(TDS 7XXA & some 6XXA)
ACQuire:MODe Acquisition mode
ACQuire:NUMACq? Return # of acquisitions obtained
ACQuire:NUMAVg Number of acquisitions for average
ACQuire:NUMEnv Number of acquisitions for envelope
ACQuire:REPEt Repetitive acquisition mode
(TDS 4XXA, 5XXA, & 7XXA)
ACQuire:STATE Start or stop acquisition system
ACQuire:STOPAfter Acquisition control

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–11

Command Groups

Alias Commands
Alias commands let you define your own commands as a sequence of standard
commands. This is useful when you use the same commands each time you
perform a certain task, such as setting up measurements. Table 2–5 lists these
commands.

Table 2–5: Alias Commands

Header Description
  Turn the alias state on and off
 
 Return a list of aliases
 

 Create a new alias
 
   Remove an alias
 
  
 Remove all aliases
 
  
 Remove a named alias
 
 Turn the alias state on and off

Application Menu Commands

Application menu commands let you define special-purpose menus. You can
define labels for the main and side menus as well as a side menu title. You can
display an Application menu by either pressing the front-panel APPLICATION
button or sending the APPMenu ACTivate command. Table 2–6 lists these
commands.
When the digitizing oscilloscope displays an Application menu and a user
presses a front-panel button, the oscilloscope generates an event that tells the
controller which button the user pressed. You can also set up the event reporting
system so that it generates a Service Request when a user presses a menu button.

Table 2–6: Application Menu Commands

Header Description
 Display the application menu

 Return or remove all application menu button
labels


 Label for a bottom menu button


  Label for a side menu button

  Create a title for the application menu

2–12 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Calibration and Diagnostic Commands

Calibration and Diagnostic commands let you start the self-calibration and
diagnostic routines that are built-into the oscilloscope. The diagnostic test
operation includes selecting the test sequence, executing the sequence, and
viewing the results. Table 2–7 lists these commands.

Table 2–7: Calibration and Diagnostic Commands

Header Description

 Perform an internal self-calibration

 Return diagnostic tests status

 Return diagnostic test sequence results

$$  Acquisition system diagnostic test sequence

$ Diagnostic test sequence for Acquisition,
Processor, Display, and Front panel

$ Processor diagnostic test sequence

$ !& Display system diagnostic test sequence

$ Front panel diagnostic test sequence

Control of diagnostic tests

Cursor Commands
Cursor commands provide control over cursor (caliper) display and readout.
Table 2–8 lists these commands.

Table 2–8: Cursor Commands

Header Description
 " Return cursor settings
 "$  Cursors on or off; select cursor type
 " "# Return H bar settings
 " "#
 Return distance between H bars
 " "#% Position a horizontal cursor
 " "#%$ Position a horizontal cursor in units of % of
(TDS 4XXA) vertical range
 " "#
$ Set which cursor the knob controls
 " "#$# Set H bar units
 "  Set cursor tracking mode

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–13

Command Groups

Table 2–8: Cursor Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
!# # Positions paired cursors. Also, returns settings
!# #
 Return horizontal distance between 1st and
2nd paired cursors.
!# #
 Return horizontal position of 1st paired cursor
!# # Return horizontal position of 2nd paired cursor
!# #  ' % Position the horizontal paired cursor in units of
(TDS 4XXA) % of record length
!# #  ' Set or return vbar position of the1st or 2nd
paired cursor
!# #% Select active paired cursor
!# # %$ Set paired cursor units
!# #
 Return vertical distance between 1st and 2nd
paired cursors
!##$ Position vertical bar cursors
!##$
 Return horizontal distance between cursors
!##$  ' Position a vertical cursor
!##$  ' % Position a vertical cursor in units of % of
(TDS 4XXA) record length
!##$% Set which cursor the knob controls
!##$ %$ Set vertical cursors to seconds, frequency, or
to lines (with option 05 video on the TDS
5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
!##$ #  (TDS 4XXA) Return unit string for the vertical bar cursor

Display Commands
Display commands let you change the graticule style, change the displayed
intensities, display messages, and clear the menu. Table 2–9 lists these com-
mands.

Table 2–9: Display Commands

Header Description
 & Clear menus from display

"( Return display settings

"(   Control the display of the date/time stamp

2–14 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Table 2–9: Display Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
#)$%& Control collision contrast
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA)
#)$&  Sets color for math or ref waveform to the
!&% color of the waveform content
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA)
#)$&  Set color for math or ref waveform to specific
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA) color index
#)$
&&
%&! Set current persistence palette to a preset
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA) persistence palette
#)$
&&
'$ Set current palette to a preset palette
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA)
#)$
&&

 Reset all palettes to their factory default
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA) settings
#)$
&& Reset a selected palette to its factory default
#&& ! 

 settings
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA)
#)$
&& Set the color of a selected item on a selected
#&& ! & !  palette
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA)
#) $ Displayed data interpolation
#)& YT or XY display
#)&' Graticule style
#) &('
%&! InstaVu persistence type – variable or infinite
(TDS 7XXA)
#) &(' InstaVu waveform dots or vector style
(TDS 7XXA)
#) &('#$%%& InstaVu variable persistence decay time
(TDS 7XXA)
#) 
 ) Return intensity settings
#) 
 )%& Waveform intensified zone brightness
(TDS 4X0A, 520A, 540A, 620A, & 640A)
#) 
 )
 Main brightness
(TDS 4X0A, 520A, 540A, 620A, & 640A)
#) 
 )
& Text brightness
#) 
 )
"$ Waveform brightness
#)  Normal or InstaVu display mode
#)
%&! Variable persistence decay time

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–15

Command Groups

Table 2–9: Display Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
DISplay:STYle Waveform dots, vector, infinite persistence, or
variable persistence
DISplay:TRIGBar Control the display of the trigger bar/s on
screen
DISplay:TRIGT Control the display of the trigger indicator on
screen
MESSage Remove text from the message window
MESSage:BOX Set size and location of message window
MESSage:SHOw Remove and display text in the message
window
MESSage:STATE Control display of message window

File System Commands

File system commands help you use the built-in 3.5 inch floppy disk drive
(available with the File System). Table 2–10 lists these commands.

Table 2–10: File System Commands

Header Description
FILESystem:COPy Copy file to new file
FILESystem:CWD Set directory path
FILESystem:DELEte Delete named file
FILESystem:DELWarn Set front-panel delete warning
FILESystem:DIR Make directory
FILESystem:FORMat Format named drive
FILESystem:FREESpace Return free space on current drive
FILESystem:MKDir Make new directory
FILESystem:OVERWrite Set file-overwrite protection
FILESystem:PRInt Print file to port
FILESystem:REName Assign new name to file
FILESystem:RMDir Delete named directory

2–16 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Hardcopy Commands
Hardcopy commands let you control the format of hardcopy output and the
initiation and termination of hardcopies. Table 2–11 lists these commands.

Table 2–11: Hardcopy Commands

Header Description
HARDCopy Start or terminate hardcopy
HARDCopy:FILEName Select file to send hardcopy data to
(File System only)
HARDCopy:FORMat Hardcopy output format
HARDCopy:LAYout Hardcopy orientation
HARDCopy:PALEtte Select palette to use when making hardcopy
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, 7XXA)
HARDCopy:PORT Hardcopy port for output

Horizontal Commands
Horizontal commands control the time bases of the digitizing oscilloscope. You
can set the time per division (or time per point) of both the main and delay time
bases. You can also set the record lengths. Table 2–12 lists these commands.
You may substitute SECdiv for SCAle in the horizontal commands. This
provides program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix digitizing
oscilloscopes.

Table 2–12: Horizontal Commands

Header Description
HORizontal? Return horizontal settings
HORizontal:CLOck Enable internal or external clocks
(TDS 4XXA only)
HORizontal:CLOck:MAXRate Set maximum external clock rate
(TDS 4XXA only)
HORizontal:DELay? Return delay time base settings
HORizontal:DELay:MODe Delay time base mode
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle Delay time base time per division
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv Same as HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe Delay time

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–17

Command Groups

Table 2–12: Horizontal Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe? Return delay time parameters
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter Time to wait in delay-runs-after-main mode
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter Time to wait in delay-runs-after-trigger mode
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt Select FastFrame count
(TDS 5XXA & 7XXA only)
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth Select length of each FastFrame frame
(TDS 5XXA & 7XXA only)
HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition Select FastFrame frame to display
(TDS 5XXA & 7XXA only)
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE Setup FastFrame acquisition
(TDS 5XXA & 7XXA only)
HORizontal:FITtoscreen Setup waveform compress
(TDS 4XXA, 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
HORizontal:MAIn? Return main time per division
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle Main time base time per division
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
HORizontal:MODe Turn delay time base on or off
HORizontal:POSition Portion of waveform to display
HORizontal:RECOrdlength Number of points in waveform record
HORizontal:ROLL Set roll mode to auto or off
(TDS 4XXA only)
HORizontal:SCAle Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
HORizontal:SECdiv Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
HORizontal:TRIGger? Return trigger position
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition Main time base trigger position

2–18 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Limit Test Commands

The Limit Test commands let you automatically compare each incoming
waveform against a template waveform. You set an envelope of limits around a
waveform and let the digitizing oscilloscope find the waveforms that fall outside
those limits. When it finds such a waveform, it can generate a hardcopy, ring a
bell, stop and wait for your input, or any combination of these actions. Table
2–13 lists these commands.

Table 2–13: Limit Test Commands

Header Description
#
 Ring bell when limit exceeded
#!"% Template to compare waveform to
#!" % Template to compare math waveform to
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
#  !& Make hardcopy when limit exceeded
#  Turn limit testing on or off
# # Template to compare waveform to
# # #  Reference storage for template waveform
# #" Template waveform source
# #" Tested waveform horizontal tolerance
' #
# #"  Tested waveform vertical tolerance

Measurement Commands
Measurement commands control the automated measurement system. Table 2–14
lists these commands.
Up to four automated measurements can be displayed on the screen. In the
commands, these four measurement readouts are named  %, where % can
be
, , , or .
In addition to the four displayed measurements, the measurement commands let
you specify a fifth measurement, . The immediate measurement has no
front-panel equivalent. Immediate measurements are never displayed. Because
they are computed only when needed, immediate measurements slow the
waveform update rate less than displayed measurements.
Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements, you use the  $
query to obtain measurement results.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–19

Command Groups

Measurement commands can set and query measurement parameters. You can
assign some parameters, such as waveform sources, differently for each
measurement readout. Other parameters, such as reference levels, have only one
value, which applies to all measurements.

Table 2–14: Measurement Commands

Header Description
%!"' Return all measurement parameters
%!"' $&#' Take down measurement snapshot
%!"'  Set or query measurement gating
%!"'  Return immediate measurement parameters
%!"' 
* Return info on immediate delay measurement
%!"' 
* Search direction to use for delay measure-

' #" ments
%!"' 
*
 Which waveform edge to use for delay
measurements
%!"' 
*
 Which waveform edge to use for delay
measurements
%!"'   Channel to take measurement from
%!"'   Second channel to take measurement from
(delay or “to” channel)
%!"'  The measurement to be taken
%!"'  '& Return measurement units
%!"' ( Return measurement result
%!"') Return parameters on measurement
%!"')
* Return delay measurement parameters
%!"')
* Search direction to use for delay measure-

' #" ments
%!"')
*
 Which waveform edge to use for delay
measurements
%!"')
*
 Which waveform edge to use for delay
measurements
%!"')   Channel to take measurement from
%!"')  Second channel to take measurement from
(delay or “to” channel)
%!"') Turn measurement display on or off
%!"') The measurement to be taken
%!"') '& Return units to use for measurement

2–20 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Table 2–14: Measurement Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? Return measurement result
MEASUrement:METHod Method for calculating reference levels
MEASUrement:REFLevel? Return reference levels
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH The top level for risetime (90% level)
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW The low level for risetime (10% level)
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID Mid level for measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 Mid level for delay measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod Method to assign HIGH and LOW
levels: either % or absolute volts
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH The top level for risetime (90% level)
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW The low level for risetime (10% level)
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID Mid level for measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 Mid level for delay measurements
MEASUrement:SNAPShot Display measurement snapshot

Miscellaneous Commands
Miscellaneous commands do not fit into other categories. Table 2–15 lists these
commands.
Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2–1987 devices on the
GPIB bus. The 488.2–1987 standard defines them. They begin with a star (*)
character.

Table 2–15: Miscellaneous Commands

Header Description
AUTOSet Automatic instrument setup
BELl Audio alert
*DATE Set date
*DDT Define group execute trigger (GET)
FACtory Reset to factory default
HDR Same as HEADer
HEADer Return command header with query
*IDN? Identification

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–21

Command Groups

Table 2–15: Miscellaneous Commands (Cont.)

Header Description

 Learn device setting
! Lock front panel (local lockout)

%'' Change password for User Protected Data
$& Access to change User Protected Data

 No action; remark only

 Same as *LRN?

)& Initialize waveforms and setups

 Set time

 Perform Group Execute Trigger (GET)

 Self-test
$! Unlock front panel (local lockout)

$' Return full command name or minimum
spellings with query

RS-232 Commands
RS-232 commands allow you to utilize the serial communications port (available
with the RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface). Table 2–16 lists these
commands.

Table 2–16: RS-232 Commands

Header Description
 Return RS-232 parameters
 Set baud rate
  " # Set hard flagging
 (* Set parity
" # Set soft flagging
 (' Set # of stop bits

Save and Recall Commands

Save and Recall commands allow you to store and retrieve internal waveforms
and settings. When you “save a setup,” you save all the settings of the digitizing
oscilloscope. When you then “recall a setup,” the digitizing oscilloscope restores

2–22 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

itself to the state it was in when you originally saved that setting. Table 2–17
lists these commands.

Table 2–17: Save and Recall Commands

Header Description
  Return number of allocated and unallocated
data points
 
 Return number of allocated data points
 


 Return number of unallocated data points

 

! Specify the number of allocated data points



 Delete stored setup



 Delete stored waveform

 Recall settings


 Recall saved instrument settings


 Recall saved waveform
(File System only)

 Save settings

 Save instrument settings

 Save waveform


 Specifies the file format for saved waveforms
(TDS 4XXA & 7XXA only)

Status and Error Commands

Table 2–18 lists the status and error commands the digitizing oscilloscope
supports. These commands let you determine the status of the digitizing
oscilloscope and control events.
Several commands and queries used with the digitizing oscilloscope are common
to all devices on the GPIB bus. IEEE Std 488.2–1987 defines these commands
and queries. They begin with an asterisk (
).

Table 2–18: Status and Error Commands

Header Description

 Return all events
 Return scope status

  Clear status

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–23

Command Groups

Table 2–18: Status and Error Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
 Device event status enable

 Event status enable

 Return standard event status register

 Return event code
  Return event code and message
  Return number of events in queue
 Identification

 Operation complete

 Return installed options

 Power-on status clear

 Query or set User Protected Data

 Reset

 Service request enable

 Read status byte

 Wait to continue

Trigger Commands
Trigger commands control all aspects of digitizing oscilloscope triggering. Table
2–19 lists these commands.
There are two triggers, main and delayed. Where appropriate, the command set
has parallel constructions for each trigger.
You can set the main or delayed triggers to edge mode. Edge triggering lets you
display a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a voltage
level of your choosing.
You can also set TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, and 7XXA main triggers to pulse and logic
modes. Pulse triggering lets the oscilloscope trigger whenever it detects a pulse
of a certain width or height. Logic triggering lets you logically combine the
signals on one or more channels. The digitizing oscilloscope then triggers when
it detects a certain combination of signal levels.

2–24 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Table 2–19: Trigger Commands

Header Description
TRIGger Force trigger event; Return parameters
TRIGger:DELay Delay trigger level to 50%
TRIGger:DELay:BY Delay by time or events
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE? Return delay trigger parameters
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling Delay trigger coupling
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe Delay trigger slope
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce Delay trigger source
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS? Return delay trigger event parameters
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt Delay by events count
TRIGger:DELay:LEVel Delay trigger level
TRIGger:DELay:TIMe Time for delay by time
TRIGger:DELay:TYPe Delay trigger, edge
TRIGger:MAIn Main trigger level to 50%
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE? Return main edge trigger parameters
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling Main trigger coupling
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe Main trigger slope
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce Main trigger source
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDoff? Return main trigger holdoff value
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDoff:ACTUal? Return main trigger holdoff value in seconds
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff:BY Main trigger holdoff default
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff:TIMe Main trigger holdoff time
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff:VALue Main trigger holdoff value
(Not in TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel Main trigger level
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc? Returns main logic trigger parameters
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss Logic trigger input usage
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion Logic trigger input combining
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut? Return main logic trigger input settings
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–25

Command Groups

Table 2–19: Trigger Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> Logic trigger expected channel state
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern: Logic trigger expected for channel 4 pattern
INPut:CH4 class
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn Main logic pattern trigger condition
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern Maximum time the selected pattern may be
:WHEn:LESSLimit true and still generate main logic pattern
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA) trigger
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern Minimum time the selected pattern may be
:WHEn:MORELimit true and still generate main logic pattern
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA) trigger
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold: Clock edge polarity for setup and hold violation
CLOCk:EDGE triggering
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold: Setup/Hold clock voltage trigger level.
CLOCk:LEVel
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold: Setup/Hold clock input source
CLOCk:SOUrce
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold: Setup/Hold data level
DATa:LEVel
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold: Setup/Hold data input data channel
DATa:SOUrce
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold: Setup/Hold trigger hold time
HOLDTime
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold: Setup/Hold trigger set time
SETTime
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut: Logic trigger expected for channel 4 state
CH4 class
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn When the logic trigger occurs (on true or false)
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold? Return main logic thresholds
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)

2–26 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Table 2–19: Trigger Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
 #
 !
 
$"
Logic trigger thresholds
&
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
 
 ! Logic trigger on combination true or false
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
 Main trigger mode
 #
 !
$ Returns pulse trigger parameters
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$
$$ Pulse trigger class
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$
 % Returns glitch trigger parameters
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$
 %

# Glitch filter on and off
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$
 %
Glitch filter positive, negative, or both
#%'
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$
 %
 % Glitch trigger with differentiation between glitch
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA) and valid pulse
 #
 !
$
 Return runt trigger parameters
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$

#%' Runt trigger positive, negative, or both
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$

$" Return runt trigger thresholds
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$

Trigger level switching thresholds
$"

(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$

Upper limit for runt pulse
$"
 
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$

Lower limit for runt pulse
$"

(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$

 ! Runt pulse width type to check for
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$

 % Minimum width for valid main pulse runt trigger
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
 #
 !
$
 %
Slew rate trigger delta time
  
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–27

Command Groups

Table 2–19: Trigger Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate: Slew rate trigger polarity
POLarity
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate: Return slew rate value
SLEWRate?
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate: Upper and lower slew rate trigger thresholds
THReshold:BOTh
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate: Upper limit for slew rate pulse
THReshold:HIGH
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate: Lower limit for slew rate pulse
THReshold:LOW
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:WHEn Slewing signal type to check for
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce Pulse trigger channel
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth? Return trigger pulse width parameters
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit Pulse trigger maximum pulse width
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit Pulse trigger minimum pulse width
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity Pulse trigger positive, negative, or both
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn Pulse trigger when pulse detected or when not
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA) detected
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe Set main trigger to edge, logic, pulse, or, with
option 5, video type
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo? Return video trigger parameters
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY Set video trigger delay mode
(TDS 4XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD Set video trigger field
(Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType Set video trigger field type
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)

2–28 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Table 2–19: Trigger Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat? Return FlexFormat parameters
(TDS 5XXA. 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat: Set FlexFormat frames per second
FIELDRATE
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat: Set FlexFormat video fields
FIELDS
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat: Set FlexFormat lines in a frame
LINES
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat: Set FlexFormat negative sync width
NEGSynchwidth
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat: Set time from positive (+) edge of tri-sync
V1STArttime pulse for the last line in the selected field to
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05) the leading edge (–) of the first negative
vertical sync pulse
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat: Set time from positive edge of tri-sync pulse
V1STOptime for the last line in the selected field (t0) to
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05) trailing edge (positive) of the first negative
vertical sync pulse
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo: Set time from t0 to the leading edge (positive)
FLEXformat:V2STArttime of the second vertical sync pulse
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo: Set time from t0 to trailing edge (positive) of
FLEXformat:V2STOptime the second negative vertical sync pulse
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv) Select high definition TV format
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff? Return video trigger holdoff
(TDS 4XXA Option 5)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue Set video trigger holdoff value
(TDS 4XXA Option 5)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:INTERLAce Select video trigger interlace format
(TDS 4XXA Option 5)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE Set video trigger delay in terms of a number of
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05) lines
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES Set video trigger delay in terms of a number of
(TDS 4XXA Option 5) lines
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc Select color or mono NTSC
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–29

Command Groups

Table 2–19: Trigger Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL Select color or mono PAL
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN Set video trigger scan rate
(TDS 4XXA Option 5)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod Set video trigger scan period
(TDS 4XXA Option 5)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce Select video trigger source
Option 05
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard Select video trigger standard
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc Select video trigger sync polarity
(Option 05)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem Select video trigger class
(TDS 4XXA Option 5)
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe Set video trigger delay time
(TDS 4XXA Option 5)
TRIGger:STATE? Return trigger system status

2–30 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Vertical Commands
Vertical commands control the display of channels and of main and reference
waveforms. Table 2–20 lists these commands.
The SELect:<wfm> command also selects the waveform many commands in
other command groups use.
You may replace VOLts for SCAle in the vertical commands. This provides
program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix digitizing oscilloscopes.

Table 2–20: Vertical Commands

Header Description
CH<x>? Return vertical parameters
CH<x>:BANdwidth Channel bandwidth
CH<x>:COUPling Channel coupling
CH<x>:IMPedance Channel impedance
CH<x>:OFFSet Channel offset
CH<x>:POSition Channel position
CH<x>:PRObe? Return channel probe attenuation
CH<x>:SCAle Channel volts per div
CH<x>:VOLts Same as CH<x>:SCAle
MATH<x>? Return math waveform definition
MATH<x>:DEFine Define math waveform
MATH<x>:NUMAVg Acquisition number at which to begin
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA, exponential averaging
some models require Option 2F)
MATH<x>:PROCessing Math waveform averaging on or off
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA,
some models require Option 2F)
SELect? Return selected waveform
SELect:CONTROl Front-panel channel selector
SELect:<wfm> Set selected waveform

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–31

Command Groups

Waveform Commands
Waveform commands let you transfer waveform data points to and from the
digitizing oscilloscope. Waveform data points are a collection of values that
define a waveform. One data value usually represents one data point in the
waveform record. When working with enveloped waveforms, each data value is
either the min or max of a min/max pair. Before you transfer waveform data, you
must specify the data format, record length, and waveform locations.
Table 2–21 lists these commands.

Waveform Data Formats Acquired waveform data uses either one or two 8-bit data bytes to represent each
data point. The number of bytes used depends on the acquisition mode specified
when you acquired the data. Data acquired in SAMple, ENVelope, or PEAKde-
tect mode uses one 8-bit byte per waveform data point. Data acquired in HIRes
or AVErage mode uses two 8-bit bytes per point. For more information on the
acquisition modes see the ACQuire: MODe command on page 2–40.
The DATa:WIDth command lets you specify the number of bytes per data point
when transferring data to and from the digitizing oscilloscope. If you specify two
bytes for data that uses only one, the least significant byte will be filled with
zeros. If you specify one byte for data that uses two, the least significant byte
will be ignored.
The digitizing oscilloscope can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary
format. You specify the format with the DATa:ENCdg command.

ASCII data — is represented by signed integer values. The range of the values
depends on the byte width specified. One byte wide data ranges from –128 to
127. Two byte wide data ranges from –32768 to 32767.
Each data value requires two to seven characters. This includes one to five
characters to represent the value, another character, if the value is negative, to
represent a minus sign, and a comma to separate the data points.
An example ASCII waveform data string may look like this:
 


















Use ASCII to obtain more human readable and easier to format output than
binary. However, it may require more bytes to send the same values with ASCII
than it does with binary. This may reduce transmission speeds.

Binary data — can be represented by signed integer or positive integer values.

The range of the values depends on the byte width specified. When the byte
width is one, signed integer data ranges from –128 to 127, and positive integer

2–32 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

values range from 0 to 255. When the byte width is two, the values range from
–32768 to 32767.
The defined binary formats also specify the order in which the bytes are
transferred. The four binary formats are RIBinary, RPBinary, SRIbinary, and
SRPbinary.
RIBinary is signed integer where the most significant byte is transferred first,
and RPBinary is positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred
first. SRIbinary and SRPbinary correspond to RIBinary and RPBinary respec-
tively but use a swapped byte order where the least significant byte is transferred
first. The byte order is ignored when DATa:WIDth is set to 1.

Waveform Data/Record You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record. You can transfer a
Lengths portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record. The DATa:STARt
and DATa:STOP commands let you specify the first and last data points of the
waveform record.
When transferring data into the digitizing oscilloscope, you must specify the
location of the first data point within the waveform record. For example, when
you set DATa:STARt to 1, data points will be stored starting with the first point
in the record, and when you set DATa:STARt to 500, data will be stored starting
at the 500th point in the record. The digitizing oscilloscope will ignore
DATa:STOP when reading in data as it will stop reading data when it has no
more data to read or when it has reached the specified record length.
When transferring data from the digitizing oscilloscope, you must specify the
first and last data points in the waveform record. Setting DATa:STARt to 1 and
DATa:STOP to the record length will always return the entire waveform. You can
also use the vertical bar cursors to delimit the portion of the waveform that you
want to transfer. DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP can then be set to the current
cursor positions by sending the command DATa SNAp.

Waveform Data Locations The DATa:SOUrce command specifies the data location when transferring
and Memory Allocation waveforms from the digitizing oscilloscope. You can transfer out multiple
waveforms at one time by specifying more than one source.
You can transfer in to the digitizing oscilloscope only one waveform at a time.
Waveforms sent to the oscilloscope are always stored in one of the four reference
memory locations. You can specify the reference memory location with the
DATa:DESTination command. You must define the memory size for the
specified location before you store the data. The ALLOcate:
WAVEFORM:REF<x> command lets you specify the memory size for each
reference location.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–33

Command Groups

Waveform Preamble Each waveform that you transfer has an associated waveform preamble that
contains information such as the horizontal scale, the vertical scale, and other
settings in place when the waveform was created. Refer to the WFMPre
commands starting on page 2–288 for more information about the waveform
preamble.

Scaling Waveform Data Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller, you can convert the data
points into voltage values for analysis using information from the waveform
preamble. The 
 program on the diskettes that come with this manual
shows how you can scale data.

Transferring Waveform You can transfer waveforms from the digitizing oscilloscope to an external
Data from the TDS Family controller using the following sequence:
Oscilloscope
1. Select the waveform source(s) using the DATa:SOUrce command. If you
want to transfer multiple waveforms, select more than one source.
2. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.
3. Specify the number of bytes per data point using DATa:WIDth.
4. Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.
5. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMPRe? query.
6. Transfer waveform data from the digitizing oscilloscope using the CURVe?
query.

Transferring Waveform You can transfer waveform data to one of the four reference memory locations in
Data to the TDS Family the digitizing oscilloscope using the following sequence:
Oscilloscope
1. Specify waveform reference memory using DATa:DESTination.
2. Specify the memory size for the reference location specified in Step 1 using
the ALLOcate:WAVEFORM:REF<x> command.
3. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.
4. Specify the number of bytes per data point using DATa:WIDth.
5. Specify first data point in the waveform record using DATa:STARt.
6. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMPRe:<wfm>.
7. Transfer waveform data to the digitizing oscilloscope using CURVe.

2–34 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Table 2–21: Waveform Commands

Header Description
CURVe Transfer waveform data
DATa Waveform data format and location
DATa:DESTination Destination for waveforms sent to digitizing
oscilloscope
DATa:ENCdg Waveform data encoding method
DATa:SOUrce Source of CURVe? data
DATa:STARt Starting point in waveform transfer
DATa:STOP Ending point in waveform transfer
DATa:TARget Same as DATa:DESTination
DATa:WIDth Byte width of waveform points
WAVFrm? Return waveform preamble and data
WAVPre? Return waveform format data
WFMPre:BIT_Nr Preamble bit width of waveform points.
WFMPre:BN_Fmt Preamble binary encoding type
WFMPre:BYT_Nr Preamble byte width of waveform points
WFMPre:BYT_Or Preamble byte order of waveform points
WFMPre:CRVchk Preamble checksum of waveform points
WFMPre:ENCdg Preamble encoding method
WFMPre:NR_Pt Number of points in the curve
WFMPre:PT_Fmt Format of curve points
WFMPre:PT_Off Trigger position
WFMPre:WFId Curve identifier
WFMPre:XINcr Horizontal sampling interval
WFMPre:XMUlt Horizontal scale factor
WFMPre:XOFf Horizontal offset
WFMPre:XUNit Horizontal units
WFMPre:XZEro Horizontal origin offset
WFMPre:YMUlt Vertical scale factor
WFMPre:YOFf Vertical offset
WFMPre:YUNit Vertical units
WFMPre:YZEro Offset voltage
WFMPre:ZMUlt Z-axis scale factor
WFMPre:ZOFf Z-axis offset

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–35

Command Groups

Table 2–21: Waveform Commands (Cont.)

Header Description
WFMPre:ZUNit Z-axis units
WFMPre:ZZEro Z-axis origin offset
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt Number of points in the curve
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt Format of curve points
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off Trigger position
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId Curve identifier
WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr Horizontal sampling interval
WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit Horizontal units
WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt Vertical scale factor
WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf Vertical offset
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit Vertical units
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro Offset voltage

2–36 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Groups

Zoom Commands
Zoom commands let you expand and position the waveform display horizontally
and vertically without changing the time base or vertical settings. Table 2–22
lists these commands.

Table 2–22: Zoom Commands

Header Description
ZOOm Reset zoom parameters to defaults
ZOOm:DUAl (TDS 4XXA & 7XXA) Turn dual zoom mode on and off
ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet (TDS 4XXA & 7XXA) Adjust the requested horizontal offset between
the centers of the main and second zoom
boxes.
ZOOm:GRAticle (TDS 4XXA & 7XXA) Select between the upper and lower graticule
for use by the zoom preview state.
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk Horizontal zoom lock
ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition Horizontal zoom position
ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle Horizontal zoom scale
ZOOm:STATE Turn zoom mode on or off
ZOOm:VERTical:POSition Vertical zoom position
ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle Vertical zoom scale

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–37

Command Groups

2–38 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Command Descriptions

You can use commands to either set instrument features or query instrument
values. You can use some commands to do both, some to only set, and some to
only query. This manual marks set only commands with the words “No Query
Form” included with the command name. It marks query only commands with a
question mark appended to the header, and includes the words “Query Only” in
the command name.
This manual spells out headers, mnemonics, and arguments with the minimal
spelling shown in upper case. For example, to use the abbreviated form of the
ACQuire:MODe command just type ACQ:MOD.

ACQuire? (Query Only)

Returns all the current acquisition parameters.

Group Acquisition

Syntax  

  

Examples  
might return the string    

    for the current acquisition parameters.

ACQuire:AUTOSAve
TDS 7XXA & Some 6XXA Only
Saves waveforms in reference memory when acquisition completes. This is
equivalent to setting Autosave Single Seq in the Acquire menu and the
corresponding side menu Off or On items.
When you start a Single Sequence with Autosave set to ON, the oscilloscope
nulls out all existing reference waveforms. At the end of Single Sequence, the
oscilloscope saves all displayed live channels to reference waveform memory. It
saves references in the order Ch1 –> Ref1, Ch2 –> Ref2, Ch3 –> Ref3, Ch4 –>
Ref4. The exact number of references saved may depend on the record length
used.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–39

Command Descriptions

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:AUTOSAve { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

ACQuire:AUTOSAve?

OFF

<Space> ON

<NR1>
ACQuire : AUTOSAve
?

Arguments OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns repetitive mode off.

ON or <NR1>  0 turns repetitive mode on.

Examples ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE 1
turns autosave mode on.
ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE OFF
turns autosave mode off.
ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE?
might return 1, indicating that autosave mode is on.

ACQuire:MODe
Sets or queries the acquisition mode of the digitizing oscilloscope. This affects
all live waveforms. This command is equivalent to setting Mode in the Acquire
menu.
Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals.
Each acquisition interval represents a time duration set by the horizontal scale
(time per division). The digitizing oscilloscope sampling system always samples
at the maximum rate, and so an acquisition interval may include more than one
sample.
The acquisition mode, which you set using this ACQuire:MODe command,
determines how the final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the
many data samples.

Group Acquisition

2–40 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Related Commands ACQuire:NUMAVg, ACQuire:NUMENv, CURVe?, DATa:WIDth

Syntax For the TDS 4XXA, 5XXA & 7XXA:

ACQuire:MODe { SAMple | PEAKdetect | HIRes | AVErage |
ENVelope }
For the TDS 6XXA:
ACQuire:MODe { SAMple | AVErage | ENVelope }
For all TDS:
ACQuire:MODe?
For the TDS 4XXA, 5XXA, & 7XXA:

SAMple

PEAKdetect

<Space> HIRes

AVErage

ENVelope
ACQuire : MODe
?

For the TDS 6XXA:

SAMple

<Space> AVErage

ENVelope
ACQuire : MODe
?

Arguments SAMple specifies that the displayed data point value is simply the first sampled
value that was taken during the acquisition interval. In sample mode, all
waveform data has 8 bits of precision. You can request 16 bit data with a
CURVe? query, but the lower-order 8 bits of data will be zero. SAMple is the
default mode.
PEAKdetect (for the TDS 4XXA, 5XXA, & 7XXA) specifies the display of the
high-low range of the samples taken from a single waveform acquisition. The
high-low range is displayed as a vertical column that extends from the highest to
the lowest value sampled during the acquisition interval. PEAKdetect mode can
reveal the presence of aliasing or narrow spikes.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–41

Command Descriptions

HIRes (for the TDS 4XXA, 5XXA, & 7XXA) specifies Hi Res mode, where the
displayed data point value is the average of all the samples taken during the
acquisition interval. This is a form of averaging, where the average comes from a
single waveform acquisition. The number of samples taken during the acquisi-
tion interval determines the number of data values that compose the average.
AVErage specifies averaging mode, where the resulting waveform shows an
average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The
number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform
is set or queried using the ACQuire:NUMAVg command.
ENVelope specifies envelope mode, where the resulting waveform shows the
PEAKdetect range of data points from several separate waveform acquisitions.
The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the envelope
waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire:NUMENv command.

Examples ACQUIRE:MODE ENVELOPE

sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that is an envelope of many
individual waveform acquisitions.
ACQUIRE:MODE?
might return ENVELOPE.

ACQuire:NUMACq? (Query Only)

Indicates the number of acquisitions that have taken place since starting
acquisition. This value is reset to zero when any Acquisition, Horizontal, or
Vertical arguments that affect the waveform are modified. The maximum number
of acquisitions that can be counted is 230–1. Counting stops when this number is
reached. This is the same value that is displayed in the upper center of the screen
when the acquisition system is stopped.

Group Acquisition

Related Commands ACQuire:STATE

Syntax ACQuire:NUMACq?

ACQuire : NUMACq ?

Related Commands <NR1>

2–42 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples ACQUIRE:NUMACQ?
might return 350, indicating that 350 acquisitions took place since an AC-
QUIRE:STATE RUN command was executed.

ACQuire:NUMAVg
Sets the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform.
This is equivalent to setting the Average count in the Acquisition Mode side
menu.

Group Acquisition

Related Commands ACQuire:MODe

Syntax ACQuire:NUMAVg <NR1>

ACQuire:NUMAVg?

<Space> <NR1>
ACQuire : NUMAVg
?

Arguments <NR1> is the number of waveform acquisitions, from 2 to 10,000.

Examples ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 10
specifies that an averaged waveform will show the result of combining 10
separately acquired waveforms.
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG?
might return 75, indicating that there are 75 acquisitions specified for averaging.

ACQuire:NUMEnv
Sets the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an envelope waveform.
This is equivalent to setting the Envelope count in the Acquisition Mode side
menu.

Group Acquisition

Related Commands ACQuire:MODe

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–43

Command Descriptions

Syntax  
    
 





   



Arguments   0 is the number of waveform acquisitions, from 1 to 2000. The

envelope will restart after the specified number of envelopes have been acquired
or when the ACQuire:STATE RUN command is sent.
 or  = 0 specifies continuous enveloping.

NOTE. If you set the acquisition system to single sequence, envelope mode, and
set the number of envelopes to infinity, the digitizing oscilloscope will envelope a
maximum of 2001 acquisitions.

Examples  

 
specifies that an enveloped waveform will show the result of combining 10
separately acquired waveforms.
 


might return , indicating that acquisitions are acquired infinitely for enveloped
waveforms.

ACQuire:REPEt
TDS 4XXA, 5XXA, & 7XXA Only
Controls repetitive signal acquisition. This is equivalent to setting Repetitive
Signal in the Acquire menu. When the digitizing oscilloscope is in real-time
operation, this setting has no effect.
The ACQuire:REPEt command specifies the behavior of the acquisition system
during equivalent-time (ET) operation. When repetitive mode is on, the
acquisition system will continue to acquire waveform data until the waveform
record is filled with acquired data. When repetitive mode is off and you specify
single acquisition operation, only some of the waveform data points will be set
with acquired data, and the displayed waveform shows interpolated values for
the unsampled data points.

2–44 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Group Acquisition

Related Commands ACQuire:STATE, ACQuire:STOPAfter

Syntax ACQuire:REPEt { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

ACQuire:REPEt?

OFF

<Space> ON

<NR1>
ACQuire : REPEt
?

Arguments OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns repetitive mode off.

ON or <NR1>  0 turns repetitive mode on.

Examples ACQUIRE:REPET 1
turns repetitive mode on.
ACQUIRE:REPET OFF
turns repetitive mode off.
ACQUIRE:REPET?
might return 1, indicating that repetitive signal acquisition mode is on.

ACQuire:STATE
Starts or stops acquisitions. This is the equivalent of pressing the front-panel
RUN/STOP button. If ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to SEQuence, other signal
events may also stop acquisition.

Group Acquisition

Related Commands ACQuire:NUMACq?, ACQuire:REPEt, ACQuire:STOPAfter

Syntax ACQuire:STATE { OFF | ON | RUN | STOP | <NR1> }

ACQuire:STATE?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–45

Command Descriptions



 




 !  

Arguments  or  or  = 0 stops acquisitions.

 or  or   0 starts acquisition and display of waveforms. If the
command was issued in the middle of an acquisition sequence (for instance
averaging or enveloping),  restarts the sequence, discarding any data
accumulated prior to the . It also resets the number of acquisitions.

Examples  


starts acquisition of waveform data and resets the number of acquisitions count
(NUMACQ) to zero.
 


returns either  or , depending on whether the acquisition system is running.

ACQuire:STOPAfter
Tells the digitizing oscilloscope when to stop taking acquisitions. This is
equivalent to setting Stop After in the Acquire menu.

Group Acquisition

Related Commands ACQuire:MODe, ACQuire:STATE, ACQuire:REPEt

Syntax  !  "  # 

! #  $
 ! 


 
!
 !    

2–46 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Arguments RUNSTop specifies that the run and stop state should be determined by the user
pressing the front-panel RUN/STOP button.
SEQuence specifies “single sequence” operation, where the digitizing oscillo-
scope stops after it has acquired enough waveforms to satisfy the conditions of
the acquisition mode. For example, if the acquisition mode is set to sample, and
the horizontal scale is set to a speed that allows real-time operation, then the
digitizing oscilloscope will stop after digitizing a waveform from a single trigger
event. However, if the acquisition mode is set to average 100 waveforms, then
the digitizing oscilloscope will stop only after all 100 waveforms have been
acquired. The ACQuire: STATE command and the front-panel RUN/STOP
button will also stop acquisition when the digitizing oscilloscope is in single
sequence mode.
LIMit specifies the digitizing oscilloscope stops after the limit test condition is
met.

NOTE. If you set the acquisition system to single sequence, envelope mode, and
set the number of envelopes to infinity, the digitizing oscilloscope will envelope a
maximum of 2001 acquisitions.

Examples ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTop

sets the oscilloscope to stop acquisition when the user presses the front-panel
RUN/STOP button.
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER?
might return SEQUENCE.

ALIas
Turns command aliases on or off. This command is identical to the
ALIas:STATE command.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

ALIas?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–47

Command Descriptions

OFF

<Space> ON

<NR1>
ALIas
?

Arguments OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias label is sent when
ALIas is OFF, an execution error (110, “Command header error”) will be
generated.
ON or <NR1>  0 turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the
specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.

Examples ALIAS ON
turns the alias feature on.
ALIAS?
returns 1 when aliases are on.

ALIas:CATalog? (Query Only)

Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels, separated by commas. If no
aliases are defined, the query returns the string "".

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:CATalog?

ALIas : CATalog ?

Returns <QString>[,<QString>...]

Examples ALIAS:CATALOG?
might return the string "SETUP1","TESTMENU1","DEFAULT", showing there are
3 aliases named SETUP1, TESTMENU1, and DEFAULT.

ALIas:DEFIne
Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label. These messages are
then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command or query

2–48 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

provided ALIas:STATE has been turned ON. The ALIas:DEFIne? query returns
the definition of a selected alias.
Up to 10 aliases can be defined at one time. Aliases can be recursive. That is,
aliases can include other aliases with up to 10 levels of recursion.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:DEFIne <QString><Comma>{ <QString> | <Block> }

ALIas:DEFIne? <QString>

<QString>
<Space> <QString> <Comma>
<Block>

ALIas : DEFIne
? <Space> <QString>

Arguments The first <QString> is the alias label. This label cannot be a command name.
Labels must start with a letter, and can contain only letters, numbers, and
underscores; other characters are not allowed. The label must be ≤12 characters.
The second <QString> or <Block> is a complete sequence of program messages.
The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by
semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands (see page
2–4). The sequence must be ≤80 characters.

NOTE. Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an execution error.
To give a new alias the name of an existing alias, you must first delete the
existing alias.

Examples ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",":RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1

ON"
defines an alias named “ST1” that sets up the digitizing oscilloscope.
ALIAS:DEFINE? "ST1"
might return :ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",#239:RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET
EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–49

Command Descriptions

ALIas:DELEte (No Query Form)

Removes a specified alias. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte:NAMe.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:DELEte <QString>

ALIas : DELEte <Space> <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the name of the alias you want to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte
without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be a
previously defined alias.

Examples ALIAS:DELETE "SETUP1"

deletes the alias named SETUP1.

ALIas:DELEte:ALL (No Query Form)

Deletes all existing aliases.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:DELEte:ALL

ALIas : DELEte : ALL

Examples ALIAS:DELETE:ALL
deletes all aliases.

ALIas:DELEte:NAMe (No Query Form)

Removes a specified alias. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:DELEte:NAMe <QString>

2–50 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

  
!     !

Arguments ! is the name of the alias to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte:NAMe

without specifying an alias causes an execution error. ! must be a
previously defined alias.

Examples  
   
deletes the alias named STARTUP.

ALIas:STATE
Turns aliases on or off. This command is identical to the ALIas command.

Group Alias

Syntax     "  #  #  $

   

 


    


Arguments  or  = 0 turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when
ALIas:STATE is OFF, a command error (102) will be generated.
 or   0 turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the
specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.

Examples    
turns the command alias feature off.
  
returns  when alias mode is off.

ALLEv? (Query Only)

Causes the digitizing oscilloscope to return all events and their messages, and
removes the returned events from the Event Queue. The messages are separated

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–51

Command Descriptions

by commas. Use the *ESR? query to enable the events to be returned. For a
complete discussion of the use of these registers, see page 3–1. This command is
similar to repeatedly sending *EVMsg? queries to the instrument.

Group Status and error

Related Commands *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, EVQTY, *SRE, *STB?

Syntax ALLEv?

ALLEv ?

Returns The event code and message in the following format:

<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Comma><Event Code><Comma>
<QString>...]
<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
<Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a
command error is detected by the digitizing oscilloscope. As much of the
command will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit
of the <Message> and <Command> strings combined. The command string is
right-justified.

Examples ALLEV?
might return the string :ALLEV 2225,"Measurement error, No waveform to
measure; ",420,"Query UNTERMINATED; ".

ALLOcate? (Query Only)

Returns the number of data points allocated for all four reference memory
locations.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax ALLOcate?

ALLOcate ?

2–52 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples ALLOCATE?
might return :ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF1 50000;REF2 0;REF3 0; REF4 0;,
indicating that all 50000 data points are allocated to reference memory loca-
tion 1.

ALLOcate:WAVEform? (Query Only)

Returns the number of data points allocated for all four reference memory
locations.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax ALLOcate:WAVEform?

ALLOcate : WAVEform ?

Examples ALLOCATE?
might return :ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF1 500;REF2 500;REF3 500; REF4 0;,
indicating that 500 data points are allocated to each of the first three reference
memory locations.

ALLOcate:WAVEform:FREE? (Query Only)

Returns the approximate number of data points that have not been allocated.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax ALLOcate:WAVEform:FREE?

ALLOcate : WAVEform : FREE ?

Returns <NR1> is the approximate number of data points available.

Examples ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:FREE?
might return 520 indicating that there are approximately 500 data points
available for allocation. The extra 20 are used for administration purposes.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–53

Command Descriptions

ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x>
Sets or queries the number of waveform data points for the specified reference
location. If an attempt is made to allocate memory when it is not available, an
execution error is generated and the memory is not allocated.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax 

    


  

  


     



Arguments   = 0 is returned when the reference location is empty.

   0 specifies the number of data points. Table 2–23 shows the number of
data points supported for reference locations by TDS model. In the TDS 5XXA
and 6XXA, all invalid values less than the maximum will be forced to the next
highest valid value, and those higher than the maximum will be forced to the
maximum. For example, 15002 points on a TDS 544A with option 1M will
allocate 50000 points of data for the reference. No complete references are stored
for 500000 data points in the TDS 7XXA.

Table 2–23: Waveform Data Points Supported for Reference Locations

TDS 520A,
TDS 410A, TDS 524A, TDS 620A,
TDS 420A, TDS 540A, TDS 640A, TDS 744A,
Configuration TDS 460A TDS 544A TDS 644A TDS 684A TDS 784A
Standard 500, 500, 500, 500, 500,
1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000,
2500, 2500, 2000 2500, 2500,
5000, 5000, 5000, 5000,
15000, 15000 15000 15000,
30000 (4 refs) 50000 (4 refs)
Option 1M 60000 (2 refs), 50000 75000 (3 refs),
120000 (1 ref) 100000 (2 refs),
130000 (2 refs),
250000 (1 ref)
500000 (no
complete refs)

2–54 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF2 1000

reserves 1,000 data points for REF2.
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF1?
might return 500

APPMenu
Displays the user-definable Application menu, and the query returns the current
Application menu labels and title. This is equivalent to pressing the front-panel
APPLICATION button.

Group Application Menu

Related Commands CLEARMenu, *ESR, EVENT?

Syntax APPMenu ACTivate

APPMenu?

<Space> ACTivate
APPMenu
?

Arguments ACTivate displays the Application menu. Use the CLEARMenu command to
deactivate the Application menu.
Once the Application menu is activated, whenever a front-panel menu button is
pressed an event is generated that tells which button was pressed. See page 3–17
for event codes.
Menu button presses will also generate Service Requests when the URQ bit is
enabled in DESER and ESER and the ESB bit is enabled in SRER. See page 3–1
for a complete discussion of the use of these registers.

Examples APPMENU ACTIVATE

displays the application menu.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–55

Command Descriptions

APPMenu:LABel
Removes all user-defined Application menu button labels from the display. The
APPMenu:LABel? query returns all the current label settings.

Group Application Menu

Syntax APPMenu:LABel CLEar

APPMenu:LABel?

<Space> CLEar
APPMenu : LABel
?

Arguments CLEar removes the main and side menu button labels from the display. Front-pa-
nel bezel button presses will continue to generate events.

Examples APPMENU:LABEL CLEAR

clears the user-defined menu labels from the display.

APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x>
Defines a label for the main menu button that is specified by <x>. Main menu
buttons are located along the bottom of the display, and are numbered from 1 to
7 starting with the left-most button.

Group Application Menu

Syntax APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> <QString>

APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x>?

<Space> <QString>

APPMenu : LABel : BOTTOM <x>

?

Arguments <QString> is the menu button label and can include any of the characters shown
in the TDS Character Chart in Appendix A. The maximum length of the label is
1000 characters. The TDS displays the label in the area above the specified main
menu button.

2–56 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

The TDS displays the label on a single line and centers it, both vertically and
horizontally, within the label area. You can embed a line feed character in the
string to position the label on multiple lines. You can also use white space tab
characters to position the label within a line.
You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character (decimal 9) followed by two
characters representing the most significant eight bits followed by the least
significant eight bits of a 16-bit number. The number specifies the pixel column
relative to the left margin of the label area. For example, to tab to pixel 13, send
TAB (decimal 9), NUL (decimal 0), and CR (decimal 13).
The ESC @ character turns reverse video on and off, and can be embedded in the
label string. The first ESC @ character displays all text following the ESC @ in
reverse video until another ESC @ character is found in the string.

NOTE. The use of any undocumented codes may produce unpredictable results.

The label area is 45 pixels high and 90 pixels wide. The length of the label that
fits in the label area depends on the contents of the label, because the width of
characters varies. The label area is about 10 characters wide and 3 lines high. For
a complete list of character widths in pixels, see Table A–1 on page A–1.
If the label exceeds the limits of the label area, either horizontally or vertically,
the portion of the label that exceeds the limits will not be displayed. Note: the
label itself is not altered. The entire label can be returned as a query response
regardless of what is displayed.

Examples 


 
assigns the label “SETUP1” to the third main menu button.

APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x>
Defines a label for the side menu button that is specified by <x>. Side menu
buttons are located on the right side of the display, and are numbered from 1 to 5
starting with the top-most button.

Group Application Menu

Syntax  
 ! 
 
 !

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–57

Command Descriptions

 ! 

"       #


Arguments !  is the menu button label and can include any of the characters shown
in the TDS Character Chart in Appendix A. The maximum length of the label is
1000 characters. The label is displayed in the area to the left of the specified side
menu button. Refer to the APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> command on page
2–57 for more information on defining menu labels.
The label area is 72 pixels high and 112 pixels wide. The length of the label that
fits in the label area depends on the contents of the label, because the width of
characters varies. The label area is about 12 characters wide and 4 lines high. For
a complete list of character widths in pixels, see Table A–1 on page A–1.

Examples 

  $
 
displays the label “TEST ON” next to the top side menu button.

APPMenu:TITLe
Sets or queries the user-defined application menu title. The title is displayed
above the side menu.

Group Application Menu

Related Commands APPMenu, APPMenu:LABel

Syntax "  ! 

" 

 ! 

"   


Arguments !  is the side menu title and can include any of the characters shown in
the TDS Character Chart in Appendix A. The maximum length of the title is
1000 characters. The APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> command on page 2–57
provides information on defining menu labels.
The label area is 40 pixels high and 112 pixels wide. The length of the label that
fits in the label area depends on the contents of the label, because the width of

2–58 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

characters varies. The label area is about 12 characters wide and 4 lines high. For
a complete list of character widths in pixels, see Table A–1 on page A–1.

Examples APPMENU:TITLE "Custom Menu"

displays the title “Custom Menu” on the screen.
APPMENU:TITLE?
might return "Test Setup" for the current application menu title.

AUTOSet (No Query Form)

Causes the digitizing oscilloscope to adjust its vertical, horizontal, and trigger
controls to provide a stable display of the selected waveform. This is equivalent
to pressing the front-panel AUTOSET button. For a detailed description of the
autoset function, see Autoset in the Reference section of the User Manual for
your instrument.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet EXECute

AUTOSet <space> EXECute

Arguments EXECute autosets the displayed waveform.

BELl (No Query Form)

Beeps the audio indicator of the digitizing oscilloscope.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax BELl

BELl

Examples BELL
rings the bell.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–59

Command Descriptions

BUSY? (Query Only)

Returns the status of the digitizing oscilloscope. This command allows you to
synchronize the operation of the digitizing oscilloscope with your application
program. Synchronization methods are described on page 3–7.

Group Status and error

Related Commands *OPC, *WAI

Syntax  


 


Returns 
 = 0 means that the digitizing oscilloscope is not busy processing a
command whose execution time is extensive. These commands are listed in
Table 2–24.

 = 1 means that the digitizing oscilloscope is busy processing one of the
commands listed in Table 2–24.

Table 2–24: Commands that Affect BUSY? Response

Operation Command
Single sequence acquisition ACQuire:STATE ON or
ACQuire:STATE RUN
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to SEQuence)
Hardcopy output HARDCopy STARt

Examples  

might return
, indicating that the instrument is busy.

*CAL? (Query Only)

Instructs the digitizing oscilloscope to perform an internal self-calibration and
return its calibration status.

NOTE. The self-calibration can take several minutes to respond. No other

commands will be executed until calibration is complete.

2–60 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Group Calibration and Diagnostic

Syntax *CAL?

*CAL ?

Returns <NR1> = 0 indicates that the calibration completed without any errors detected.
<NR1>  0 indicates that the calibration did not complete successfully.

Examples *CAL?
performs an internal self-calibration and might return 0 to indicate that the
calibration was successful.

CH<x>? (Query Only)

Returns the vertical parameters. Because CH<x>:SCAle and CH<x>:VOLts are
identical, only CH<x>:SCAle is returned.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>?

CH <x> ?

Examples CH1?
might return the string :CH1:SCALE 10.0E-3;POSITION 0.0E+0;
OFFSET 0.0E+0;COUPLING DC;IMPEDANCE MEG;BANDWIDTH FULL for chan-
nel 1.

CH<x>:BANdwidth
Sets or queries the bandwidth setting of the specified channel. This is equivalent
to setting Bandwidth in the Vertical menu.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:BANdwidth { TWEnty | HUNdred (All TDS except 684A & 7XXA) |
TWOfifty (TDS 684A & 7XXA) | FULl }

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–61

Command Descriptions

) ("'!

$'*

&

% "'*

#

   ("'!


Arguments $'* sets the channel bandwidth to 20 MHz.

& sets the channel bandwidth to 100 MHz (All TDS except 684A &
7XXA).
"'* sets the channel bandwidth to 250 MHz (TDS 684A & 7XXA only).
# sets the channel bandwidth to the full bandwidth of the digitizing oscillo-
scope.

Examples
  
sets the bandwidth of channel 2 to 20 MHz.

 
might return , which indicates that there is no bandwidth limiting on
channel 1.

CH<x>:COUPling
Sets or queries the input attenuator coupling setting of the specified channel.
This is equivalent to setting Coupling in the Vertical menu.

Group Vertical

Related Commands CH<x>:IMPedance

Syntax
)
#"$ + 
, 
,  -

)
#"$ 

2–62 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions



 !  


Arguments  sets the specified channel to AC coupling.

sets the specified channel to DC coupling.

sets the specified channel to ground. Only a flat ground-level waveform will
be displayed.

Examples   

establishes AC coupling on channel 1.
  
might return
, indicating that channel 3 is set to DC coupling.

CH<x>:IMPedance
Sets or queries the impedance setting at the specified input channel. This is
equivalent to setting the Impedance in the Ch<x> Coupling Impedance side
menu.
TDS 684A and 7XXA only: When you attach an active 50 W probe to an input
channel of the TDS 684A or 7XXA, the oscilloscope reduces the maximum
vertical scale from 10 V to 1 V per division. For example, an active 10X probe
would provide 10 V per division and a passive 10X probe would provide 100 V
per division.

Group Vertical

Related Commands CH<x>:COUPling

Syntax ! #  " $  %

!

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–63

Command Descriptions






   


Arguments  sets the specified channel to 50 W impedance.

 sets the specified channel to 1 MW impedance.

Examples 
  
establishes 50 W impedance on channel 1.

 
might return  , indicating that channel 3 is set to 1 MW impedance.

CH<x>:OFFSet
Sets or queries the offset, in volts, that is subtracted from the specified input
channel before it is acquired. The greater the offset, the lower on the display the
waveform appears. This is equivalent to setting Offset in the Vertical menu.

Group Vertical

Related Commands CH<x>:POSition

Syntax  



 
   


Arguments  is the desired offset in volts. The range is dependent on the scale and the
probe attenuation factor. The offset ranges are shown below.

2–64 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Table 2–25: Offset Ranges for the TDS 4XXA, 54XA, 6XXA, & 7XXA (All Channels)
and the TDS 520A & 524A (Channel 1 & Channel 2) using a 1x Probe

CH<x>:SCAle OFFSet Range

1 mV/div – 99.5 mV/div ±1 V
100 mV/div – 995 mV/div ±10 V
1 V/div – 10 V/div ±100 V

Table 2–26: Offset Ranges for the TDS 520A & 524A (Aux 1 & Aux 2) using a 1x
Probe

CH<x>:SCAle OFFSet Range

50 mV/div & 100 mV/div ±.5 V
500 mV/div & 1 V/div ±5.0 V
5 V/div & 10 V/div ±50 V

Examples CH1:OFFSET 0.5E+00

lowers the channel 1 displayed waveform by 0.5 volts.
CH1:OFFSET?
might return 500.0E-3, indicating that the current channel 1 offset is 0.5 volts.

CH<x>:POSition
Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified channel. The position value
is applied to the signal before digitization. This is equivalent to setting Position
in the Vertical menu or adjusting the front-panel Vertical Position knob.

Group Vertical

Related Commands CH<x>:OFFSet

Syntax CH<x>:POSition <NR3>

CH<x>:POSition?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–65

Command Descriptions

<Space> <NR3>
CH <x> : POSition
?

Arguments <NR3> is the desired position, in divisions from the center graticule. The range is
±5 divisions.

Examples CH2:POSITION 1.3E+00

positions the channel 2 input signal 1.3 divisions above the center of the display.
CH1:POSITION?
might return -1.3E+00, indicating that the current position of channel 1 is at
–1.3 divisions.

CH<x>:PRObe? (Query Only)

Returns the attenuation factor of the probe that is attached to the specified
channel.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PRObe?

CH <x> : PRObe ?

Returns <NR3>

Examples CH4:PROBE?
might return 100.0E-3 for a 10x probe.

CH<x>:SCAle
Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified channel. This is equivalent to
setting Fine Scale in the Vertical menu or adjusting the front-panel Vertical
SCALE knob.

Group Vertical

Related Commands CH1:VOLts

2–66 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>

CH<x>:SCAle?

<Space> <NR3>
CH <x> : SCAle
?

Arguments <NR3> is the gain, in volts per division. The range is 100 mV per division to
1 mV per division when using a 1x probe.

Examples CH4:SCALE 100E-03

sets the channel 4 gain to 100 mV per division.
CH2:SCALE?
might return 1.00E+0, indicating that the current V per division setting of
channel 2 is 1 V per division.

CH<x>:VOLts
Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified channel. This command is
identical to the CH<x>:SCAle command and is included for compatibility
purposes. Only CH<x>:SCAle is returned in response to a CH<x>? query.

Group Vertical

Related Commands CH1:SCAle

Syntax CH<x>:VOLts <NR3>

CH<x>:VOLts?

<Space> <NR3>
CH <x> : VOLts
?

Examples CH4:VOLTS 100E-03

sets the channel 4 gain to 100 mV per division.
CH2:VOLTS?
might return 1.00E+0, indicating that the current V per division setting of
channel 2 is 1 V per division.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–67

Command Descriptions

CLEARMenu (No Query Form)

Clears the current menu from the display. This command is equivalent to
pressing the CLEAR MENU button on the front panel.

Group Display

Syntax  

 

Examples  

clears the menu from the display.

*CLS (No Query Form)

Clears the digitizing oscilloscope status data structures.

Group Status and Error

Related Commands DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?

Syntax




The *CLS command clears the following:

H the Event Queue
H the Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
H the Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit; see below)
If the *CLS command immediately follows an , the Output Queue and
MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared. MAV indicates informa-
tion is in the output queue. The device clear (DCL) GPIB control message will
clear the output queue and thus MAV. *CLS does not clear the output queue or
MAV. (A complete discussion of these registers and bits, and of event handling
in general, begins on page 3–1.)

2–68 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

*CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an *OPC. This

will happen if a hardcopy output or single sequence acquisition operation is still
being processed when the *CLS command is executed.

CURSor? (Query Only)

Returns all current cursor settings.

Group Cursor

Syntax CURSor?

CURSor ?

Examples CURSOR?
might return :CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;
POSITION1 500.0E-6;POSITION2 4.50E-3;SELECT CURSOR1;
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 3.20E+0;POSITION2 -3.20E+0;
SELECT CURSOR1 as the current cursor settings.

CURSor:FUNCtion
Selects and displays the cursor type. Cursors are attached to the selected
waveform. This command is equivalent to setting Function in the Cursor menu.

Group Cursor

Related Commands SELect:CONTROl

Syntax CURSor:FUNCtion { HBArs | OFF | VBArs | PAIred }

CURSor:FUNCtion?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–69

Command Descriptions


#$



" 
#$


#
!#  %!

Arguments 
#$ specifies horizontal bar cursors that measure volts.
 removes the cursors from the display.

#$ specifies vertical bar cursors that measure time.

# specifies paired cursors that measure both time and volts.

Examples %! 


selects vertical bar type cursors.

CURSor:HBArs? (Query Only)

Returns the current settings for the horizontal bar cursors.

Group Cursor

Syntax !#
#$

!#  
#$

Examples 

might return 
   .

CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

Returns the voltage difference between the two horizontal bar cursors.

Group Cursor

Syntax !#
#$ 

2–70 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

CURSor : HBArs : DELTa ?

Returns <NR3>

Examples CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA?
might return 5.08E+0 for the voltage difference between the two cursors.

CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Positions a horizontal bar cursor.

Group Cursor

Syntax CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>

CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>?

<Space> <NR3>
CURSor : HBArs : POSITION <x>
?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the cursor position relative to ground, in volts.

Examples CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 25.0E-3

positions one of the horizontal cursors at 25.0 mV.
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2?
might return -64.0E-3, indicating that one of the horizontal bar cursors is at
–64.0 mV.

CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt
TDS 4XXA Only
Sets or queries the position of the horizontal bar cursors (x is either 1 or 2) in
units of % of vertical range.

Group Cursor

Syntax CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt <NR3>

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–71

Command Descriptions

CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt?

CURSor : HBArs : POSITION <x>

<Space> <NR3>
Pcnt
?

Arguments <NR3> has a range of 0 to 100 (%). It specifies the cursor position relative to the
vertical range of the selected waveform.

Examples CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1PCNT?
might return 4.50 E+1, indicating cursor 1 is positioned at 45% of the vertical
range of the selected waveform.

CURSor:HBArs:SELect
Selects which horizontal bar cursor is active for front-panel control. The active
cursor will be displayed as a solid horizontal line and can be moved using the
front-panel general purpose knob when the cursor menu is active. The unselected
cursor will be displayed as a dashed horizontal line. This command is equivalent
to pressing the SELECT button on the front panel when the Cursor menu is
displayed.

Group Cursor

Syntax CURSor:HBArs:SELect { CURSOR1 | CURSOR2 }

CURSor:HBArs:SELect?

CURSOR1
<Space>
CURSOR2

CURSor : HBArs : SELect

?

Arguments CURSOR1 selects the first horizontal bar cursor.

CURSOR2 selects the second horizontal bar cursor.

2–72 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples CURSOR:HBARS:SELECT CURSOR1

selects the first horizontal bar cursor as the active cursor.
CURSOR:HBARS:SELECT?
returns CURSOR1 when the first cursor is the active cursor.

CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
TDS 4XXA, 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the units for the horizontal bar cursors. This command is
equivalent to setting Amplitude in the Cursor menu.

Group Cursor

Syntax CURSor:HBArs:UNIts { BASe | IRE }

CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?

BASe
<Space>
IRE

CURSor : HBArs : UNIts

?

Arguments BASe specifies base as the unit of measure.

IRE specifies IRE as the unit of measure. These units are typically used with
video signals.

Examples CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS BASE

sets the units for the horizontal bar cursors to base.
CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS?
returns IRE when the horizontal bar cursor units are IRE.

CURSor:MODe
Selects whether the two cursors move together in unison or separately.

Group Cursor

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–73

Command Descriptions

Related Commands CURSor:FUNCtion

Syntax CURSor:MODe { TRACk | INDependent }

CURSor:MODe?

TRACk
<Space>
INDependent
CURSor : MODe
?

Arguments TRACk ties the two cursors together as you move the general purpose knob.
INDependent frees the two cursors to move separately.

Examples CURSOR:MODE TRACK

specifies that the cursors positions move in unison.
CURSOR:MODE?
might return :TRACK showing the two cursors move in unison.

CURSor:PAIred
Positions the paired cursors. Also, returns the current paired cursor settings.

Group Cursor

Related Commands DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP

Syntax CURSor:PAIred SNAp

CURSor:PAIred?

<Space> SNAp
CURSor : PAIred
?

Arguments SNAp positions the paired cursors at DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.

2–74 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples CURSOR:PAIRED SNAP

specifies the positions of the cursors are at the current DATA:START and
DATA:STOP values.
CURSOR:PAIRED?
might return :CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS BASE;POSITION1 -2.00E-3;POSITION2
2.00E-3;SELECT CURSOR2.

CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA (Query Only)

Queries the hbar (voltage) distance between the first and second paired cursor.
This is the absolute value of the vertical position of the first cursor minus the
vertical position of the second cursor.

Group Cursor

Related Commands CURSor:FUNCtion

Syntax CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA?

CURSor : PAIred : HDELTA ?

Examples CURSOR:PAIRED:HDELTA?
might return 5.08E+0 for the voltage difference between the two cursors.

CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1 (Query Only)

Queries the horizontal bar (voltage) position of the first paired cursor.

Group Cursor

Related Commands CURSor:FUNCtion

Syntax CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1?

CURSor : PAIred : HPOS1 ?

Examples CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS1?
might return -64.0E-3, indicating that the first cursor is at –64.0 mV.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–75

Command Descriptions

CURSor:PAIred:HPOS2 (Query Only)

Queries the horizontal bar (voltage) position of the second paired cursor.

Group Cursor

Related Commands CURSor:FUNCtion

Syntax CURSor:PAIred:HPOS2?

CURSor : PAIred : HPOS2 ?

Examples CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS2?
might return -64.0E-3, indicating the second cursor is at –64.0 mV.

CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>
Sets or queries the vertical bar (time) position of the first or second paired cursor.
x is either 1 or 2 and refers to the first or second cursor.
The CURSor:VBArs:UNits command specifies the units for these cursors.

Group Cursor

Related Commands CURSor:FUNCtion, CURSor:VBArs:UNits

Syntax CURSor:PAIred:POSITION2 <NR3>

CURSor:PAIred:POSITION2?

<Space> <NR3>
CURSor : PAIred : POSITION <x>
?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the cursor position in the units specified by the
CURSor:VBArs:UNits command.

The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line
numbers (with option 05). On the TDS 4XXA, position can also appear in units
of clocks or 1/clocks.

2–76 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1 9.00E-6

specifies the first paired cursor is at 9 ms.
CURSOR:POSITION2?
might return 1.00E-6, indicating that the second paired cursor is at 1 ms.

CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt
TDS 4XXA Only
Sets or queries the horizontal position of the paired cursors (x is either 1 or 2) in
units of % of record length.

Group Cursor

Syntax CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt <NR3>

CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt?

CURSor : PAIred : POSITION <x>

<Space> <NR3>
Pcnt
?

Arguments <NR3> has a range of 0 to 100 (%). It specifies the cursor position relative to the
record length of the selected waveform.

Examples CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1PCNT?
might return 4.50 E+1, indicating cursor 1 is positioned at 45% of the record
length of the selected waveform.

CURSor:PAIred:SELect
Selects the active paired cursor. The active cursor appears as a solid vertical line.
The unselected cursor appears as a dashed vertical line. This command is
equivalent to pressing the SELECT button on the front panel when the Cursor
menu is displayed.

Group Cursor

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–77

Command Descriptions

Syntax
  

 !

 






     


Arguments
 specifies the first paired cursor.

 specifies the second paired cursor.

Examples
 


selects the second paired cursor as the active cursor.

 

returns
 when the first paired cursor is the active cursor.

CURSor:PAIred:UNIts
Sets or queries the units for the paired cursors. This is equivalent to setting
Amplitude in the Cursor menu.

Group Cursor

Syntax
      !

  





      


Arguments  specifies base as the unit of measure.

 specifies IRE as the unit of measure. These units are typically used with
video signals.

2–78 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS BASE

sets the units for the paired cursors to base.
CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS?
returns IRE when the paired cursor units are IRE.

CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA (Query Only)

Queries the vbar (time) distance between paired cursors. It returns the absolute
value of the first cursor less the second cursor horizontal positions.

The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line
numbers (with option 05). On the TDS 4XXA, position can also appear in units
of clocks or 1/clocks.

Group Cursor

Related Commands CURSor:FUNCtion

Syntax CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?

CURSor : PAIred : VDELTA ?

Examples CURSOR:PAIRED:VDELTA?
might return 1.064E+00, indicating that the time between the paired cursors is
1.064 seconds.

CURSor:VBArs
Positions the vertical bar cursors and the CURSor:VBArs? query returns the
current vertical bar cursor settings for horizontal position, delta, cursor selection,
and units.

The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line
numbers (with option 05). On the TDS 4XXA, position can also appear in units
of clocks or 1/clocks.

Group Cursor

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–79

Command Descriptions

Related Commands DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, MEASUrement:GATing

Syntax CURSor:VBArs SNAp

CURSor:VBArs?

<Space> SNAp

CURSor : VBArs
?

Arguments SNAp positions the vertical bar cursors at DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.

Examples CURSOR:VBARS SNAP

specifies that the cursors positions are the same as the current DATA:START and
DATA:STOP values.
CURSOR:VBARS?
might return :CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 1.00E-6;POSIĆ
TION2 9.00E-6;SELECT CURSOR2.

CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

Returns the time or frequency between the two vertical bar cursors. The units,
seconds or Hertz, are specified by the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command.

The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line
numbers (with option 05). On the TDS 4XXA, position can also appear in units
of clocks or 1/clocks.

Group Cursor

Related Commands CURSor:VBArs:UNIts

Syntax CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?

CURSor : VBArs : DELTa ?

Returns <NR3>

2–80 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples CURSOR:VBARS:DELTa?
might return 1.064E+00, indicating that the time between the vertical bar cursors
is 1.064 seconds.

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Positions a vertical bar cursor for both vertical bar and paired cursors. The
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command specifies units.

The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line
numbers (with option 05). On the TDS 4XXA, position can also appear in units
of clocks or 1/clocks.

Group Cursor

Related Commands CURSor:VBArs:UNIts

Syntax CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>?

<Space> <NR3>
CURSor : VBArs : POSITION <x>
?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the cursor position in the units specified by the CUR-
Sor:VBArs:UNIts command. The position is relative to the trigger position.

Examples CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION2 9.00E-6

positions one of the vertical bar cursors at 9 ms.
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1?
might return 1.00E-6, indicating a vertical bar cursors is at 1 ms.

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt
TDS 4XXA Only
Sets or queries the position of the vertical bar cursors (x is either 1 or 2) in units
of % of record length.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–81

Command Descriptions

Group Cursor

Syntax CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt <NR3>

CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt?

CURSor : VBArs : POSITION <x>

<Space> <NR3>
Pcnt
?

Arguments <NR3> has a range of 0 to 100 (%). It specifies the cursor position relative to the
record length of the selected waveform.

Examples CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1PCNT?
might return 4.50 E+1, indicating cursor 1 is positioned at 45% of the record
length of the selected waveform.

CURSor:VBArs:SELect
Selects which vertical bar cursor is active. The active cursor will be displayed as
a solid vertical line and can be moved using the front-panel general purpose knob
when the cursor menu is active. The unselected cursor will be displayed as a
dashed vertical line. This command is equivalent to pressing the SELECT
button on the front panel when the Cursor menu is displayed.

Group Cursor

Syntax CURSor:VBArs:SELect { CURSOR1 | CURSOR2 }

CURSor:VBArs:SELect?

CURSOR1
<Space>
CURSOR2

CURSor : VBArs : SELect

?

Arguments CURSOR1 specifies the first vertical bar cursor.

2–82 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

CURSOR2 specifies the second vertical bar cursor.

Examples CURSOR:VBARS:SELECT CURSOR2

selects the second vertical bar cursor as the active cursor.
CURSOR:VBARS:SELECT?
returns CURSOR1 when the first vertical bar cursor is the active cursor.

CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Sets or queries the units for the vertical bar cursors. This command is equivalent
to setting Time Units (Horiz Units in the TDS 4XXA) in the Cursor menu.

Group Cursor

Related Commands CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?, CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>

Syntax CURSor:VBArs:UNIts { SECOnds | HERtz | LINE (with option 05)

| BASe (TDS 4XXA only) | INVert (TDS 4XXA only)}
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?
For the TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA:

SECOnds

HERtz
<Space>
LINE

CURSor : VBArs : UNIts

?

For the TDS 4XXA:

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–83

Command Descriptions

BASe

INVert

SECOnds

HERtz
<Space>
LINE

CURSor : VBArs : UNIts

?

Arguments SEConds specifies seconds as the unit of measure. For the TDS 4XXA, this
argument is available only for backward compatibility. If a TDS 4XXA receives
this argument, it will convert it to BASE or INVERT depending on the selected
waveform. The TDS 4XXA will not output this argument in response to a query.
HERtz specifies hertz as the unit of measure. For the TDS 4XXA, this argument
is available only for backward compatibility. If a TDS 4XXA receives this
argument, it will convert it to BASE or INVERT depending on the selected
waveform. The TDS 4XXA will not output this argument in response to a query.
LINE specifies a video line as the unit of measure. This is most useful if you
have option 05 video trigger installed. On some models, if you do not have
option 05, use of this argument will generate an error message. On the TDS
4XXA, if you do not have option 05, the TDS 4XXA will use the NTSC
standard for converting from time to lines. In order for the measurement to be
accurate in the TDS 4XXA when TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYSTEM is set to
custom, you must set TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCANPERIOD.
BASe (TDS 4XXA only) specifies the base (or natural) units of the waveform as
the unit of measurement. If internal clock is enabled, the base units are seconds.
If external clock is enabled, the base units are clocks.
INVert (TDS 4XXA only) specifies 1/ base (or natural) units of the waveform as
the unit of measurement. If internal clock is enabled, the base units are 1/seconds
(hertz). If external clock is enabled, the base units are 1/clocks.

Examples CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS

sets the units for the vertical bar cursors to seconds.
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS?
returns HERTZ when the vertical bar cursor units are hertz.

2–84 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

CURSor:VBArs:UNITSTring? (Query Only)

TDS 4XXA Only
Queries the unit string as shown on screen for the vertical bar cursor readout.

Group Cursor

Syntax CURSor:VBArs:UNITSTring?

CURSor : VBArs : UNITSTring ?

Examples CURSOR:VBARS:UNITSTRING?
might return "ms", indicating the units are milliseconds.

CURVe
Transfers waveform data to and from the digitizing oscilloscope in binary or
ASCII format. Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform
preamble which contains information such as data format and scale. Refer to the
WFMPre command starting on page 2–288 for information about the waveform
preamble. The data format is specified by the DATa:ENCdg and DATa:WIDTH
commands.
The CURVe? query transfers data from the instrument. The data source is
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. If more than one source is specified, a
comma separated list of data blocks is returned. The first and last data points that
are transferred are specified by the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the instrument. The data is
stored in the reference memory location specified by DATa:DESTination starting
with the data point specified by DATa:STARt. Only one waveform can be
transferred at a time. The waveform will only be displayed if the reference is
displayed.
A description of the waveform transfer process starts on page 2–32.

Group Waveform

Related Commands DATa, WFMPre

Syntax CURVe { <Block> | <asc curve> }

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–85

Command Descriptions

CURVe?

<Block>
<Space>
<asc curve>
CURVe

Arguments <Block> is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is formatted as:
#<x><yyy><data><newline> where <x> is the number of y bytes. For example,
if <yyy> = 500, then <x> = 3. <yyy> is the number of bytes to transfer. If width
is 1 then all bytes on the bus are single data points. If width is 2 then all bytes on
the bus are 2-byte pairs. Use the DATa:WIDth command to set the width. <data>
is the curve data. <newline> is a single byte newline character at the end of the
data. See the GETWFM.C or GETWFM.BAS examples in the accompanying disk for
more specifics.
<asc curve> is the waveform data in ASCII format. The format for ASCII data
is <NR1>[,<NR1>...] where each <NR1> represents a data point.

Examples CURVE?
might return, for ASCII data: CURVE
0,0,0,0,-1,1,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,-1,
-1,1,0,0,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,1,1,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,0

2–86 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

DATa
Sets or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred
with the CURVe command. Since DATa:DESTination and DATa:TARget are
equivalent, only DATa:DESTination is returned by the DATa? query.

Group Waveform

Related Commands CURVE, WAVFrm

Syntax DATa { INIT | SNAp }

DATa?

INIT
<Space>
SNAp

DATa
?

Arguments INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults.
SNAp sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP to match the current vertical bar cursor
positions.

Examples DATA SNAP

assigns the current position of the vertical bar cursors to DATA:START and
DATA:STOP.
DATA?
might return the string :DATA:ENCDG RPBINARY;DESTINATION REF4; SOURCE
REF4;START 1;STOP 500;WIDTH 2

DATa:DESTination
Sets or queries the reference memory location for storing waveform data that is
transferred into the digitizing oscilloscope by the CURVe command. This
command is identical to the DATa:TARget command.

Group Waveform

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–87

Command Descriptions

Syntax DATa:DESTination REF<x>

DATa:DESTination?

<Space> REF <x>

DATa : DESTination
?

Arguments REF<x> (REF1, REF2, REF3 or REF4) is the reference memory location where the
waveform will be stored.

Examples DATA:DESTINATION REF3

stores incoming waveform data in reference memory 3.
DATA:DESTINATION?
might return REF2 as the reference memory location that is currently selected.

DATa:ENCdg
Sets or queries the format of the waveform data. This command is equivalent to
setting WFMPre:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN_Fmt, and WFMPre:BYT_Or as shown
in Table 2–27. Setting the DATa:ENCdg value causes the corresponding
WFMPre values to be updated and vice versa.

Group Waveform

Related Commands WFMPre:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN.FMT, WFMPre:BYT_Or

Syntax DATa:ENCdg { ASCIi | RIBinary | RPBinary | SRIbinary | SRPbinary}

DATa:ENCdg?

2–88 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions






 




 




Arguments 
 specifies the ASCII representation of signed integer (
) data. If
this is the value at power-on, the WFMPre values for BN_Fmt, BYT_Or, and
ENCdg are set as RP, MSB, and ASC respectively.

 specifies signed integer data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first. This format results in the fastest data transfer
rate when DATa:WIDth is set to 2.
The range is –128 to 127 when DATa:WIDth is 1. Zero is center screen. The
range is –32768 to 32767 when DATa:WIDth is 2. The upper limit is one
division above the top of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the
bottom of the screen.
 specifies positive integer data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
The range is 0 to 255 when DATa:WIDth is 1. 127 is center screen. The range is
0 to 65,535 when DATa:WIDth is 2. The upper limit is one division above the
top of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the bottom of the
screen.

 is the same as
 except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.
  is the same as  except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–89

Command Descriptions

Table 2–27: DATa and WFMPre Parameter Settings

WFMPre Settings
DATa:ENCdg
ATa N g Setting
e i g :ENCdg :BN_Fmt :BYT_Or
ASCIi ASC N/A N/A
RIBinary BIN RI MSB
RPBinary BIN RP MSB
SRIbinary BIN RI LSB
SRIbinary BIN RP LSB

Examples DATA:ENCDG RPBINARY

sets the data encoding format to be positive integer where the most significant
byte is transferred first.
DATA:ENCDG?
might return SRPBINARY for the format of the waveform data.

DATa:SOUrce
Sets or queries the location of the waveform data that is transferred from the
instrument by the CURVe? query. The source data is always transferred in a
predefined order regardless of the order they are specified using this command.
The predefined order is CH1 through CH4, MATH1 through MATH3, then
REF1 through REF4.

Group Waveform

Syntax DATa:SOUrce <wfm>[<Comma><wfm>]...

DATa:SOUrce?

<Space> <wfm> <Comma> <wfm>

DATa : SOUrce
?

Arguments <wfm> is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from the
digitizing oscilloscope to the controller.

2–90 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples DATA:SOURCE REF2, CH2, MATH1, CH1

specifies that four waveforms will be transferred in the next CURVE? query. The
order that the data will be transferred is CH1, CH2, MATH1, and then REF2.
DATA:SOURCE?
might return REF3, indicating the source for the waveform data that is transferred
using a CURVE? query.

DATa:STARt
Sets or queries the starting data point for waveform transfer. This command
allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the digitizing oscillo-
scope.

Group Waveform

Related Commands CURVe?, DATa SNAp, DATa:STOP

Syntax DATa:STARt <NR1>

DATa:STARt?

<Space> <NR1>
DATa : STARt
?

Arguments <NR1> ranges from 1 to the record length, and is the first data point that will be
transferred. Data will be transferred from <NR1> to DATa:STOP or the record
length, whichever is less. If <NR1> is greater than the record length then no data
will be transferred.
When DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the stop value will equal
DATa:STARt + (DATA:STARt – DATa:STOP). For example, if DATa:STARt =
30 and DATaSTOP = 20, then the range of data points for the waveform transfer
will equal 30 through 40.

Examples DATA:START 10
specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10.
DATA:START?
might return 214 as the first waveform data point that will be transferred.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–91

Command Descriptions

DATa:STOP
Sets or queries the last data point that will be transferred when using the
CURVe? query. This allows the transfer of partial waveforms to the controller.
When using the CURVe command, the digitizing oscilloscope will stop reading
data when there is no more data to read or when the specified record length has
been reached so this command will be ignored.

Group Waveform

Related Commands CURVe?, DATa SNAp

Syntax   


  
  

Arguments   ranges from 1 to the record length, and is the last data point that will be
transferred. If   is greater than the record length then data will be transferred
up to the record length. If both DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are greater than
the record length, an execution error will be executed.
If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, just set DATa:STARt to 1
and DATa:STOP to the maximum record length.
When DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the stop value will equal
DATa:STARt + (DATA:STARt – DATa:STOP). For example, if DATa:STARt =
30 and DATaSTOP = 20, then the range of data points for the waveform transfer
will equal 30 through 40.

Examples  

specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 15000.


might return  as the last data point that will be transferred.

DATa:TARget
Sets or queries the location for storing waveform data transferred to the
instrument using the CURVe command. This command is equivalent to the

2–92 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

DATa:DESTINATION command and is included for compatibility with older

Tektronix instruments.

Group Waveform

Related Commands CURVe

Syntax  


 



   


DATa:WIDth
Sets the number of bytes per data point in the waveform transferred using the
CURVe command.

Group Waveform

Related Commands CURVe, WFMPre:BIT_Nr, WFMPre:BYT_Nr

Syntax   



  
  


Arguments   = 1 specifies that there is 1 byte (8 bits) per point. This format is useful
when the acquisition mode is set to SAMple, ENVelope, or PEAKdetect (one
byte per point). If used for AVErage or HIRes (two bytes per point), the low
order byte is not transmitted.
  = 2 specifies that there are 2 bytes (16 bits) per point. This format is
useful for AVErage and HIRes (two bytes per point) waveforms. If used for
ENVelope, PEAKdetect, or SAMple (one byte per point), the least significant
byte is always zero.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–93

Command Descriptions

Examples DATA:WIDth 1
sets the data width to 1 byte per data point for CURVe data.

DATE
Sets or queries the date that the digitizing oscilloscope can display.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands DISplay: CLOCk, TIMe

Syntax DATE <QString>

DATE?

<Space> <QString>
DATE
?

Arguments <QString> is a date in the form yyyy-mm-dd".

mm refers to a two-digit month number from 01 to 12.
dd refers to a two-digit day number in the month.
yyyy refers to a four-digit year number.
There must a dash (–) after the yyyy and after the mm.

Examples DATE "1993-01-24"

specifies that the date is set to January 24th, 1993.

*DDT
Allows the user to specify a command or a list of commands that are executed
when the instrument receives a *TRG command or the GET GPIB interface
message. This is just a special alias that *TRG uses.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands ALIAS:DEFINE, *TRG, Get GPIB interface message

Syntax *DDT { <Block> | <QString> }

2–94 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

*DDT?

<Block>
<Space>
<QString>

*DDT
?

Arguments <Block> or <QString> is a complete sequence of program messages. The

messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semico-
lons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands (see page 2–4). The
sequence must be ≤80 characters. <Block> format is always returned as a query
response.

Examples *DDT #0ACQUIRE:STATE RUN;BELL<EOI>

specifies that the acquisition system will be started and the bell rings each time a
*TRG command is sent.

DELEte:SETUp (No Query Form)

Removes stored setups from memory and initializes the location with the factory
default setup.

NOTE. The setup information cannot be recovered once it has been deleted.

Group Save and Recall

Related Commands *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp, TEKSecure

Syntax DELEte:SETUp { <NR1> | ALL }

<NR1>
DELEte : SETUp <Space>
ALL

Arguments <NR1> is a value in the range 1 to 10, and specifies a setup storage location.
Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error.
ALL specifies all the stored setups.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–95

Command Descriptions

Examples DELETE:SETUP ALL

removes all stored setups. All ten storage locations are initialized to the factory
default setup.

DELEte:WAVEform (No Query Form)

Deletes one or all of the stored reference waveforms from memory. The memory
allocated for the reference location is then available for reallocation. Memory
must be reallocated for the deleted references before any waveform data can be
stored in the reference location.

NOTE. The waveform data is not actually cleared from the reference location.

Group Save and Recall

Related Commands RECAll:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform, TEKSecure

Syntax DELEte:WAVEform { REF<x> | ALL }

REF <x>
DELEte : WAVEform <Space>
ALL

Arguments REF<x> (REF1, REF2, REF3 or REF4) specifies one of the reference memory
locations.
ALL specifies all the stored waveforms.

Examples DELETE:WAVEFORM ALL

removes all the waveforms stored in reference memory.
DELETE:WAVEFORM REF2
removes the waveform stored at REF2.

DESE
Sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER).
The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to the
Standard Event Status Register (SESR), and entered into the Event Queue. For a
more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see page 3–1.

2–96 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Group Status and Error

Related Commands *CLS, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?

Syntax 








Arguments
 is a value in the range from 0 to 255. The binary bits of the DESER are
set according to this value. For example,   sets the DESER to the binary
value 11010001 (that is, the most significant bit in the register is set to 1, the
next most significant bit to 1, the next bit to 0, etc.).
The power-on default for DESER is all bits set if  is 1. If  is 0, the
DESER maintains its value through a power cycle.

NOTE. Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows only those
codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5)
of the Status Byte Register. Use the  command to set the ESER. A discussion
of event handling begins on page 3–1.

Examples  

sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ, EXE, and
OPC bits.

might return the string  , showing that the DESER contains the binary
value 10111010.

DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? (Query Only)

Returns the pass/fail status from the last diagnostic test sequence execution. The
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? query can be used to determine which test(s) has failed.

Group Calibration and Diagnostic

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–97

Command Descriptions

Related Commands DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?

Syntax DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?

DIAg : RESUlt : FLAg ?

Returns PASS indicating that all of the selected diagnostic tests have passed.
FAIl indicating that at least one of the selected diagnostic tests has failed.

Examples DIAG:RESULT:FLAG?
returns either PASS or FAIl.

DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? (Query Only)

Returns the internal results log from the last diagnostic test sequence execution.
The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with
the pass/fail status of each.

Group Calibration and Diagnostic

Related Commands DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?

Syntax DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?

DIAg : RESUlt : LOG ?

Returns <QString> in the following format:

<Status>,<Module name>[,<Status>,<Module name>...]

Examples DIAG:RESULT:LOG?
might return :DIAG:RESULT:LOG "pass--Processor,pass--Display,
pass--FP/Proc Interface,FAIL--Front Panel"

2–98 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

DIAg:SELect:ACQUISition (No Query Form)

Selects the acquisition system test sequence that will be run when the
DIAg:STATE EXECUte command is sent. This command is equivalent to setting
Area in the Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.

Group Calibration and Diagnostic

Syntax   
  

   
      

Arguments 

selects functional, memory, and register tests.

DIAg:SELect:ALL (No Query Form)

Specifies that all system test sequences will be run when the DIAg:STATE
EXECUte command is sent. This command is equivalent to setting Area in the
Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.

Group Calibration and Diagnostic

Syntax   


   
  

  

Arguments 

selects functional, memory, and register tests for the acquisition, processor
and display systems, and self diagnostics for the front panel.

DIAg:SELect:CPU (No Query Form)

Selects the processor system test sequence that will be run when the
DIAg:STATE EXECUte command is sent. This command is equivalent to setting
Area in the Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.

Group Calibration and Diagnostic

Syntax   
 

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–99

Command Descriptions


       

Arguments  selects functional, memory, and register tests.

DIAg:SELect:DISplay (No Query Form)

Selects the display system test sequence that will be run when the DIAg:STATE
EXECUte command is sent. This command is equivalent to setting Area in the
Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.

Group Calibration and Diagnostic

Syntax 
 
 


    
   

Arguments  selects functional, memory, and register tests.

DIAg:SELect:FPAnel (No Query Form)

Selects the front-panel test sequence that will be run when the DIAg:STATE
EXECUte command is sent. This command is equivalent to setting Area in the
Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.

Group Calibration and Diagnostic

Syntax 
   


       

Arguments  selects self diagnostic tests.

2–100 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

DIAg:STATE (No Query Form)

Executes the diagnostic tests that have been specified with the DIAg:SELect
commands.
When the test sequence has completed, any of the modules or module interfaces
that failed diagnostics are displayed on the screen and stored in an internal log
file. The pass/fail status will be returned by the DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? query, and
the internal log will be returned by the DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? query. This
command is equivalent to running Extended Diagnostics by selecting Execute in
the Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.

NOTE. The DIAg:STATE EXECute command can take 30 seconds or more to

respond. This command performs a warm boot and does not return control to the
instrument controller until diagnostics are complete.

Group Calibration and Diagnostic

Syntax  
 

  
 
  

Arguments  runs the diagnostic test sequences specified by the DIAg:SELect
commands. When complete, the digitizing oscilloscope will return to the state it
was in just prior to the test. If the PON event was enabled before running the
tests, a Service Request will be generated. When the Service Request has been
received, the pass/fail status of the tests can be returned by executing the
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? query.
The DIAg:STATE EXECute command clears the following:
H the Event Queue
H the Input Queue
H the Status Registers (SESR and SBR)
To enable a power-on event to generate a Service Request, send the following
commands before running diagnostics:
H DESE 128
H *ESE 128
H *SRE 32

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–101

Command Descriptions

H *PSC 0

Examples DIAg:STATE EXECUTE

executes all the diagnostic tests that have been selected.

DISplay? (Query Only)

Returns the current display settings.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay?

DISplay ?

Examples DISPLAY?
might return :DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;FILTER SINX;PERSISTĆ
ENCE 500.0E-3;GRATICULE FULL;TRIGT 1;INTENSITY:OVERALL 85;
WAVEFORM 70;TEXT 60;CONTRAST 150

DISplay:CLOCk
Controls the display of the date and time. This is equivalent to setting the
Display Date/Time in the Readout Options side menu. The query form returns
an ON (1) or an OFF (0).

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:CLOCk { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

DISplay:CLOCk?

OFF

<Space> ON

<NR1>
DISplay : CLOCk
?

2–102 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Arguments <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 removes the clock from the display.

<ON> or <NR1>  0 displays the clock on the display.

Examples DISPLAY:CLOCK ON
sets the display to show time and date.
DISPLAY:CLOCK?
might return 1 indicating that the display shows time and date.

DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast
TDS 5X4A, 6X4A, & 7XXA Only
Turns on or off the collision contrast option. The TDS will display overlapping
lines in a special collision color when this item is turned on. This is equivalent to
selecting Options from the main Color menu and toggling Collision Contrast in
the resulting side menu to ON or OFF.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast?

OFF

<Space> ON

<NR1>
DISplay : COLOr : CONTRast
?

Arguments <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 turns off collision contrast.

<ON> or <NR1>  0 turns on collision contrast.

Examples DISPLAY:COLOR:CONTRAST ON
turns on the contrast option.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–103

Command Descriptions

DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item name>: BYCONTents

TDS 5X4A, 6X4A, & 7XXA Only
Determines if the color for a math or reference waveform is set to the color
assigned to the waveform contents (the constituent waveform) or to a specific
color index. This is equivalent to pressing Map Math Colors or Map Reference
Colors on the Color main menu and Color Matches Contents (to select the on
state) or Color (to select the off state) on the resulting side menu.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:COLOr:MAP:{ MATH1 | MATH2 | MATH3 | REF1 | REF2 | REF3 |

REF4 }:BYCONTents { OFF | ON | <NR1> }
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:{ MATH1 | MATH2 | MATH3 | REF1 | REF2 | REF3 |
REF4 }:BYCONTents?

DISplay : COLOr : MAP :

MATH1

MATH2

MATH3

REF1
OFF
REF2
<Space> ON
REF3
<NR1>
REF4 : BYCONTents
?

Arguments <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 means set the color by index (NOT by contents).
<ON> or <NR1>  0 means set the color by contents (NOT by index).

Examples DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:BYCONTENTS ON
sets the display of math waveform # 1 to the color of the waveform used to
define math waveform # 1. If two waveforms were used to defined math
waveform # 1, then the color of the first mentioned waveform is used.
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:BYCONTENTS?
might return ON.

2–104 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item name>: TO
TDS 5X4A, 6X4A, & 7XXA Only
Defines the color index to use if setting the color for a math or reference
waveform to the color assigned to a specific index. This is similar, but not
identical, to pressing Map Math Colors or Map Reference Colors on the Color
main menu, pressing Color on the resulting side menu, and entering an index
with the general purpose knob or the keypad. The difference is that, when you
press Color on the front panel, you not only select a color index but also state
that you wish to select by index rather than by contents. In contrast, when you
use this command you only select the index to use. To state you want to select by
index, use the DISplay:COLOr:MAP:...:BYCONTents command with the OFF
argument.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:COLOr:MAP:{ MATH1 | MATH2 | MATH3 | REF1 | REF2 | REF3 |

REF4 }:TO { CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH | REF }
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:TO?

DISplay : COLOr : MAP :

MATH1
CH1
MATH2
CH2
MATH3
CH3
REF1
CH4
REF2
MATH
REF3
<Space> REF
REF4 : TO
?

Examples DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:TO CH3

sets the color of math waveform # 1 to that assigned to channel 3. Note: this
assumes that Color Matches Contents is set of OFF.
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:TO?
might return CH3.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–105

Command Descriptions

DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PERSistence
TDS 5X4A, 6X4A, & 7XXA Only
Sets the current persistence palette to one of the preset persistence palettes. This
is equivalent to selecting Palette from the main Color menu, Persistence
Palettes from the resulting side menu, and Temperature, Spectral, or Gray
Scale from the next side menu.

Group Display

Syntax  %!
##
"# & 

!#$! ')
! '
" (
 %!
##
"#?



!#$!
 %  !  
## 

!


"#   "

Examples 


 





sets temperature palette as the current persistence palette.

DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REGular
TDS 5X4A, 6X4A, & 7XXA Only
Sets the current palette to one of the preset palettes. This is equivalent to
selecting Palette from the main Color menu and Normal, Bold, Hardcopy, or
Monochrome from the resulting side menu.

Group Display

Syntax  %!
##
$! &  '  '   % '  (
 %!
##
$!?

2–106 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions





"    

  
!   "




Examples 


  
sets the current palette to the hardcopy palette.

DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RESETALL (No Query Form)

TDS 5X4A, 6X4A, & 7XXA Only
Restores all palettes to their factory default setting. This is equivalent to
selecting Restore Colors from the main Color menu and Reset All Palettes to
Factory from the resulting side menu.

Group Display

Syntax "




"    

  



Examples 




resets the palette to the factory default setting.

DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<palette name>:RESET (No Query Form)

TDS 5X4A, 6X4A, & 7XXA Only
Restores the given palette to its factory defaults. This is useful if you have edited
the colors in a palette. This is equivalent to selecting Restore Colors from the
main Color menu and Reset Current Palette to Factory from the resulting side
menu.

Group Display

Syntax "
#  $  $  " $  %



TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–107

Command Descriptions

NORMal

BOLd

DISplay : COLOr : PALEtte : HARDCopy : RESET

MONo

Examples DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:HARDCOPY:RESET
resets the hardcopy palette to its initial, factory-default settings.

DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<palette name>:<item name>

TDS 5X4A, 6X4A, & 7XXA Only
Sets the color of a selected item in a selected palette.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:{ NORMal | MONo | BOLd | HARDCopy }:

{ BACKGround | CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH | REF | TEXt |
SCROLLTEXT | ZONe | COLLision | GRAticule | SCROLLBAR }
{ <NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1> }
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:{ NORMal | MONo | BOLd | HARDCopy }:
{ BACKGround | CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH | REF | TEXt |
SCROLLTEXT | ZONe | COLLision | GRAticule | SCROLLBAR }?

2–108 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

BACKGround

DISplay : COLOr : CH1

CH2
<NR1>
CH3 ,
NORMal CH4 <NR1>
MONo MATH ,
PALEtte : BOLd : REF <Space> <NR1>

HARDCopy TEXt

SCROLLTEXT

ZONe

COLLision ?

GRAticule

SCROLLBAR

Arguments BACKGround specifies the display background color.

CH1 specifies the channel 1 waveform and associated text color.
CH2 specifies the channel 2 waveform and associated text color.
CH3 specifies the channel 3 waveform and associated text color.
CH4 specifies the channel 4 waveform and associated text color.
MATH specifies the default math waveforms and associated text color.
REF specifies the default reference waveforms and associated text color.
TEXt specifies the text color in all menus and all readouts not associated with a
waveform.
SCROLLTEXT specifies text in the scroll bar. For example, this covers the scroll
bars used in the file system.
ZONe specifies the color of the intensified zone on the waveform when the time
base is intensified and the color of the real samples when the display style is
Intensified Samples.
COLLision specifies the color of the areas where waveforms overlap each other.
You can turn collision marking on or off with the Items, Waveforms, Options,
Collision Contrast menu item.
GRAticule specifies the color of the graticule. Use the Settings, Display,
Graticule option to select the graticule type.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–109

Command Descriptions

SCROLLBAR specifies the color of the scrollbar. For example, you will find a
scrollbar in various file system menus.
<NR1>, <NR1>, <NR1> specifies the desired colors in terms of hue, lightness
and saturation values.
Hue is the wavelength of light reflected from the surface. It varies continuously
along the color spectrum as produced by a rainbow. Values range from 0 to 359.
Sample values are: 0 = blue, 60 = magenta, 120 = red, 180 = yellow, 240 =
green, 360 = cyan.
Lightness refers to the amount of light reflected from the surface. It varies from
black, to the nominal color, to white. Values range from 0 to100. A value of 0
results in black. A value of 50 provides the nominal color. A value of 100 results
in white.
Saturation is the intensity of color. Completely desaturated color is gray.
Completely saturated color of any hue is that color at its most intense. Values
range from 0 to 100. A value of 100 provides a pure color. A value of 0 provides
gray.

Examples DISPLAY:COLOr:PALEtte:HARDCOPY:CH1 120,50,100

sets the CH1 color of the hardcopy palette to 120 hue, 50 lightness, and
100 saturation. This provides a pure red.

DISplay:FILTer
Sets or queries the type of interpolation to use for the display when the DIS-
play:STYle is VECtors. This command is equivalent to setting Filter in the
Display menu.

Group Display

Related Commands DISplay:STYle

Syntax DISplay:FILTer { LINEAr | SINX }

DISplay:FILTer?

2–110 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

LINEAr
<Space>
SINX

DISplay : FILTer
?

Arguments LINEAr specifies linear interpolation where acquired points are connected with
straight lines.
SINX specifies sin(x)/x interpolation where acquired points are fit to a curve.

Examples DISPLAY:FILTER LINEAR

sets the interpolation filter type to linear.
DISPLAY:FILTER?
returns either LINEAR or SINX, indicating the type of interpolation filter.

DISplay:FORMat
Sets or queries the display format. This command is equivalent to setting
Format in the Display menu.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:FORMat { XY | YT }
DISplay:FORMat?

XY
<Space>
YT

DISplay : FORMat
?

Arguments XY displays the voltage of one waveform against the voltage of another. The
sources that make up an XY waveform are predefined and are listed in
Table 2–28. Displaying one source causes its corresponding source to be
displayed.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–111

Command Descriptions

Table 2–28: XY Format Pairs

X-Axis Source Y-Axis Source

Ch 1 Ch 2
Ch 3 (or AUX 1) Ch 4 (or AUX 2)
(All models except TDS 410A) (All models except TDS 410A)
Ref 1 Ref 2
Ref 3 Ref 4

YT sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the normal mode.

Examples DISPLAY:FORMAT YT
selects a voltage versus time format for the display.
DISPLAY:FORMAT?
might return XY for the display format.

DISplay:GRAticule
Selects the type of graticule that will be displayed. This command is equivalent
to setting Graticule in the Display menu.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:GRAticule { CROSSHair | FRAme | FULl | GRId | NTSc | PAL}

DISplay:GRAticule?

CROSSHair

FRAme

FULl

GRId

<Space> NTSc

PAL
DISplay : GRAticule
?

Arguments CROSSHair specifies a frame and cross hairs.

FRAme specifies just a frame.

2–112 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

FULl specifies a frame, a grid, and cross hairs.

GRId specifies a frame and a grid.
NTSc specifies a special NTSC frame.
PAL specifies a special PAL frame.

Examples DISPLAY:GRATICULE GRID

sets the graticule type to display a frame and a grid.
DISPLAY:GRATICULE?
returns FULL when all graticule elements (grid, frame, and cross hairs) are
selected.

DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence
TDS 7XXA Only
Selects the persistence mode to use with InstaVu.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence { INFPersist | VARpersist }

DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence?

INFPersist
<Space>
VARpersist

DISplay : INStavu PERSistence

?

Arguments INFPersist accumulates data points on the display indefinitely.

VARpersist leaves acquired data points on the display for a period of time
specified by DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist.

Examples DISPLAY:INSTAVU:PERSISTENCE?
might return INFPERSIST indicating the infinite persistence mode is on.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–113

Command Descriptions

DISplay:INStavu:STYle
TDS 7XXA Only
Selects how the data is displayed with InstaVu.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:INStavu:STYle { DOTs | VECtors }

DISplay:INStavu:STYle?

DOTs
<Space>
VECtors

DISplay : INStavu STYle

?

Arguments DOTs displays individual data points.

VECtors connects adjacent data points. Old points are immediately replaced by
new ones.

Examples DISPLAY:INSTAVU:STYLE?
might return DOTS indicating that the display shows individual waveform data
points.

DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist
TDS 7XXA Only
Sets the length of time that data points are displayed when DISplay:INSta-
vu:PERSistence is set to VARpersist. This affects the display only.

Group Display

Related Commands DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence

Syntax DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist <NR3>

DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist?

2–114 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

<Space> <NR3>
DISplay : INStavu VARpersist
?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the length, in seconds, that the waveform points are displayed on
the screen. The range is 250 ms to 10 s.

Examples DISPLAY:INSTAVU:VARPERSIST 3
specifies that the waveform points are displayed on the screen for 3 seconds
before they disappear.

DISplay:INTENSITy? (Query Only)

Returns the current intensity settings for different parts of the display.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy?

DISplay : INTENSITy ?

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY?
might return :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 70;TEXT 60
or :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL 85;WAVEFORM 70;TEXT 60;CONTRAST 175

DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast
TDS 4X0A, 5X0A & 6X0A Only
Sets the intensity of the intensified zone on a waveform. This command is
equivalent to setting Contrast in the Display Intensity side menu.
The command has no effect on limit test templates or intensified samples. They
are displayed at a fixed contrast ratio.

Group Display

Related Commands HORizontal:MODe

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast <NR1>

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–115

Command Descriptions

DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast?

<Space> <NR1>
DISplay : INTENSITy : CONTRast
?

Arguments <NR1> ranges from 100 to 250 percent.

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY:CONTRAST 140

sets the intensity of the intensified portion of a waveform.

DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERAll
TDS 4X0A, 5X0A, & 6X0A Only
Sets the intensity of the entire display. This command is equivalent to setting
Overall in the Display Intensity side menu.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERAll <NR1>

DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERAll?

<Space> <NR1>
DISplay : INTENSITy : OVERAll
?

Arguments <NR1> ranges from 20 to 100 percent.

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL 50
sets the intensity of the display to the middle of the range.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL?
might return 75 as the overall display intensity.

2–116 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt
Sets the intensity of the text and the graticule. This command is equivalent to
setting Text/Grat in the Display Intensity side menu.

Group Display

Syntax
!$  $# 

!$  $#

! 

!$   $  #


Arguments  ranges from 20 to 100 percent.

Examples
    
sets the intensity of the text to the brightest level.

DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
Sets the intensity of the waveforms. This command is equivalent to setting
Waveform in the Display Intensity side menu.

Group Display

Syntax
!$  $  " 

!$  $  "

! 

!$   $    "


Arguments  ranges from 20 to 100 percent.

Examples
    
might return  as the intensity of the waveform.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–117

Command Descriptions

DISplay:MODe
TDS 7XXA Only
Selects whether or not to turn on InstaVu.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:MODe { INStavu | NORMal }

DISplay:MODe?

INStavu

<Space>

NORMal
DISplay : MODe
?

Arguments INSTavu turns on InstaVu. This mode can help view infrequent deviations in a
signal. It only uses a 500 point record length, no averaging, and no enveloping.
When you turn on InstaVu, the TDS turns off any active zoom, autosave, limit
test, waveform math, FastFrame, and XY display. The TDS reactivates these
features when you turn off InstaVu.
NORMal turns on the normal (non–InstaVu mode).

Examples DISPLAY:MODE INSTAVU

turns on InstaVu.
DISPLAY:MODE?
might return INSTAVU indicating that the InstaVu mode is on.

DISplay:PERSistence
Sets the length of time that data points are displayed when DISplay:STYle is set
to VARpersist. This affects the display only and is equivalent to setting Variable
Persistence in the Display Style side menu.

Group Display

Related Commands DISplay:STYle

2–118 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax "
 ! 
"
 !

 
"  
 !


Arguments  specifies the length, in seconds, that the waveform points are displayed on
the screen. The range is 250 ms to 10 s.

Examples  



specifies that the waveform points are displayed on the screen for 3 seconds
before they fade.

DISplay:STYle
Selects how the data is displayed. This command is equivalent to setting Style in
the Display menu.

Group Display

Related Commands DISplay:PERSistence

Syntax " #  $   ! $ 

 $   ! $

! %
"



  !




   !


!
"  


Arguments  displays individual data points.

  ! accumulates data points on the display indefinitely. The display is
reset when the style or acquisition is reset.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–119

Command Descriptions

 !!" leaves acquired data points on the display for a period of time
specified by DISplay:PERSistence.

" ! connects adjacent data points. Old points are immediately replaced by
new ones.

 causes the display to show acquired (non-interpolated) samples
with brighter or different colored dots than the rest of the waveform.

Examples 


sets the display to indefinitely accumulate data points on the screen.


might return  indicating that the display shows individual waveform data
points.

DISplay:TRIGBar
Controls the display of the trigger bar indicator/s. The bar indicates where the
trigger will occur, in voltage.
The digitizing oscilloscope will only display the bar if the trigger source is also
displayed. If both a main and a delayed trigger are displayed, then two bars will
appear. One will accompany each source. If a logic trigger is selected, then
multiple bars may appear. If a runt pulse trigger is selected, then two bars may
appear. One will show the upper threshold and one the lower threshold.

Group Display

Syntax # $  %  " %  &

# 

  "


#  


Arguments  removes the trigger bar indicator from the display.

 " displays a short arrow at the right side of the graticule for each displayed
trigger signal.

2–120 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

LONG displays a horizontal line in the center of the graticule for each displayed
trigger signal.

Examples DISPLAY:TRIGBAR LONG

sets the display to show long trigger bar indicator (or indicators).

DISplay:TRIGT
Controls the display of the trigger indicator. This is equivalent to setting the
Display ‘T’ @ Trigger Point in the Readout Options side menu. The query
form returns an ON (1) or an OFF (0).

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:TRIGT { ON | OFF | <NR1> }

DISplay:TRIGT?

ON

<Space> OFF

<NR1>
DISplay : TRIGT
?

Arguments <OFF> or <NR1> = 0 removes the trigger indicator from the display.
<ON> or <NR1>  0 displays a trigger indicator on each of the displayed
waveforms. The trigger indicator is in reverse video for the selected waveform.

Examples DISPLAY:TRIGT ON
sets the display to show trigger indicators.
DISPLAY:TRIGT?
might return 1 indicating that the display shows trigger indicators.

*ESE
Sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register (ESER). The ESER
prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register (STB). For a
more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see page 3–1.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–121

Command Descriptions

Group Status and Error

Related Commands *CLS, DESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg? *SRE, *STB?

Syntax  









Arguments 
is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary bits of the ESER
are set according to this value.
The power-on default for ESER is 0 if  is 1. If  is 0, the ESER
maintains its value through a power cycle.

NOTE. Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows only those
codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5)
of the Status Byte Register. Use the  command to set the DESER. A
discussion of event handling begins on page 3–1.

Examples  

sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ, EXE, and
OPC bits.

might return the string  , showing that the ESER contains the binary
value 10111010.

*ESR? (Query Only)

Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register (SESR). *ESR? also
clears the SESR (since reading the SESR clears it). For a more detailed
discussion of the use of these registers, see page 3–1.

Group Status and Error

Related Commands ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?

2–122 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax  

  

Examples  
might return the value , showing that the SESR contains binary 11010101.

EVENT? (Query Only)

Returns from the Event Queue an event code that provides information about the
results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also removes the returned value from
the Event Queue. A discussion of event handling begins on page 3–1.

Group Status and Error

Related Commands ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?

Syntax  

  

Examples  
might return the response    , showing that there was an error in a
command header.

EVMsg? (Query Only)

Removes from the Event Queue a single event code associated with the results of
the last *ESR? read, and returns the event code along with an explanatory
message. A more detailed discussion of event handling begins on page 3–1.

Group Status and Error

Related Commands ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, *SRE, *STB?

Syntax 


TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–123

Command Descriptions

EVMsg ?

Returns The event code and message in the following format:

<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Event Code><Comma><QString>...]
<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
where <Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned
when a command error is detected by the digitizing oscilloscope. As much of the
command will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit
of the <Message> and <Command> strings combined. The command string is
right-justified.

Examples EVMSG?
might return the message :EVMSG 110,"Command header error".

EVQty? (Query Only)

Returns the number of event codes that are in the Event Queue. This is useful
when using the ALLEv? query since it lets you know exactly how many events
will be returned.

Group Status and Error

Related Commands ALLEv?, EVENT?, EVMsg?

Syntax EVQty?

EVQty ?

Returns <NR1>

Examples EVQTY?
might return 3 as the number of event codes in the Event Queue.

2–124 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

FACtory (No Query Form)

Resets the digitizing oscilloscope to its factory default settings. This command is
equivalent to selecting Recall Factory Setup in the Waveform Save/Recall
menu.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands *PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp

Syntax 





Setting the digitizing oscilloscope to factory default includes:

H Clears the Event Status Enable Register.
H Clears the Service Request Enable Register.
H Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255.
H Sets the Power On Status Clear Flag to TRUE
H Purges all defined aliases.
H Enables all Command Headers (HEADer ON).
H Sets the macro defined by *DDT to a “zero-length field.”
H Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations.
The FACtory command does not alter the following:
H The state of the GPIB (IEEE Std 488.1-1987) interface.
H The selected GPIB address.
H Calibration data that affects device specifications.
H Protected user data.
H Stored settings.
H The current password (if implemented).

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–125

Command Descriptions

FILESystem:COPy (No query form)

File System Only
Copies a named file or files to a new file. The new file may be in a totally
separate directory than the old file. Also, you can use wild card characters (*.*)
to copy multiple files with one command.

Group File system

Syntax FILESystem:COPy { <source file path>,<destination file path> |

<source directory path>,<destination file path> | <source
directory path>,<destination directory path> }

<source file , <destination

path> file path>

FILESystem : COPy <source , <destination

<Space>
directory path> file path>

<source , <destination
directory path> directory path>

Arguments <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will copy the file in the
current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters and can
be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-character extension. You can also use the
inclusive filename *.* in the source file path to copy all files.
<directory path> is a quoted string that defines the directory. Input the
directory using the form <drive>/<dir>/<directory name>. <drive> and one
or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will copy the
directory in the current directory. <directory name> stands for a directory name
of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-character
extension.

Examples FILESYSTEM:COPY TEK00001.SET",fd0:/TEK00001.SET"

copies the file named TEK00001.SET on the current drive to a file named
TEK00001.SET on the drive fd0: in the root directory.
FILESYSTEM:COPY fd0:/YOURDIR/TEK00001.SET",fd0:/MYDIR"
copies the file named TEK00001.SET on the fd0: drive and the YOURDIR
directory to the MYDIR directory on the same drive.

2–126 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

FILESYSTEM:COPY YOURDIR",fd0:/MYDIR"
copies the files in the YOURDIR directory in the current directory to the MYDIR
directory on the fd0: drive.

FILESystem:CWD
File System Only
Sets or returns the current working directory (CWD) path.

Group File system

Syntax FILESystem:CWD <directory path>

FILESystem:CWD?

<Space> <directory path>

FILESystem : CWD
?

Arguments <directory path> is a quoted string that defines the directory name and path.

Examples FILESYSTEM:CWD fd0:/MYDIR"

will define fd0:/MYDIR as the current directory.
FILESYSTEM:CWD?
might return fd0:/MYDIR if that is the current directory.

FILESystem:DELEte (No query form)

File System Only
Deletes a named file.

Group File system

Syntax FILESystem:DELEte <file path>

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–127

Command Descriptions

FILESystem : DELEte <Space> <file path>

Arguments <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will delete the file in
the current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters and
can be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-character extension. You can also use
the inclusive filename *.* to delete all files.

Examples FILESYSTEM:DELETE NOT-MINE.SET"

deletes the file named NOT-MINE.SET on the default drive and directory.
FILESYSTEM:DELETE *.*"
deletes all the files in the default directory on the default drive.

FILESystem:DELWarn
File System Only
Turns on or off the front panel file delete warning. No warning is returned via the
GPIB.

Group File system

Syntax FILESystem:DELWarn { ON | OFF | <NR1> }

FILESystem:DELWarn?
ON

<Space> OFF

<NR1>
FILESystem : DELWarn
?

Arguments ON or <NR1>  0 turns on the front panel delete warning.

OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the front panel delete warning.

Examples FILESYSTEM:DELWARN OFF

disables the front panel delete warning.
FILESYSTEM:DELWARN?
might return 0 indicating the front panel warning is disabled.

2–128 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

FILESystem:DIR (Query only)

File System Only
Returns a list of quoted strings. Each string contains the name of a file or
directory in the current directory.

Group File system

Syntax 
! 


!   

Examples 

 
returns a list of files and directories in the default directory.

FILESystem:FORMat (No query form)

File System Only
Formats a named drive.

Group File system

Syntax 
!   


!      

Arguments    is a quoted string that defines the disk drive to format.  
refers to the floppy-disk drive built into the digitizing oscilloscope.

Examples 

 "
formats the media on drive fd0:.

FILESystem:FREESpace (Query only)

File System Only
Returns the amount of freespace (in bytes) on the current drive.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–129

Command Descriptions

Group File system

Syntax &#$ !

&#$  ! 

Examples  !

might return  as the amount of freespace available if the drive was full.

FILESystem:MKDir (No query form)

File System Only
Make a new directory.

Group File system

Syntax &#$" "$ "& !$

&#$  " ! "$ "& !$

Arguments "$ "& !$ is a quoted string that defines the directory. Input the
directory using the form "%""$ "& . "% and one
or more "s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will create the
directory in the current directory. "$ "&  stands for a directory name
of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-char
extension.

Examples  ' 


creates the directory named  
 on the current drive.

FILESystem:OVERWrite
File System Only
Turns on or off the file overwrite protection. Turning on file overwrite protection
prevents writing over existing files.

Group File system

2–130 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax FILESystem:OVERWrite { ON | OFF | <NR1> }

FILESystem:OVERWrite?

ON

<Space> OFF

<NR1>
FILESystem : OVERWrite
?

Arguments ON or <NR1>  0 turns on the file overwrite protection.

OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the file overwrite protection.

Examples FILESYSTEM:OVERWRITE OFF

lets you overwrite existing files.
FILESYSTEM:OVERWRITE?
might return 0 indicating you cannot overwrite existing files.

FILESystem:PRInt (No query form)

File System Only
Prints a named file to the named port.

Group File system

Syntax FILESystem:PRInt <filepath>,{ GPIb | RS232 | CENtronics }

GPIb

CENtronics
FILESystem : PRInt <file path> ,
RS232

Arguments <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will print the file in the
current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters and can
be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-character extension.
GPIb specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the GPIB port.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–131

Command Descriptions

CENtronics specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the Centronics port (Option
13 RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface only).
RS232 specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the RS232 port (Option 13
RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface only).

Examples FILESYSTEM:PRINT TEK00000.IBM",CENTRONICS

sends the file named TEK00000.IBM out the Centronics port.

FILESystem:REName (No query form)

File System Only
Assigns a new name to a file.

Group File system

Syntax FILESystem:REName <old file path>,<new file path>

FILESystem : REName <Space> <old file path> , <new file path>

Arguments <old file path> is a quoted string that defines the file to rename. Input the file
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will look for the
filename in the current directory.
<new file path> is a quoted string that defines the new name of the file. Input
the file path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or
more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will place the
newly named file in the current directory.

Examples FILESYSTEM:RENAME TEK00000.SET",MYSETTING.SET"

gives the file named TEK00000.SET the new name of MYSETTING.SET. The file
remains on the current directory.

FILESystem:RMDir (No query form)

File System Only
Deletes a named directory.

Group File system

2–132 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax (%& $ $&"$( #&

(%&  $ # $&"$( #&

Arguments $&"$( #& is a quoted string that defines the directory. Input the
directory using the form $'$$&"$( ! . $' and one
or more $s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will delete the
directory in the current directory. $&"$( !  stands for a directory name
of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-character
extension.

Examples  ,


deletes the directory named 
 in the current directory.

HARDCopy
Sends a copy of the screen display followed by an EOI to the port specified by
HARDCopy:PORT. The format and layout of the output is specified with the
HARDCopy:FORMat and HARDCopy:LAYout commands. This command is
equivalent to pressing the front-panel HARDCOPY button.
The HARDCopy? query returns format, layout, and port information.

NOTE. This command is NOT IEEE Std 488.2-1987 compatible.

Group Hardcopy

Syntax 
"#( )  $& *
#"" * & +

"#(

 $&

#
#""

&

"#(


Arguments  $& terminates the hardcopy output in process.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–133

Command Descriptions

NOTE. DCL does NOT clear the output queue once a hardcopy is in process. The
only way to abort the hardcopy process is to send the HARDCopy ABOrt
command. The output queue can then be cleared using DCL.

CLEARSpool clears the printer output spooler.

STARt initiates a screen copy that is sent to the controller where it can be stored
in a file or redirected to a printing device.

NOTE. Use the *WAI command between HARDCopy STARt commands to ensure
that the first hardcopy is complete before starting another.

Examples HARDCOPY ABORT

stops any hardcopy output that is in process.

HARDCopy:FILEName
File System Only
Selects the file to send the hardcopy data to on the next hardcopy command
(HARDCOPY START). This is equivalent to setting the target file name in the
Hardcopy menu.

Group Hardcopy

Related Commands HARDCopy

Syntax HARDCopy:FILEName <file path>

HARDCopy:FILEName?

<Space> <file path>

HARDCopy : FILEName
?

<file path> specifies that the hardcopy is sent to the named file. <file path>
is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the
form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>.<drive> and one or more <dir>s are
optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will write the file to the current

2–134 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters followed by a

period (“.”) and any 3-character extension.
You can automatically create different names for files. You do this by using the
question mark (?) as a special wildcard character. These stand for numbers the
TDS will insert sequentially in the filename. For example, if you placed two
question marks at the end of the filename then the oscilloscope would append 00
to the first file created, 01 to the next, and 02 to the next. This helps you
automatically create different names for files. It is particularly useful in
automated testing situations.

Examples HARDCOPY:FILENAME TEK.IBM"

selects TEK.IBM as the selected file name.
HARDCOPY:FILENAME?
might return TEK.IBM as the selected file name.
HARDCOPY:FILENAME TEK??.IBM"
selects TEK as the selected file name with a numeric, two-digit suffix. The TDS
might return TEK00.IBM as the first file, TEK01.IBM as the second.

HARDCopy:FORMat
Selects the output data format for hardcopies. This is equivalent to setting
Format in the Hardcopy menu.

Group Hardcopy

Syntax HARDCopy:FORMat { BMP | BMPCOLOR (TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA series
only) | DESKJet | DPU411 | DPU412 | EPSCOLImg (TDS 5XXA, 6XXA,
744 series only) | EPSColor | EPSImage | EPSMono | EPSOn | HPGl |
INTERLeaf | LASERJet | PCX | PCXCOLOR (TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA
series only) | RLE (TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA series only) | THInkjet |
TIFf }
HARDCopy:FORMat?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–135

Command Descriptions





 !,





'#

)&)+

'#!

)()

(
&

 !"
  !,



* ! 



(%$!,

"
 )*-  ,


On monochrome instruments (TDS 4X0A, 5X0A & 6X0A series only), the
following formats are mapped to a monochrome near equivalent:
 ! 

 !

 !

 !  
For example: if     and    are sent
to the oscilloscope,  is returned.

Examples    

sets the hardcopy output format to HPGL.
  
might return    as the final hardcopy output format.

2–136 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

HARDCopy:LAYout
Selects the printing orientation. This is equivalent to setting Layout in the
Hardcopy menu.

Group Hardcopy

Syntax HARDCopy:LAYout { LANdscape | PORTRait }

HARDCopy:LAYout?

LANdscape
<Space>
PORTRait

HARDCopy : LAYout
?

Arguments LANDscape specifies that the bottom of the hardcopy is along the longest side of
the page.
PORTRait specifies that the bottom of the hardcopy is along the short side of the
page. This is the standard format.

Examples HARDCOPY:LAYOUT?
might return PORTRAIT as the hardcopy page-layout format.

HARDCopy:PALEtte
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Selects whether to create the hardcopy using the current color palette (as set in
the Display menu and seen on the screen) or the hardcopy palette. For color
hardcopies, the default hardcopy palette may be most appropriate, since it has a
white background and requires less ink for printing onto white paper. For
monochrome hardcopies, the TDS ignores the palette and prints black (or the
default color) objects on a blank background.

Group Hardcopy

Related Commands HARDCopy

Syntax HARDCopy:PALEtte { CURRent | HARDCopy }

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–137

Command Descriptions

HARDCopy:PALEtte

CURRent
<Space>
HARDCopy
HARDCopy : PALEtte
?

Examples HARDCOPY:PALETTE HARDCOPY

would print each copy made using the hardcopy palette.

HARDCopy:PORT
Selects where to send the hardcopy data on the next hardcopy command (i.e.
HARDCOPY START command). This is equivalent to setting Port in the
Hardcopy menu.

Group Hardcopy

Related Commands HARDCopy, LIMit:HARDCopy

Syntax HARDCopy:PORT { CENtronics | FILE (File System only) | GPIb |

RS232 }
HARDCopy:PORT?

CENtronics

FILE

<Space> GPIb

RS232
HARDCopy : PORT
?

CENtronics specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the Centronics port (available
with the RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface).
FILE specifies that the hardcopy is stored in the file named in the HARDCO-
PY:FILENAME command.
GPIb specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the GPIB port.
RS232 specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the RS232 port (Option 13
RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface only).

2–138 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples HARDCOPY:PORT?
might return GPIB as the selected hardcopy output port.

HDR
This command is identical to the HEADer query and is included for compatibili-
ty with older Tektronix instruments.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax HDR { <NR1> | OFF | ON }

HDR?

<NR1>

<Space> OFF

ON
HDR
?

HEADer
Sets and queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the digitizing
oscilloscope to either include or omit headers on query responses. This command
does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands (those starting with
an asterisk); they never return headers.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands VERBose

Syntax HEADer { <NR1> | OFF | ON }

HEADer?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–139

Command Descriptions

<NR1>

<Space> OFF

ON
HEADer
?

Arguments ON or <NR1>  0 sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the
digitizing oscilloscope to include headers on applicable query responses. You can
then use the query response as a command.
OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the
digitizing oscilloscope to omit headers on query responses, so that only the
argument is returned.

Examples HEADER OFF

causes the digitizing oscilloscope to omit headers from query responses.
HEADER?
might return the value 1, showing that the Response Header Enable State is true.

HORizontal? (Query Only)

Returns all settings for the horizontal commands. The commands HORizon-
tal:MAIn:SCAle, HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv, HORizontal:SCAle, and HORi-
zontal:SECdiv are equivalent so HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle is the only value that
is returned.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal?

HORizontal ?

Examples HORIZONTAL?
might return the string :HORIZONTAL:MODE MAIN;RECORDLENGTH 500;
POSITION 5.0E+0;TRIGGER:POSITION 50;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE
1.0E-6;:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE RUNSAFTER;SCALE 1.0E-6;TIME:
16.0E-9

2–140 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

HORizontal:CLOck
TDS 4XXA Only
Enables either the internal or external clocks. The query returns whether the
clock is set to internal or external.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:CLOck { INTernal | EXTernal }

HORizontal:CLOck?

INTernal
<Space>
EXTernal

HORizontal : CLOck
?

Arguments INTernal enables the internal clock mode.

EXTernal enables the external clock mode.

Examples HORIZONTAL:CLOCK INTERNAL

enables the internal clocks.

HORizontal:CLOck:MAXRate
TDS 4XXA Only
Sets the maximum external clock rate. It does not enable the external clock. The
maximum external clock rate affects the decimation rate in Hi–Res mode.
If set to less than or equal to 1000, this command enables roll mode when
external clock is on and roll more is set to auto.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:CLOck:MAXRate <NR3>

HORizontal:CLOck:MAXRate?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–141

Command Descriptions

<Space> <NR3>
HORizontal : CLOck : MAXRate
?

Arguments <NR3> is rounded up to the nearest allowable external clock rate.

Examples HORIZONTAL:CLOCK:MAXRATE 50
sets the maximum external clock rate to 50 clocks per second.

HORizontal:DELay? (Query Only)

Returns all horizontal delayed time base parameters. The commands HORizon-
tal:DELay:SECdiv and HORizontal:DELay:SCAle are identical so only
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle will be returned.

Group Horizontal

Related Commands HORizontal?, HORizontal:DELay:MODe?, HORizontal:DELay:SCAle?,

HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv?, HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?

Syntax HORizontal:DELay?

HORizontal : DELay ?

Examples HORIZONTAL:DELAY?
might return the delay parameters :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE RUNSAFĆ
TER;SCALE 1.0E-6;TIME: 16.0E-9

HORizontal:DELay:MODe
Selects the mode for the delayed time base. This is equivalent to setting Time
Base in the Horizontal menu.

Group Horizontal

Related Commands HORizontal:DELay:TIMe

Syntax HORizontal:DELay:MODe { RUNSAfter | TRIGAfter }

2–142 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

% #
$ 

#"
!
#"

% # 
$   


Arguments #" specifies that the delayed time base runs a user-specified amount of
delay time after the main trigger event.
#" specifies that the delayed time base is triggerable after the main time
base triggers.

Examples 


returns either 
 or 
, indicating the delayed time base mode.

HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
Sets the time per division for the delayed time base. This is equivalent to setting
Delayed Scale in the Horizontal Scale side menu.
On the TDS 4XXA, changes made while the external clock is enabled do not
take effect until the internal clock is enabled. Also, when the external clock is
enabled, the query form of this command returns an <NR3> value representing
‘50’.

Group Horizontal

Related Commands HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv

Syntax % #

$ 
% #
$

! 
% # 
$  


Arguments  is the time per division. The range is 10 s (5 s on the TDS 620A, 640A,
and 644A and 20 s on the TDS 4XXA) to 500 ps (1 ns on the TDS 4XXA and
200 ps on the TDS 784A) in a 1–2–5 sequence. Values that are not in a 1–2–5

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–143

Command Descriptions

sequence (1–2.5–5 on the TDS 620A, 640A, & 644A) will be set to the closest
valid value. If the delayed time base scale is set slower than the main time base
scale, both the main and delayed time base scales will be set to the delay scale
value.

Examples HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 2.0E-6

sets the delay scale to 2 ms per division.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 9.0E-6
sets the delay scale to 10 ms per division. Since 9 ms is not a valid value within
the 1–2–5 sequence (1–2.5–5 on the TDS 620A, 640A, & 644A), it is automati-
cally set to the closest valid value.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE?
might return 1.0E-3, indicating that the delay time is 1 ms per division.

HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv
This command is identical to the HORizontal:DELay:SCAle command. It is
provided to maintain program compatibility with some older models of
Tektronix digitizing oscilloscopes.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv <NR3>

HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv?

<Space> <NR3>
HORizontal : DELay : SECdiv
?

HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
Sets or queries the delay time to wait after the main trigger before the delayed
time base begins. This is equivalent to setting Delayed Runs After Main in the
Time Base side menu of the Horizontal menu.

Group Horizontal

Related Commands HORizontal:DELay:MODe

2–144 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax HORizontal:DELay:TIMe <NR3>

HORizontal : DELay : TIMe <Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the time, in seconds, between the main trigger and the delayed trigger.
The range on the TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA is from 16 ns to 250 seconds
with a resolution of 4 ns. The range on the TDS 4XXA is from 10 ns to 20
seconds with a resolution of 10 ns.

Examples HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 2.0E-3

sets the delay time between the main and delayed time base to 2 ms.

HORizontal:DELay:TIMe? (Query Only)

Returns the delay time parameters.

Group Horizontal

Related Commands HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter?, HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter?

Syntax HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?

HORizontal : DELay : TIMe ?

Examples HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME?
might return :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:16.0E-9 for the delay time.

HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter
Sets or queries the delay time to wait after the main trigger before the delayed
time base begins. This is equivalent to setting Delayed Runs After Main in the
Time Base side menu of the Horizontal menu.

Group Horizontal

Related Commands HORizontal:DELay:MODe

Syntax HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter <NR3>

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–145

Command Descriptions

HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter?

HORizontal : DELay : TIMe :

<Space> <NR3>
RUNSAfter
?

Arguments <NR3> is the time, in seconds, between the main trigger and the delayed trigger.
The range is from 16 ns (10 ns on the TDS 4XXA) to 250 seconds (20 s on the
TDS 4XXA) with a resolution of 4 ns.

Examples HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:RUNSAFTER 2.0E-3

sets the delay time between the main and delayed time base to 2 ms.

HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter
Sets the delay time to wait in the trigger after delay mode. This is the time that
must pass before a delayed trigger is accepted. This command is equivalent to
setting Delay by Time time in the Delayed Trigger menu.

Group Horizontal

Related Commands HORizontal:DELay:MODe

Syntax HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter <NR3>

HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter?

HORizontal : DELay : TIMe :

<Space> <NR3>
TRIGAfter
?

Arguments <NR3> is the delay time, in seconds. The range is from 16 ns (60 ns on the TDS
4XXA) to 250 seconds (20 s on the TDS 4XXA) with a resolution of 4 ns
(10 ns down to 110 ns on the TDS 4XXA).

Examples HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:TRIGAFTER 4.0E-6

sets the delay time to 4 ms.

2–146 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:TRIGAFTER?
might return 1.000E-3, indicating that the delay time is 1 ms.

HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
TDS 5XXA & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries FastFrame frame count. This is equivalent to setting FastFrame
Setup in the Horizontal menu and the Frame Count menu item in the side
menu. FastFrame, also known as memory segmentation, captures a series of
triggered acquisitions with minimal, intervening, time.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt <NR1>

HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt?

<Space> <NR1>
HORizontal : FASTframe : COUNt
?

Arguments <NR1> indicates the number of frames to acquire.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT 2
Sets up FastFrame mode to acquire two frames (segments) of data.

HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth
TDS 5XXA & 7XXA Only
Setup length of each FastFrame frame. This is equivalent to setting FastFrame
Setup in the Horizontal menu and the Frame Length menu item in the side
menu. FastFrame, also known as memory segmentation, lets users capture a
series of triggered acquisitions with minimal, intervening, time between them.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth <NR1>

HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–147

Command Descriptions

<Space> <NR1>
HORizontal : FASTframe : LENgth
?

Arguments <NR1> indicates the frame (segment) length.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH 250

Sets up the FastFrame mode to acquire frames of 250 samples each.

HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition
TDS 5XXA & 7XXA Only
Display the selected FastFrame frame. This is equivalent to selecting Horiz Pos
in the Horizontal menu, selecting the Frame menu item in the side menu, and
entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob. FastFrame, also
known as memory segmentation, lets users capture a series of triggered
acquisitions with minimal, intervening, time between them.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition <NR1>

HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition?

<Space> <NR1>
HORizontal : FASTframe : POSition
?

Arguments <NR1> indicates the selected frame to display.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:POSITION 25
Selects the 25th FastFrame frame to display.

HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE
TDS 5XXA & 7XXA Only
Setup FastFrame acquisition. This is equivalent to setting FastFrame Setup in
the Horizontal menu and the FastFrame menu item in the side menu. Fast-
Frame, also known as memory segmentation, lets users capture a series of
triggered acquisitions with minimal time between them.

2–148 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

The digitizing oscilloscope in FastFrame mode is ready to accept a continuous

burst of triggers 400 ms after the controller sends the acquire:state run
command.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE { <NR1> | OFF | ON }

HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE?

<NR1>

<Space> OFF
HORizontal : FASTframe : STATE
ON

Arguments <NR1> indicates OFF if it’s a 0 or ON if it’s a 1 (or any other nonzero value).
ON means turn on FastFrame.
OFF means turn off FastFrame.
The query form only returns 0 or 1.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE ON
turns on FastFrame.

HORizontal:FITtoscreen
Setup horizontal waveform compress operation. This command is equivalent to
setting Record Length in the Horizontal menu and the Fit to screen menu item
in the side menu. Waveform compress lets you fit a captured waveform to the
visible screen. It provides the same functionality as if you were in zoom mode
and changed the time per division until the waveform fit the screen.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:FITtoscreen { <NR1> | OFF | ON }

HORizontal:FITtoscreen?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–149

Command Descriptions

<NR1>

<Space> OFF
HORizontal : FITtoscreen
ON

Arguments <NR1> indicates OFF if it’s a 0. It indicates ON if it’s a non-zero value.

ON means turn on waveform compress.
OFF means turn off waveform compress.

Examples HORIZONTAL:FITTOSCREEN ON
turns on waveform compress.

HORizontal:MAIn? (Query Only)

Returns the time per division of the main time base. The commands HORizon-
tal:MAIn:SECdiv and HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle are identical so only HORizon-
tal:MAIn:SCAle will be returned.

Group Horizontal

Related Commands HORizontal:SCAle, HORizontal:SECdiv, HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv

Syntax HORizontal:MAIn?

HORizontal : MAIn ?

Examples HORIZONTAL:MAIN?
might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 1.0E-6.

HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
Sets the time per division for the main time base. This command is equivalent to
setting Main Scale in the Horizontal Scale side menu.
On the TDS 4XXA, changes made while the external clock is enabled do not
take effect until the internal clock is enabled. Also, when the external clock is
enabled, the query form of this command returns an <NR3> value representing
‘50’.

2–150 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Group Horizontal

Related Commands HORizontal:DELay:SCAle, HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv, HORizon-

tal:MAIn:SECdiv

Syntax HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle <NR3>

HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle?

<Space> <NR3>
HORizontal : MAIn : SCAle
?

Arguments <NR3> is the time per division. For the TDS 6XXA series (except the 684A), the
range is 5 s to 500 ps in a 1–2.5–5 sequence). For the TDS 5XXA series, 684A,
and 7XXA, the range is 10 s to 500 ps (or 200 ps on the TDS 784A), in a 1–2–5
sequence. For the TDS 4XXA series, the range is 20 s to 1 ns.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 2E-6

sets the main scale to 2 ms per division.

HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
Sets the time per division for the main time base. This command is identical to
the HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is provided to maintain program
compatibility with some older models of Tektronix digitizing oscilloscopes.

Group Horizontal

Related Commands HORizontal:DELay:SCAle, HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv, HORizon-

tal:MAIn:SCAle

Syntax HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv <NR3>

HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv?

<Space> <NR3>
HORizontal : MAIn : SECdiv
?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–151

Command Descriptions

HORizontal:MODe
Selects whether the horizontal display uses the main or delayed time base or
both. This command is equivalent to setting Time Base in the Horizontal menu.

Group Horizontal

Related Commands DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast

Syntax HORizontal:MODe { DELAYEd | INTENSIFied | MAIn }

HORizontal:MODe?

DELAYEd

<Space> INTENSIFied

MAIn
HORizontal : MODe
?

Arguments DELAYEd means that the selected waveform is horizontally scaled relative to the
delayed time base.
INTENSIFied uses both the main and delay scales to display the waveform. The
portion of the waveform that would be displayed in DELAYEd mode is
intensified. The level of intensity is set by the DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast
command.
MAIn means that the waveform is horizontally scaled relative to the main time
base.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE DELAYED

uses the delayed horizontal scale to display the waveform.
HORIZONTAL:MODE?
might return INTENSIFIED, indicating that the waveform is displayed using both
the main and delayed time base scale.

2–152 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

HORizontal:POSition
Positions the waveform horizontally on the display. This is used for both main
and delayed time bases. This command is equivalent to adjusting the front-panel
Horizontal Position knob or setting the position in the Horizontal Position side
menu.

Group Horizontal

Syntax #"" 

#""

  
#"  "


Arguments  is from 0 to 100, and is the percent of the waveform that is displayed left
of the center graticule.

Examples      

sets the horizontal position of the waveform such that 10% of the waveform is to
the left of screen center.

HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Sets the number of data points that are acquired for each record. This is
equivalent to setting Record Length in the Horizontal menu.

Group Horizontal

Syntax #"
!" 
#"
!"

  
#"  
!"


Arguments Table 2–29 shows supported values for <NR1>.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–153

Command Descriptions

Table 2–30: Record Length Values (<NR1>)

TDS 520A,
TDS 410A, TDS 524A, TDS 620A,
TDS 420A, TDS 540A, TDS 640A, TDS 744A,
Configuration TDS 460A TDS 544A TDS 644A TDS 684A TDS 784A
Standard 500, 500, 500, 500, 500,
1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000,
2500, 2500, 2000 2500, 2500,
5000, 5000, 5000, 5000,
15000, 15000 15000 15000,
30000 50000
Option 1M 60000, 50000 75000,
120000 100000,
130000,
250000,
500000

Examples HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 2500

specifies that 2500 data points will be acquired for each record.
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH?
might return 15000 as the number of data points per record.

HORizontal:SCAle
Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to the HORi-
zontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is included here for compatibility purposes.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>

HORizontal:SCAle?

<Space> <NR3>
HORizontal : SCAle
?

2–154 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

HORizontal:SECdiv
Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to the HORi-
zontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is included here for compatibility purposes.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:SECdiv <NR3>

HORizontal:SECdiv?

<Space> <NR3>
HORizontal : SECdiv
?

HORizontal:TRIGger? (Query Only)

Returns the horizontal trigger parameter.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:TRIGger?

HORizontal : TRIGger ?

Examples HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER?
might return :HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION 50.

HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
Sets or queries the position of the trigger. This is equivalent to setting Trigger
Position in the Horizontal menu.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition <NR1>

HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–155

Command Descriptions

<Space> <NR1>
HORizontal : TRIGger : POSition
?

Arguments <NR1> is from 0 to 100 %, (20% to 80% in the TDS 620A, 640A, & 644A) and
is the amount of pretrigger information in the waveform.

Examples HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION?
might return 50.

ID? (Query Only)

Returns identifying information about the instrument and its firmware.

Group Status and Error

Related Commands *IDN?

Syntax ID?

ID ?

Returns The instrument id in the following format:

TEK/<model number>,CF:92.1CT,FV:<firmware version number>

Examples ID?
might return TEK/TDS 544A,CF:92.1CT,FV:3.0

*IDN? (Query Only)

Returns the digitizing oscilloscope identification code.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands ID

Syntax *IDN?

2–156 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

*IDN ?

Returns The instrument id in the following format:

TEKTRONIX,<model number>,0,CF:92.1CT FV:<firmware version
number>

Examples *IDN?
might return the response
TEKTRONIX,TDS 544A,0,CF:92.1CT FV:2.0

LIMit:BELl
Rings the bell when the waveform data exceeds the limits set in the limit test, if
the limit state is on.

Group Limit Test

Related Commands LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>, LIMit:STATE

Syntax LIMit:BELl { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

LIMit:BELl?

OFF

<Space> ON

<NR1>
LIMit : BELl
?

Arguments OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off ringing the bell when any waveform data exceeds the
limits set by the limit test.
ON or <NR1>  0 turns on ringing the bell.

Examples LIMit:BELl ON
specifies that the bell is to ring when any waveform data exceeds the limits
specified in the limit test.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–157

Command Descriptions

LIMit:BELl?
returns either 0 or 1, indicating whether the bell is to ring when any waveform
data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test.

LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>
Sets or queries the template against which to compare the waveform acquired
through the specified channel. The template can be a waveform saved in any of
the reference locations REF1 through REF4, or none.

Group Limit Test

Related Commands CURve, LIMit:COMPARE:MATH<x>, LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEM-

PLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce, WFMPre

Syntax LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x> { NONe | REF<x> }

LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>?

NONe
<Space>
REF <x>

LIMit : COMPARE : CH <x>

?

Arguments REF<x> is a reference waveform.

NONe specifies that no template testing is to be done for the specified channel.

Examples LIMIT:COMPARE:CH1 REF1

specifies REF1 as the template waveform against which to compare waveforms
acquired using CH1.
LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2?
might return LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2 REF4, indicating that waveforms acquired
using CH2 will be compared to the template waveform stored in REF4.

2–158 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

LIMit:COMPARE:MATH<x>
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the template against which to compare a math waveform. The
template can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations REF1
through REF4, or none.

Group Limit Test

Related Commands CURve,LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEM-

PLate:SOUrce, WFMPre

Syntax 
       

   



 

 
     


Arguments  is a reference waveform.

 specifies that no template testing is to be done for the specified channel.
   is a math waveform.

Examples 
 
 
specifies REF1 as the template waveform against which to compare waveforms
acquired using CH1.

 

might return 
 
 , indicating that waveforms acquired
using CH2 will be compared to the template waveform stored in REF4.

LIMit:HARDCopy
Executes a hardcopy operation on the waveform when any waveform data
exceeds the limits set in the limit test, if the limit state is on. The hardcopy
operation uses the port, and prints in the format and layout, specified using the
HARDCopy commands.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–159

Command Descriptions

Group Limit Test

Related Commands LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>, LIMit:STATE, HARDCopy

Syntax  
      
 


 


  



Arguments  or   0 turns on the hardcopy operation for the waveform when any
waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test.
 or  = 0 turns off the hardcopy operation.

Examples  
 
specifies that the hardcopy operation occurs for the waveform when any
waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test.
 

returns either  or , indicating whether the hardcopy operation occurs for the
waveform when any waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test.

LIMit:STATE
Turns limit testing on or off, or queries whether limit testing is in effect.

Group Limit Test

Related Commands CURve, LIMit:BELl, LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>, LIMit:HARDCopy, LIM-

it:TEMPLate, WFMPre

Syntax       



2–160 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

 


   


Arguments 

or  = 0 turns off limit testing.

 or   0 turns on limit testing.

Examples   
specifies that limit testing of waveforms is in effect.
  
returns either  or , indicating whether limit testing of waveforms is in effect.

LIMit:TEMPLate (No Query Form)

Creates a template which you can use for limit testing. You can compare the
waveform acquired through the specified channel against this template. The
template can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations REF1
through REF4, or none.

Group Limit Test

Related Commands LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce, LIMit:TEM-

PLate:TOLerance

Syntax    

      

Arguments  creates a template with the specified source waveform and tolerances, and
stores it in the destination reference waveform to be used in limit testing
comparisons.

Examples    

creates a template with the specified source waveform and tolerances, and stores
it in the destination reference waveform to be used in limit testing comparisons.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–161

Command Descriptions

LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination
Sets or queries the destination reference waveform that the LIMit:TEMPLate
STORe command will use.

Group Limit Test

Related Commands LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>, LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce

Syntax  

 

 



 
 
   
 



Arguments 
 specifies the reference waveform destination in which the template
waveform is to be stored.

Examples   

 

specifies that the template waveform referred to with the LIMit:TEMPLate
STORe command is stored as the REF2 waveform.

LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce
Sets or queries the channel, math waveform, or reference waveform that the
LIMit:TEMPLate STORe will use.

Group Limit Test

Related Commands LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>, LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination

Syntax  
  !  ! 
 "
 


2–162 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

  !



    
   


Arguments ! specifies that the template waveform is the waveform currently being
acquired using the specified channel.
! specifies that the template waveform is the waveform currently stored
as the specified math waveform.

! specifies that the template waveform is the waveform currently stored as
the specified reference waveform.

Examples   
  
specifies that the template waveform for limit tests is the waveform currently
acquired using channel 2.
  
 
might return , specifying that the template waveform for limit tests is the
waveform currently stored as the MATH3 waveform.

LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal
Sets or queries the amount, in units of horizontal divisions, by which the source
waveform is varied horizontally when creating the destination waveform.

Group Limit Test

Related Commands LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>

Syntax   
 "  
  
 " 

   
     " 

 

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–163

Command Descriptions

Arguments <NR3> is the amount, in horizontal divisions, by which the current waveform is
allowed to deviate from the template waveform without exceeding the limits set
in the limit test. The range is 0 to 5 divisions.

Examples LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal 1.0

specifies that the current waveform is deemed to be close enough to the template
waveform if it is within ±1.0 horizontal division.
LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal?
might return 1.0, specifying that the current waveform is close enough to the
template waveform if it is within ±1.0 horizontal division.

LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical
Sets or queries the amount, in units of vertical divisions, by which the source
waveform is varied vertically when creating the destination waveform.

Group Limit Test

Related Commands LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>

Syntax LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical <NR3>

LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical?

LIMit : TEMPLate : TOLerance : VERTical

<Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the amount, in vertical divisions, by which the current waveform is
allowed to deviate from the template waveform without exceeding the limits set
in the limit test. The range is 0 to 5 divisions.

Examples LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical 1.0

specifies that the current waveform is close enough to the template waveform if
it is within ±1.0 vertical division from the template waveform.
LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical?
might return 1.0, specifying that the current waveform is close enough to the
template waveform if it is within ±1.0 vertical division.

2–164 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

LOCk
Enables and disables all front panel buttons and knobs. There is no front-panel
equivalent.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands UNLock, Remote Enable Group, Local Lockout Group

Syntax 
   
 




 







Arguments  disables all front panel controls.

 enables all front panel controls. This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL
command.

NOTE. If the digitizing oscilloscope is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS),
the LOCk NONe command has no effect. For more information see the ANSI-
IEEE Std. 488.1-1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumen-
tation, section 2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.

Examples 
 
locks the front panel controls.


returns
 when the front panel controls are enabled by this command.

*LRN? (Query Only)

Returns a string listing the digitizing oscilloscope settings, except for configura-
tion information for the calibration values. You can use this string to return the
digitizing oscilloscope to the state it was in when you made the *LRN? query.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–165

Command Descriptions

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands HEADer, SET?, VERBose

Syntax *LRN?

*LRN ?

NOTE. The *LRN? query always returns a string including command headers,
regardless of the setting of the HEADer command. This is because the returned
string is intended to be sent back to the digitizing oscilloscope as a command
string. The VERBose command can still be used normally to specify whether the
returned headers should be abbreviated.

Examples *LRN?
a partial response might look like this:
:ACQUIRE:STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;
REPET 1;STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;:DIAG:LOOP:OPTION ONCE;
COUNT 1;:DIAG:STATE HALT;:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1;
:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;
POSITION1 1.00E-6;POSITION2 9.00E-6;SELECT CURSOR1;

MATH<x>? (Query Only)

Returns the definition for the math waveform specified by <x>.

Group Vertical

Syntax MATH<x>?

MATH <x> ?

MATH<x>:DEFINE
Allows the user to define new waveforms using mathematical expressions. This
is equivalent to selecting Change Math waveform definition in the Math<x>
side menu.

2–166 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Group Vertical

Syntax MATH<x>:DEFINE <QString>

MATH<x>:DEFINE?

Space <QString>
MATH<x> : DEFINE
?

Arguments <QString> contains the mathematical expression. The expression can include
any amount of white space. Expressions can be either single or dual waveform
expressions. <src> and <function> elements are case independent.
The format for a single waveform expression is:
<function>(<source> [, <window>, <scaling>, <phase
suppression>])
The format for a dual waveform expression is:
<source><operator><source>
where:
<function> ::= INV | DIF | FFT | INT
H INVert (for invert): inverts the defined waveform.
H DIFferentiate (available with Advanced DSP Math only): takes the
derivative of the selected waveform.
H FFT (available with Advanced DSP Math only): provides an FFT of the
selected waveform. It uses the format: “FFT(<source>, <window>,
<scaling>, <phase suppression>)” where the window, scaling, and phase
suppression arguments in the parentheses are optional. You can specify these
arguments in any order.
<source> refers to a signal channel. Valid choices are: CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,
REF1, REF2, REF3, or REF4.
(The TDS 410A does not include CH3 and CH4.)
<window> refers to an FFT window. Valid choices are: RECTangular,
HAMming, HANning, or BLAckmanharris.
<scaling> provides vertical scaling. Valid choices are: LOGrms, LINearrms,
DEGreesphase, or RADiansphase.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–167

Command Descriptions

<Phase suppression> is of the range: –100 dB to 100 dB.

H INTegrate (available on instruments with the Option 2F Advanced DSP
Math only): takes the integral of the selected waveform.
<operator> ::= { + | - | * | / (not available on TDS 4XXA) }
<source> ::= { CH<x> | REF<x> }

Examples MATH2:DEFINE "Ch1 + cH2"

adds channel 1 and channel 2, and stores the result in MATH2.
MATH1:DEFINE "INV( ref4 )"
inverts the waveform stored in reference memory location 4 storing the result in
MATH1.
MATH1:DEFINE "FFT( CH1 )"
takes an FFT on the waveform from channel 1 and stores the result in MATH1.
MATH1:DEFINE "FFT( CH1, HAMM, LINEARRMS, 20 )"
takes an FFT from channel1, using the HAMMING algorithm, with linear rms
scaling, and 20 dB phase suppression. The result is stored in MATH1.
MATH1:DEFINE?
might return "Ch2*Ref2" as the expression that defines MATH1.

MATH<x>:NUMAVg
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only,
some models require Option 2F
Allows the user to declare at what acquisition number the averaging algorithm
will begin exponential averaging. Prior to that acquisition number, the algorithm
uses stable averaging. This is equivalent to selecting Average in the Math<x>
side menu and entering a value with the general purpose knob or the keypad.

Group Vertical

Syntax MATH<x>:NUMAVg <NR1>

MATH<x>:NUMAVg?

2–168 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

 

 !   


Arguments    specifies the number of times to successively average the math
waveform before completing an acquisition.

Examples    
Successively averages math waveform 2 by 10 times.
   
might return 10 indicating 10 math 2 waveforms are successively averaged
before a single acquisition occurs.

MATH<x>:PROCessing
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only,
some models require Option 2F
Allows the user to turn on or off averaging for the math waveform specified by
<x>. This is equivalent to selecting No Extended Process or Average in the
Math<x> side menu.
Math averaging allows the digitizing oscilloscope to successively average any
acquisition-related math waveform. This can help reduce noise in a math
waveform.

Group Vertical

Syntax  !
  "  #  $
 !
 





 !  
 


Arguments  turns off waveform averaging.

 turns on waveform averaging.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–169

Command Descriptions

Examples MATH1:PROCESSING OFF

ensures that waveform averaging is not in use on math waveform 1.
MATH1:PROCESSING AVERAGE
turns on waveform averaging on math waveform 1.

MEASUrement? (Query Only)

Returns all measurement parameters.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement?

MEASUrement ?

Examples MEASUREMENT?
might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS
"s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:
METHOD HISTOGRAM;REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0E+0;LOW
0.0E+0;MID 0.0E+0;MID2 0.0E+0;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH
90.0E+0;LOW 10.0E+0;MID 50.0E+0;MID2 50.0E+0

MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot
Removes the measurement snapshot display.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot

2–170 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions


"$  
!# $

Examples 


 
 

MEASUrement:GATing
Sets or queries measurement gating.

Group Measurement

Related Commands CURSor:VBArs

Syntax 
"$ %  &  &  '

"$



! 



"$  


Arguments  (or ) turns on measurement gating.

 (or ) turns off measurement gating.

Examples 


 




might return 


 
showing gating is turned on.
It might also return 


 
showing gating is turned off.

MEASUrement:IMMed? (Query Only)

Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters.

Group Measurement

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–171

Command Descriptions

Syntax % " #' 

% " #'    

Examples 

might return   &




   
 

MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? (Query Only)

Returns information about the immediate delay measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax % " #' (

% " #'     ( 

Examples 

might return   

 

MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction
Sets or queries the starting point and direction that determines the delay “to”
edge when taking an immediate delay measurement. Use the MEASUre-
ment:IMMed:SOURCE2 command to specify the delay “to” waveform.

Group Measurement

Syntax % " #' ('!$# ) 

%& * %&+
% " #' ('!$#

2–172 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

MEASUrement : IMMed : DELay : DIREction

BACKWards
<Space>
FORWards

Arguments BACKWards means that the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks for
the last rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is specified
by MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2.
FORWards means that the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and
looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is
specified by MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2.

Examples MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS

starts searching from the beginning of the waveform record.
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION?
returns either BACKWARDS or FORWARDS.

MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1
Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay “from” waveform
when taking an immediate delay measurement. The waveform is specified by
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1.

Group Measurement

Related Commands MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1

Syntax MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1 { FALL | RISe }

MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–173

Command Descriptions


   
 





 

Arguments  specifies the falling edge.

  specifies the rising edge.

Examples 


 



  

specifies that the rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement.



 




returns either  
or .

MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2
Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay “to” waveform
when taking an immediate delay measurement. The waveform is specified by
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2.

Group Measurement

Related Commands MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2

Syntax 
 


  !   "

 





   
 





 

Arguments  specifies the falling edge.

2–174 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

 specifies the rising edge.

Examples 



 
specifies that the rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement.




returns  showing that the falling or negative edge of the waveform is used
for the immediate delay measurement.

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
Sets or queries the source for all single channel immediate measurements and
specifies the source to measure “from” when taking an immediate delay
measurement or phase measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax " #  % $ & $ & $ '
" # 

" #   

!  $

 
 


Arguments $ is an input channel.

$ is a math waveform.
$ is a reference waveform.

Examples 

  
specifies MATH1 as the immediate measurement source.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–175

Command Descriptions

MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Specifies the source to measure “to” when taking an immediate delay measure-
ment or phase measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax  -$)$*/$#  3 1 4  1 4  1 5

 -$)$*/$# 

,!"$   1

 
 -$)$*/  $#   


Arguments 1 is an input channel.

 1 is a math waveform.
 1 is a reference waveform.

Examples        

sets the waveform in reference memory location 3 as the delay “to” source when
making delay measurements.
     
might return  .

MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Specifies the immediate measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax  -$)$*/$# $ 3 (&/0#$ 4  ! 4

./ 4  $! 4  !*
4 . 4  !2 4   4  0$*"2 4  4  4  &)0) 4   4
)0) 4 /2 4 $-.%++/ 4 #/% 4 /2 4  +# 4  .$ 4
,' 4 $-.%++/ 4 #/% 4 $ 4  5
 -$)$*/$# $

2–176 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

%#,- !




+,

!


'

+

.




-!'.



#&-&

)! 


&-&

 ,.

!*+"((,

 ,"

 ,.


(

 +!


)$

!*+"((,

 ,"

!



*!&!',  !  !


Arguments %#,- ! is the high value minus the low value.


 is the area between the curve and ground over the entire waveform.
+, is the time from the first MidRef crossing to the last MidRef crossing.
! (cycle area) is the area between the curve and ground over one cycle.

' is the arithmetic mean over one cycle.
+ is the true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle.

. is the time between the MidRef crossings of two different waveforms.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–177

Command Descriptions

FALL is the time that it takes for the falling edge of a pulse to fall from a HighRef
value to a LowRef value of its final value.
FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in hertz.
HIGH is the 100% reference level.
LOW is the 0% reference level.
MAXimum is the highest amplitude (voltage).
MEAN is the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform.
MINImum is the lowest amplitude (voltage).
NDUty is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a
percentage.
NOVershoot is the negative overshoot, expressed as:

NOVershoot + 100 ǒ(LowAmplitude

* Minimum)
Ǔ
NWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of
a negative pulse.
PDUty is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a
percentage.
PERIod is the time, in seconds, it takes for one complete signal cycle to happen.
PHAse is the phase difference from the selected waveform to the designated
waveform.
PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude.
POVershoot is the positive overshoot, expressed as:

POVershoot + 100 ǒ(Maximum * High)

Amplitude
Ǔ
PWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of
a positive pulse.
RISe is the time that it takes for the leading edge of a pulse to rise from a low
reference value to a high reference value of its final value.
RMS is the true Root Mean Square voltage.

2–178 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples   


defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency measurement.

MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? (Query Only)

Returns the units for the immediate measurement.

Group Measurement

Related Commands MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe

Syntax  " !$$#

 " !$    $# 

Returns $"! returns  for volts, # for seconds, & for hertz,  for
volts2,or  for percent.

On the TDS 4XXA, $"! also returns  for clocks,  for volt-clocks,
or  for 1/clks.

Examples  

might return #, indicating that the units for the immediate measurement are
seconds.

MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? (Query Only)

Immediately executes the immediate measurement specified by the MEASUre-
ment:IMMed:TYPe command. The measurement is taken on the source(s)
specified by a MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE command.

Group Measurement

Syntax  " !$ %

 " !$     % 

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–179

Command Descriptions

Returns <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? (Query Only)

Returns all measurement parameters for the displayed measurement specified by
<x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?

MEASUrement : MEAS <x> ?

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS3?
might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;
UNITS "s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH2;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;
EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? (Query Only)

Returns the delay measurement parameters for the measurement specified by
<x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?

MEASUrement : MEAS <x> : DELay ?

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY?
might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;
EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction
Sets or queries the starting point and direction that determines the delay “to”
edge when taking a delay measurement. The waveform is specified by

2–180 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

MEASUrement:MEAS<X>:SOURCE2. This command is equivalent to setting

the direction in the Delay Edges & Direction side menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax $ !&'(&"! ) 

$% * $% +
$ !&'(&"!

$ !&   '  (


$%
#
$%

 &"!


Arguments 
$% means that the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks for
the last rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is specified
by MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2.
$% means that the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and
looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is
specified by MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2.

Examples 

 

starts searching from the end of the waveform record.


might return  for the search direction.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE1
Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay “from” waveform
when taking a delay measurement. The waveform is specified by
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE1. This command is equivalent to selecting
the edges in the Delay Edges & Direction side menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax $ !&'( )  *  +

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–181

Command Descriptions

  
 


      
  


 



Arguments   specifies the falling edge.

 specifies the rising edge.

Examples   

 
 
specifies that the rising edge be used for measurement 3.
  
 

returns either  or   for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2
Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay “to” waveform
when taking a delay measurement. The waveform is specified by
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2. This command is equivalent to selecting
the edges in the Delay Edges & Direction side menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax   

 
 !   "  #
  
 


      
  


 



Arguments   specifies the falling edge.

2–182 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

 specifies the rising edge.

Examples 


 
specifies that the rising edge be used for the second delay measurement.



might return  showing that the falling or negative edge of the waveform is
used for the second measurement.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
Sets or queries the source for all single channel measurements and specifies the
source to measure “from” when taking a delay measurement or phase measure-
ment.

Group Measurement

Syntax !"#  $ # % # % #
&

!"# 

!"   # 

   #

 
 


Arguments # is an input channel.

# is a math waveform.
# is a reference waveform.

Examples   

specifies MATH1 as the measurement 2 source.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–183

Command Descriptions

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Sets or queries the source to measure “to” when taking a delay measurement or
phase measurement. This is equivalent to setting the source in the Delay from
Selected Wfm side menu or the Phase from Selected Wfm side menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax   

 
      
  


       



   

Arguments
 is an input channel.
   is a math waveform.
 is a reference waveform.

Examples   



sets channel 1 as the delay “to” source when making delay measurements.
  

might return   .

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
Controls the measurement system. The source specified by MEASUre-
ment:MEAS<x>:SOURCE1 must be selected for the measurement to be
displayed. The source can be selected using the SELect:CH<x> command.

Group Measurement

2–184 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE?

OFF

<Space> ON

<NR1>
MEASUrement : MEAS <x> : STATE
?

Arguments OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns measurements off. You can also turn the state off by
deselecting the source.
ON or <NR1>  0 turns measurements on.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE ON
turns measurement defined as MEAS1 on.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE?
returns either 0 or 1, indicating the state of MEAS4.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Sets or queries the measurement type for the measurement specified by
MEAS<x>. This is equivalent to selecting the measurement in the Select
Measurement side menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe { AMPlitude | AREa | BURst | CARea |

CMEan | CRMs | DELay | FALL | FREQuency | HIGH | LOW | MAXimum |
MEAN | MINImum | NDUty | NOVershoot | NWIdth | PDUty | PERIod
|PHAse | PK2pk | POVershoot | PWIdth | RISe | RMS }
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–185

Command Descriptions

%#,- !




+,

!


'

+

/




-!'/



#&-&

)! 


&-&

 ,/

!*+"((,

 ,"

 ,/


(

 +!


)$

!*+"((,

 ,"

!



*!&!',  
 .  !


Arguments %#,- ! is the high value minus the low value or  – .

 is the area between the curve and ground over the entire waveform.
+, is the time from the first MidRef crossing to the last MidRef crossing.
! (cycle area) is the area between the curve and ground over one cycle.

' is the arithmetic mean over one cycle.
+ is the true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle.

/ is the time between the MidRef crossings of two different waveforms.

2–186 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

FALL is the time that it takes for the falling edge of a pulse to fall from a HighRef
value to a LowRef value of its final value.
FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in hertz.
HIGH is the 100% reference level.
LOW is the 0% reference level.
MAXimum is the highest amplitude (voltage).
MEAN is the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform.
MINImum is the lowest amplitude (voltage).
NDUty is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a
percentage.
NOVershoot is the negative overshoot, expressed as:

NOVershoot + 100 ǒ(LowAmplitude

* Minimum)
Ǔ
NWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of
a negative pulse.
PDUty is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a
percentage.
PERIod is the time, in seconds, it takes for one complete signal cycle to happen.
PHAse is the phase difference from the selected waveform to the designated
waveform.
PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude.
POVershoot is the positive overshoot, expressed as:

POVershoot + 100 ǒ(Maximum * High)

Amplitude
Ǔ
PWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of
a positive pulse.
RISe is the time that it takes for the leading edge of a pulse to rise from a low
reference value to a high reference value of its final value.
RMS is the true Root Mean Square voltage.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–187

Command Descriptions

Examples 

 
specifies MEAS3 to calculate the Root Mean Square voltage.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? (Query Only)

Returns the units for the measurement specified by MEASUre-
ment:MEAS<x>:TYPe.

Group Measurement

Syntax 
 "
$ "!


 "  
 $   "!

Returns "  returns  for volts, ! for seconds,  for hertz,  for
volts2, or  for percent.

On the TDS 4XXA, "  also returns  for clocks,  for volt-clocks,
or  for 1/clks.

Examples 

 
might return , indicating the units for Measurement 3 are percent.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? (Query Only)

Returns the value that has been calculated for the measurement specified by <x>.

NOTE. This value is a display value and will be updated perhaps every 1/3
second. If you are acquiring a long acquisition record, the TDS may take longer
than this time to update.

Group Measurement

Syntax 
 "
$
#

2–188 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

 "#    &  $ 

Returns 

MEASUrement:METHod
Sets or queries the method used to calculate the 0% and 100% reference level.
This is equivalent to setting the High-Low Setup in the Measure menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax  "#   '  # " (  & )

 "#  

 # "
!
 &
 "#    


Arguments  # " sets the high and low waveform levels statistically using a histogram
algorithm.
 & sets the high and low waveform levels to MAX and MIN, respectively.

Examples       

specifies that the high and low reference levels are set statistically.
    
returns   when the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX.

MEASUrement:REFLevel? (Query Only)

Returns the reference levels.

Group Measurement

Syntax  "#
%

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–189

Command Descriptions

MEASUrement : REFLevel ?

MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
Sets or queries the high reference level, and is the 100% reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. This command is
equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in the Measure menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?

MEASUrement : REFLevel : ABSolute : HIGH

<Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the high reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.71

sets the high reference level to 1.71 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
Sets or queries the low reference level, and is the 0% reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. This command is
equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in the Measure menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?

2–190 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

MEASUrement : REFLevel : ABSolute : LOW

<Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW?
might return 0.0E+0 as the low reference level.

MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID
Sets or queries the mid reference level, and is the 50% reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. This command is
equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in the Measure menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID?

MEASUrement : REFLevel : ABSolute : MID

<Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID .71

sets the mid reference level to .71 volts.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–191

Command Descriptions

MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
Sets or queries the mid reference level for the “to” waveform when taking a
delay measurement, and is the 50% reference level when MEASUrement:RE-
FLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. This command is equivalent to setting the
Reference Levels in the Measure menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?

MEASUrement : REFLevel : ABSolute : MID2

<Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5

sets the mid reference level for the delay waveform to 0.5 volts.

MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Specifies which reference levels are used for measurement calculations. This
command is equivalent to setting the levels in the Reference Levels side menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod { ABSolute | PERCent }

MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod?

ABSolute
<Space>
PERCent

MEASUrement : REFLevel : METHod

?

2–192 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Arguments
"&% specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is useful when
precise values are required. For instance, when designing to published interface
specifications such as RS-232-C.
 !% specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to
HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement:REFLe-
vel:PERCent commands.

Examples        

"&%
specifies that explicit user-defined values are used for the reference levels.
       
returns either
"&% or   , indicating the reference levels used.

MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to
calculate the high reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is
set to PERCent. This command is equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in
the Measure menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax  $ !% ' !% 

 $ !% ' !%

 $ !%   '   !%  

# 

Arguments  ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the high reference level. The default
is 90%.

Examples          

specifies that the high reference level is set to 95% of HIGH.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–193

Command Descriptions

MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to
calculate the low reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set
to PERCent. This command is equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in the
Measure menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax 
 
 !
   

 
 !
  


  
 !  
  

 

Arguments  ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the low reference level. The default is
10%.

Examples 







 
might return 15, meaning that the low reference level is 15% of HIGH.

MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID
Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to
calculate the mid reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is
set to PERCent. This command is equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in
the Measure menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax 
 
 !
  

 
 !
  

2–194 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

MEASUrement : REFLevel : PERCent : MID

<Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the mid reference level. The default is
50%.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID 60
specifies that the mid reference level is set to 60% of HIGH.

MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to
calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when taking
a delay measurement. This command is equivalent to setting the Reference
Levels in the Measure menu.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?

MEASUrement : REFLevel : PERCent : MID2

<Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the mid reference level. The default is
50%.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 40
specifies that the mid reference level is set to 40% of HIGH.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–195

Command Descriptions

MEASUrement:SNAPShot
Displays the measurement snapshot.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:SNAPShot

MEASUrement : SNAPShot

Examples MEASUREMENT:SNAPSHOT

MESSage
Clears the message window and the MESSage? query returns the current
message parameters.

Group Display

Syntax MESSage CLEar

MESSage?

<Space> CLEar
MESSage
?

Arguments CLEar removes the message from the message window. This is equivalent to
sending MESSage SHOW "".

Examples MESSAGE CLEAR

clears the message from the window.

MESSage:BOX
Defines the size and position of the message window. This command does not
display the window unless MESSage:STATE is ON.

Group Display

2–196 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax 
  

 

     


  


Arguments  and  = 0 to 640, and are pixel positions along the horizontal axis. 
defines the left and  defines the right side of the window.
 and  = 0 to 480, and are pixel positions along the vertical axis. 
defines the top and  defines the bottom of the window. The reserved height
of all characters is 15 pixels so the window must be at least that high to fully
display characters. For a complete list of character widths in pixels, see Table
A–1 on page A–1. Shorter windows clip characters.
Figure 3-1 shows the coordinate system relative to the screen.
24

74

124

174

224

274

324

374
424

474

524

640
0

0
34

84

134

184

234

284
334

384

434

480

Figure 2–4: Message Window Coordinates

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–197

Command Descriptions

MESSage:SHOW
Clears the contents of the message window and displays the new message in the
window.

Group Display

Syntax    

  

  

    


Arguments 
 is the message and can include any of the characters shown in the
TDS Character Chart in Appendix A. The maximum length of the message is
1000 characters.
The message is left-justified, and is displayed on a single line starting with the
top most line in the window. A line feed character can be embedded in the string
to position the message on multiple lines. You can also use white space and tab
characters to position the message within a line.
You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character (decimal 9) followed by two
characters representing the most significant eight bits followed by the least
significant eight bits of a 16-bit number. The number specifies the pixel column
relative to the left margin of the label area. For example, to tab to pixel 13, send
TAB (decimal 9), NUL (decimal 0), and CR (decimal 13).
The ESC character followed by the @ character turns inverse video on or off and
can be embedded in the message string. The first ESC character followed by a @
character displays all the text that follows in inverse video until another ESC
character followed by a @ character is found in the string.

NOTE. The use of any escape codes other than what is described above may
produce unpredictable results.

The label area is the height and width you have set using the MESSage:Box
command. The length of the label that fits in the label area depends on the
contents of the label because the width of characters varies. For a complete list of
character widths in pixels, see Table A–1 on page A–1.
If the message exceeds the limits of the window, either horizontally or vertically,
the portion of the message that exceeds the limits will not be displayed. The

2–198 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

message string itself is not altered. The entire message can be returned as a query
response regardless of what is displayed in the window.

Examples 
  
displays “Hello world” in the upper left corner of the box (you can define the
box size with the MESSAGE BOX command).

  a a  
displays “Hello world ... hello” in the upper left corner of the box and the word
“world” is displayed in inverse video. In this example, a stands for the escape
character. The escape character may appear differently for you depending on your
GPIB talker-listener program.

MESSage:STATE
Controls the display of the message window.

Group Display

Syntax 
 !  "  "  #



 


  



Arguments  or  = 0 removes the message window from the screen.

 or   0 displays the message window and its contents on the screen.
The size of the window is defined by MESSage:BOX.

NEWpass (No Query Form)

Changes the password that enables access to password protected data. The
PASSWord command must be successfully executed before using this command
or an execution error will be generated.

Group Miscellaneous

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–199

Command Descriptions

Related Commands PASSWord, *PUD

Syntax
  

   

Arguments   is the new password. The password can include up to 10 characters.

Examples
 
creates a new password for accessing the user protected data.

*OPC
Generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) when all pending operations finish. The *OPC? query places the ASCII
character “1” into the output queue when all pending operations are finished. The
*OPC? response is not available to read until all pending operations finish. For a
complete discussion of the use of these registers and the output queue, see page
3–1.

Group Status and Error

Related Commands BUSY?, *WAI

Syntax 





The *OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the digitizing
oscilloscope with your application program. Synchronization methods are
described starting on page 3–7.

2–200 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Table 2–31: Commands that Generate an Operation Complete Message

Operation Command
Automatic scope adjustment AUTOSet EXECute
Internal self-calibration *CAL
Single sequence acquisition ACQuire:STATE ON or
ACQuire:STATE RUN
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to
SEQuence)
Hardcopy output HARDCopy STARt

*OPT? (Query Only)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Returns a list of options installed in your digitizing oscilloscope.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *OPT?

*OPT?

Examples OPT?
Might return: 13:Rs232/cent,1M:extended record length,
2F:math pack,05:video trigger,0,CD:color display.

PASSWord (No Query Form)

Enables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands. Sending PASSWord without
any arguments disables these same commands. Once the password is successful-
ly entered, the *PUD and NEWpass commands are enabled until the digitizing
oscilloscope is powered off, or until the FACtory command, the PASSWord
command with no arguments, or the *RST command is issued.
To change the password, you must first enter the valid password with the
PASSWord command and then change to your new password with the NEWpass
command. Remember that the password is case sensitive.

Group Miscellaneous

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–201

Command Descriptions

Related Commands NEWpass, *PUD

Syntax 
 


 

Arguments  is the password and can include up to 10 characters. The factory
default password is “XYZZY”and is always valid.

Examples 

Enables the *PUB and NEWpass set commands.


Disables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands. You can still use the query
version of *PUD.

*PSC
Sets and queries the power-on status flag that controls the automatic power-on
handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When *PSC is true, the
DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at
power-on. When *PSC is false, the current values in the DESER, SRER, and
ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and
are restored at power-on. For a complete discussion of the use of these registers,
see page 3–1.

Group Status and Error

Related Commands DESE, *ESE, FACtory, *RST, *SRE

Syntax   
  

 
 


2–202 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Arguments <NR1> = 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the power-on clear
and allows the digitizing oscilloscope to possibly assert SRQ after power-on.
<NR1>  0 sets the power-on status clear flag true. Sending *PSC 1 therefore
enables the power-on status clear and prevents any SRQ assertion after power-
on. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution warning.

Examples *PSC 0
sets the power-on status clear flag to false.
*PSC?
might return the value 1, showing that the power-on status clear flag is set to
true.

*PUD
Sets or queries a string of Protected User Data. This data is protected by the
PASSWord command. You can modify it only by first entering the correct
password. The password is not necessary to query the data.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands PASSWord

Syntax *PUD <Block>

*PUD?

<Space> <Block>
*PUD
?

Arguments <Block> is a string containing up to 100 characters.

Examples *PUD #229This instrument belongs to me

stores the string “This instrument belongs to me” in the user protected data area.
*PUD?
might return #221Property of Company X.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–203

Command Descriptions

*RCL (No Query Form)

Restores the state of the digitizing oscilloscope from a copy of its settings stored
in memory. (The settings are stored using the *SAV command.) This command
is equivalent to RECAll:SETUp and performs the same function as the Recall
Saved Setup item in the front-panel Save/Recall Setup menu.

Group Save and Recall

Related Commands DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *LRN?, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp

Syntax    

    

Arguments   is a value in the range from 1 to 10, and specifies a setup storage location.
Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error (222, “Data out of range”).

Examples   
restores the digitizing oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory
location 3.

RECAll:SETUp (No Query Form)

Restores a stored or factory front-panel setup of the digitizing oscilloscope. This
command is equivalent to selecting Recall Saved Setup or Recall Factory
Setup or Recall Current Setup in the Save/Recall Setup menu.

Group Save and Recall

Related Commands DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *RCL, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp

Syntax 

         

 

 

  
 
 

2–204 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Arguments FACtory selects the factory setup.

<NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10 and specifies a setup storage location.
Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error (222, “Data out of range”).
<file path> (available on instruments with the Option 1F File System) is the
location in mass storage memory where the setup will be recalled from.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will read the file from
the default directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters
followed by a period (“.”) and any 3-character extension. Do not use wild card
characters.

Examples RECALL:SETUP FACTORY

recalls (and makes current) the front panel setup to its factory defaults.
RECALL:SETUP 1
recalls the front panel setup from setup1.
RECALL:SETUP TEK00000.SET"
recalls the front panel setup from the file TEK00000.SET in the default directory
and on the default drive.

RECAll:WAVEform (No Query Form)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Recalls a stored waveform into a reference location. This command is equivalent
to selecting Recall File in the Save/Recall Waveform menu.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax RECAll:WAVEform <file path>,REF<x>

RECAll : WAVEform <Space> <file path> , REF <x>

Arguments REF<x> is the location in internal reference memory where the waveform is
recalled from.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will recall the
waveform from the default directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–205

Command Descriptions

8 characters followed by a period (“.”) and any 3-character extension. Do not use
wild card characters.

Examples RECALL:WAVEFORM TEK00000.WFM",REF1

recalls the waveform stored in the file named TEK00000.WFM to reference
location 1.

REM (No Query Form)

Specifies a comment. This line is ignored by the instrument.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax REM <QString>

REM <Space> <QString>

Arguments <QString> is a string that can have a maximum of 80 characters.

Examples REM "This is a comment"

is ignored by the instrument.

*RST (No Query Form)

(Reset) returns the digitizing oscilloscope to a known set of instrument settings,
but does not purge any aliases or stored settings.

Group Status and Error

Related Commands FACtory, *PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp

Syntax *RST

*RST

*RST returns the instrument settings to the factory defaults (see Appendix D:
Factory Initialization Settings).

2–206 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

The *RST command does not alter the following:

H The state of the IEEE Std 488.1–1987 interface.
H The selected IEEE Std 488.1–1987 address of the digitizing oscilloscope.
H Calibration data that affect device specifications.
H The Output Queue.
H The Service Request Enable Register setting.
H The Standard Event Status Enable Register setting.
H The Power-on status clear flag setting.
H Alias definitions.
H Stored settings.
H The *PUD? response.

RS232:BAUd
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only
Sets or queries RS-232-C interface transmission speed.

Group RS232

Syntax   

 




  


Arguments 
where 
can be 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200.

Examples   

sets the transmission rate to 9600 baud.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–207

Command Descriptions

RS232:HARDFlagging
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only
Sets or queries the input and output hard flagging over the RS-232 port. It uses
the RFR (Ready For Receive) and CTS (Clear To Send) lines to control data
transmission. On output, the oscilloscope transmits data only when CTS is
asserted. When CTS is not asserted, the oscilloscope stops transmitting data. On
input, it asserts RFR until the receive queue is full. Then it unasserts RFR to stop
transmission from an external printer. CTS remains unasserted until the receive
queue is not full. At that time, CTS is asserted again to restart transmission.

Group RS232

Syntax RS232:HARDFlagging { ON | OFF | <NR1> }

RS232:HARDFlagging?

ON

<Space> OFF

<NR1>
RS232 : HARDFlagging
?

Arguments <ON> or <NR1> 0 turn on hardflagging.

<OFF> or <NR1> = 0 turn off hardflagging.

Examples RS232:HARDFLAGGING ON
turns on hard flagging.

RS232:PARity
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only
Sets or queries the parity used for all RS-232-C data transfers. Parity adds a bit
to the character sequence. When parity is odd or even, the digitizing oscilloscope
generates the selected parity on output and checks all input against the selected
parity. When parity is none, the digitizing oscilloscope performs no input parity
error checks and generates no output parity.

Group RS232

2–208 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax    ! 

!  "
 



 


   


Arguments  indicates the parity bit is sent with even parity and bytes received are
expected to have even parity.


indicates the parity bit is sent with odd parity and bytes received are
expected to have odd parity.
 indicates that no parity bit is sent and none are expected.

Examples    
sets the parity to even.

RS232:SOFTFlagging
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only
Sets or queries the input and output soft flagging over the RS-232 port. It stops
transmitting data any time it receives an XOFF (DC3) character. It sends an
XOFF character when its 512 byte input buffer has 80 free bytes. The digitizing
oscilloscope begins transmitting data again when it receives an XON (DC1)
character. It sends XON when its input buffer has 100 free bytes.

Group RS232

Syntax   !  !  "





 


  


TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–209

Command Descriptions

Arguments ON or <NR1>  0 turn on softflagging.

OFF or <NR1> = 0 turn off softflagging.

Examples RS232:SOFTFLAGGING ON
turns on soft flagging.

RS232:STOPBits
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only
Sets or queries the number of transmission stop bits sent with each character to
identify the end of data for that character.

Group RS232

Syntax RS232:STOPBits <NR1>

RS232:STOPBits?

<Space> <NR1>
RS232 : STOPBits
?

Arguments <NR1> is 1 or 2.

Examples RS232:STOPBITS 1 sets the number of stop bits to 1.

RS232? (Query Only)

RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only
Queries the RS232 settings.

Group RS232

Syntax RS232?

RS232 ?

2–210 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Arguments None

Examples RS232? queries for RS232 settings.

It might return:
RS232 BAUD: 9600, SOFTFLAGGING: OFF, HARDFLAGGING: ON, PARITY:
NONE, STOPBITS: 1

*SAV (No Query Form)

(Save) stores the state of the digitizing oscilloscope into a specified memory
location. You can later use the *RCL command to restore the digitizing
oscilloscope to this saved state. This is equivalent to selecting the Save Current
Setup in the Save/Recall Setup menu.

Group Save and Recall

Related Commands DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp

Syntax *SAV <NR1>

*SAV <Space> <NR1>

Arguments <NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10 and specifies a location. Using an
out-of-range value causes an execution error. Any settings that have been stored
previously at this location will be overwritten.

Examples *SAV 2
saves the current settings in memory location 2.

SAVe:SETUp (No Query Form)

Saves the current front-panel setup into the specified memory location or file.
This is equivalent to selecting the Save Current Setup in the Save/Recall Setup
menu.

Group Save and Recall

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–211

Command Descriptions

Related Commands DELEte:SETUp, RECAll:SETUp, *RCL, *SAV

Syntax SAVe:SETUp { <NR1> | <file path> }

<NR1>
SAVe : SETUp <Space>
<file path>

Arguments <NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10 and specifies a location. Using an
out-of-range value causes an execution error. Any settings that have been stored
previously at this location will be overwritten.
<file path> (available on instruments with the Option 1F File System) is a
quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the
form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are
optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will write the file to the default
directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters followed by a
period (“.”) and the 3-char extension “SET”. The TDS will generate an error if
you use any other extension for saving a setup.
Settings saved in one TDS oscilloscope may or may not work on a different
model TDS or on the same model TDS with a different version of firmware.

Examples SAVE:SETUP 5
saves the current front-panel setup in memory location 5.
SAVE:SETUP TEK00000.SET
saves the current front-panel setup to the file TEK00000.SET in the default
directory and on the default drive.

SAVe:WAVEform (No Query Form)

Stores a waveform in one of four reference memory locations or a mass storage
file (on instruments with the Option 1F File System). This command is
equivalent to selecting either the Save Waveform or the Save to File Waveform
item in the Save/Recall Waveform menu.

Group Save and Recall

Related Commands DELEte:WAVEFORM, SAVE:WAVEform:FILEFormat

Syntax SAVe:WAVEform <wfm>,{ REF<x> | <file path> }

2–212 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

REF <x>
SAVe : WAVEform <Space> <wfm> ,
<file path>

Arguments <wfm> is CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x>, and is the waveform that will be
saved.
REF<x> is the location where the waveform will be stored.
<file path> (on instruments with the Option 1F File System) is a quoted string
that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If
you do not specify them, the digitizing oscilloscope will write the file to the
default directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters
followed by a period (“.”) and the proper 3-character extension. Internal format
waveforms use the “WFM” extension. The TDS 4XXA and TDS 7XXA can also
use a “CSV” extension for spreadsheet format files or a “DAT” extension for
MathCad format files. The digitizing oscilloscope will generate an error if you
use any other extension for saving a waveform.

Examples SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH2,REF1

saves the math 2 waveform in reference memory location 2.
SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH1,TEK00000.WFM
saves the math1 waveform to the file TEK00000.WFM in the default directory and
on the default drive.

SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
TDS 4XXA & 7XXA Only
Specifies the file format for saved waveforms.

Group Save and Recall

Related Commands SAVE:WAVEFORM

Syntax SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat{ INTERNal | SPREADSheet | MATHCad }

SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–213

Command Descriptions

INTERNal

SPREADSheet
<Space>
MATHCad
SAVe : WAVEFORM : FILEFormat
?

Arguments INTERNal specifies the internal format. Internal format files have a .wfm
extension.
SPREADSheet specifies the spreadsheet format. Spreadsheet format files have a
.CSV extension.
MATHCad specifies the MathCad format. MathCad format files have a .DAT
extension.

Examples SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT SPREADSHEET

specifies the waveform, when saved, will be stored in a spreadsheet–compatible
format.

SELect? (Query Only)

Returns the selected waveform and the display status of all waveforms.

Group Vertical

Syntax SELect?

SELect ?

Examples SELECT?
might return :SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH1 0;
MATH2 0;MATH3 0;REF1 0;REF2 0;REF3 0;REF4 0;SELECT CH1

2–214 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

SELect:<wfm>
Controls the display and selection of waveforms. There can be up to eleven
waveforms displayed at one time, but only one waveform can be selected at a
time. The selected waveform is the waveform that was most recently turned on.
This command is equivalent to pressing a front-panel CH or MORE button.
<wfm> can be CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x>.

Group Vertical

Syntax 
       



 



  


Arguments  or  = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform.

 or   0 turns on the display of the specified waveform. The waveform
also becomes the selected waveform.

Examples 

  
turns the channel 2 display on and selects channel 2.




returns either  or , indicating whether the REF1 waveform is selected.

SELect:CONTROl
Sets or queries the waveform that is currently affected by the cursor and vertical
commands.

Group Vertical

Syntax 
  

 

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–215

Command Descriptions

<Space> <wfm>
SELect : CONTROl
?

Arguments <wfm> is CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x>, and is the selected waveform.

Examples SELECT:CONTROL?
might return CH1 as the selected waveform.

SET? (Query Only)

Returns a string listing the digitizing oscilloscope settings, except for configura-
tion information for the calibration values. You can use this string to return the
digitizing oscilloscope to the state it was in when you made the SET? query.
This command is identical to the *LRN? command.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands HEADer, *LRN?, VERBose

Syntax SET?

SET ?

NOTE. The SET? query always returns a string with command headers,
regardless of the setting of the HEADer command. This is because the returned
string is intended to be able to be sent back to the digitizing oscilloscope as a
command string. The VERBose command can still be used to specify whether the
returned headers should be abbreviated or full length.

Examples SET?
a partial return string may look like this:
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG
16;REPET 1;:APPMENU:TITLE "Application Menu";LABEL:BOTTOM1
"";BOTTOM2 "";BOTTOM3 "";BOTTOM4 "";BOTTOM5 "";BOTTOM6 "";BOTTOM7
"";RIGHT1 "";RIGHT2 ""; RIGHT3 "";RIGHT4 "";RIGHT5 "";:HEADER
1;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;
FILTER SINX;PERSISTENCE 500.0E-3;GRATICULE FULL;TRIGT 1;INTENSIĆ
TY:OVERALL 85;WAVEFORM 75;TEXT 60;CONTRAST 150;:MESSAGE:SHOW

2–216 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

"hello";STATE 1;BOX 74,84,475,135;:LOCK NONE; :HARDCOPY:FORMAT

EPSIMAGE;PORT GPIB;LAYOUT PORTRAIT;

*SRE
(Service Request Enable) sets and queries the bits in the Service Request Enable
Register (SRER). For a complete discussion of the use of these registers, see
page 3–1.

Group Status and Error

Related Commands *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory, *PSC, *STB?

Syntax *SRE <NR1>

*SRE?

<Space> <NR1>
*SRE
?

Arguments <NR1> is a value in the range from 0 to 255. The binary bits of the SRER are set
according to this value. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error.
The power-on default for SRER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER
maintains its value through a power cycle.

Examples *SRE 48
sets the bits in the SRER to 00110000 binary.
*SRE?
might return a value of 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary
value 00100000.

*STB? (Query Only)

(Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the Status Byte Register (SBR)
using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. For a complete discussion of the
use of these registers, see page 3–1.

Group Status and Error

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–217

Command Descriptions

Related Commands *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory, *SRE

Syntax


 

Returns 

Examples

might return the value , showing that the SBR contains the binary value
01100000.

TEKSecure
Initializes both waveform and setup memories. This overwrites any previously
stored data.
TEKSecure writes zeros in all waveform reference memory, regardless of
selected record length, and puts all setups in the factory init state.
TEKSecure then verifies that the waveform and setup memory are in the desired
state. It asserts a pass or a fail event on completion.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax 





TIMe
Sets or queries the time that the digitizing oscilloscope can display.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands DATE, DISplay: CLOCk

2–218 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax TIMe <QString>

TIMe?

<Space> <QString>
TIMe
?

Arguments <QString> is a date in the form hh:mm:ss".

hh refers to the hour number from 01 to 24.
mm refers to the minute number in the hour from 00 to 59.
ss refers to the seconds number in the minute from 00 to 59.
There must be a colon after the hh and after the mm.
Use two digits for each of the hh, mm, and ss.

Examples TIME "01:24:00"

specifies that the time is set to 01:24 AM.

TRIGger
Forces a trigger event to occur, and the TRIGger query returns the current trigger
parameters.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger FORCe

TRIGger?

<Space> FORCe
TRIGger
?

Arguments FORCe creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is REAdy, the acquisition will
complete, otherwise this command will be ignored. This is equivalent to pressing
the front-panel FORCE TRIGGER button.

Examples TRIGGER FORCe

forces a trigger event to occur.
TRIGGER?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL -480.0E-3;

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–219

Command Descriptions

HOLDOFF:VALUE 0;:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE

RISE;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;FUNCTION AND;WHEN
TRUE;THRESHOLD:CH1 1.40E+0;CH2 1.200E+0;CH3 1.200E+0;CH4
1.200E+0;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:
STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE;:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;
GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0E-9;FILTER ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:
MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW
800.0E-3;:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0E-9;HIGHLIMIT
2.0E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE
EDGE;LEVEL -480.0E-3;BY TIME; EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING
DC;:TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME 16.0E-9;EVENTS:COUNT 2

TRIGger:DELay
Sets the delayed trigger level and returns the current delayed trigger parameters.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:DELay SETLevel

TRIGger:DELay?

<Space> SETLevel
TRIGger : DELay
?

Arguments SETLevel sets the delayed trigger level to half way between the MIN and MAX
amplitudes of the trigger source input. This is equivalent to selecting Set to 50%
in the Delayed Edge Level side menu.

Examples TRIGGER:DELAY SETLEVEL

sets the delayed trigger level to 50% of MAX and MIN.
TRIGGER:DELAY?
might return :TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE EDGE;LEVEL 0.0E+0;BY
TIME;EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING DC;:TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME
16.0E-9;EVENTS:COUNT 2

2–220 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger:DELay:BY
Selects whether the delayed trigger occurs after a specified number of events or a
specified period of time after the main trigger. This is equivalent to setting Delay
by in the Delayed Trig menu.

Group Trigger

Related Commands TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt, TRIGger:DELay:TIMe

Syntax TRIGger:DELay:BY
{ EVENTS | EVENTSTime | TIMe }
TRIGger:DELay:BY
{ EVENTS | TIMe | EVENTSTime (TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA only) |
RUNSAfter (TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA only)}
TRIGger:DELay:BY?

EVENTS

TIMe

EVENTSTime
<Space>
RUNSAfter
TRIGger : DELay : BY
?

Arguments EVENTS sets the delayed trigger to occur after a set number of trigger events after
the main trigger. The number of events is specified by
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt.
TIMe sets the delayed trigger to be ready to occur a set time after the main trigger
event. The time period is specified by TRIGger:DELay:TIMe.
EVENTSTime (TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA only) sets a specified time after a
specified number of delay trigger trigger events — after the main trigger event.
For example in examining a pulse train, you might use the main trigger to detect
the start of the train, then use the delay by events to go to the position of interest
within the pulse train, and then use the time delay to wait a specified time period
before starting the data acquisition.
RUNSAfter (TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA only) looks for a main trigger, then
waits a user-specified time, then starts acquiring data.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–221

Command Descriptions

Examples  

might return .

TRIGger:DELay:EDGE? (Query Only)

Returns the coupling, slope, and source for the delayed trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax %&

%  &   

Examples 

might return 

 

 

TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling
Selects the type of coupling for the delayed trigger. This command is equivalent
to selecting Coupling in the Delayed Trig menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax %&

" # ' 
(not on the TDS 684A & 7XXA) ( 

(  ! (not on the TDS 684A & 7XXA) (  ! (not on the TDS 684A &
7XXA) ( % % (TDS 684A & 7XXA only) ( %! )
%&
" #

%  &   
" #


 !

$  !

% %

%!

2–222 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Arguments  selects AC trigger coupling (not on TDS 684A & 7XXA).

 selects DC trigger coupling.

 coupling removes the high frequency components of the DC signal
(not on the TDS 684A & 7XXA).

 coupling removes the low frequency components of the AC signal
(not on the TDS 684A & 7XXA).
   coupling sets the delayed trigger coupling to match the setting on
the main trigger (TDS 684A & 7XXA only).
   selects DC low sensitivity.

Examples        

sets the delay trigger to DC coupling.
      
might return 
  for the delayed trigger coupling.

TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe
Selects either a rising or falling edge for the delayed trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Slope in the Delayed Trig menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax    !   "   #

 $
   !  

    !    

 




Arguments
 specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
  specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–223

Command Descriptions

Examples  





might return  
, indicating that the delayed trigger occurs on the rising edge.

TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce
Selects the source for the delayed trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting Source in the Delayed Trig menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax   
"

  #  " (not available on TDS 520A &
524A) $ ! %
  
"

 

  
" 

  

 "

 !

Arguments  " specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input
connector that is located on the rear panel of the instrument. The TDS 520A &
524A do not have an Auxiliary Trigger input and so do not support this
argument.
! specifies one of the input channels.

Examples  





selects channel 1 as the input source for the delayed trigger.

TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS? (Query Only)

Returns the current delayed trigger event parameter.

Group Trigger

Syntax   
"



2–224 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger : DELay : EVENTS ?

Examples TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS?
might return :TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT 2

TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt
Sets or queries the number of events that must occur before the delayed trigger
occurs when TRIGger:DELay:BY is set to EVENTS. This is equivalent to
setting the Delay by Events count in the Delayed Edge Delay side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt <NR1>

TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt?

<Space> <NR1>
TRIGger : DELay : EVENTS : COUNt
?

Arguments <NR1> is the number of delayed edge trigger events. The TDS 4XXA range is 1
to (10E7 –1). The TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, and 7XXA range is 2 to 10E7.

Examples TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT 4
specifies that the delayed trigger will occur four trigger events after the main
trigger.
TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT?
might return 2, indicating that 2 events must occur after the main trigger before
the delayed trigger can occur.

TRIGger:DELay:LEVel
Selects the level of the delayed trigger. This command is equivalent to setting
LEVel in the Delayed Trig menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:DELay:LEVel { ECL | TTL | <NR3> }

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–225

Command Descriptions

 

 


     


Arguments 
 specifies a preset ECL level of –1.3 V.
 specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
 is the delayed trigger level, in volts.

Examples    

sets the delayed trigger level to 2 mV.

TRIGger:DELay:TIMe
Sets or queries the delay time when HORizontal:DELay:MODe is set to
TRIGAfter. This command is identical to the HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIG-
After command, and is equivalent to setting the Delay by Time value in the
Delayed Edge Delay side menu.
When HORizontal:DELay:MODe is set to RUNSAfter, the delay time is set by
the HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter command.

Group Trigger

Related Commands HORizontal:DELay:MODe, HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter, HORizon-

tal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter

Syntax   

 

 
     


Arguments  is the delay time, in seconds.

2–226 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples  
   
sets the delay time to 4 ms.

TRIGger:DELay:TYPe
Sets or queries the type of delayed trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax  
 

 


 

  
  


Arguments 
 is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through a
specified voltage level in a specified direction. Use the TRIGger:DELay:LEVel
and TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe commands to set the voltage level and
direction respectively.

Examples  
 
always returns 
 as the type of delayed trigger.

TRIGger:MAIn
Sets the main trigger level and returns the current main trigger parameters.

Group Trigger

Syntax    

  

 
    


TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–227

Command Descriptions

Arguments   sets the main trigger level to half way between the MIN and MAX
amplitudes of the trigger source input. This is equivalent to pressing the
front-panel SET LEVel TO 50% button.

Examples        
sets the main trigger level mid way between MAX and MIN.

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE? (Query Only)

Returns the trigger coupling, source, and slope for the main edge trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax     

       

Examples      
might return      

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling
Sets or queries the type of coupling for the main edge trigger. This is equivalent
to setting Coupling in the Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax       !  ! 

 ! 
 !    "
    

2–228 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

         



 





  

Arguments  selects AC trigger coupling.

 selects DC trigger coupling.

 coupling removes the high frequency components of the DC signal.

 coupling removes the low frequency components of the AC signal.
   selects DC low sensitivity. It requires added signal amplitude for more
stable, less false triggering.

Examples        

sets the main edge trigger coupling to DC.

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe
Selects a rising or falling slope for the main edge trigger. This is equivalent to
setting Slope in the Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax       !

 "   #
     

        



 

Arguments
 specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
  specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–229

Command Descriptions

Examples  
 


 

sets the main edge trigger to occur on the rising slope.

TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce
Sets or queries the source for the main edge trigger. This is equivalent to setting
Source in the Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax    

  #  " (not available on TDS 520A &
TDS 524A) $ ! $  
%
   

 

     

  

 "

  !

 

Arguments ! specifies one of the input channels.

 
specifies AC line voltage.

Examples  
 


 

specifies the AC line voltage as the main edge trigger source.

 
 



might return  for the main edge trigger source.

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff? (Query Only)

For TDS 684A and 7XXA, returns the main trigger holdoff default (TIMe or
DEFAult) and main trigger holdoff time. For other TDS (4XXA, 5XXA, 620A,
640A, 644A) returns the main trigger holdoff value.

Group Trigger

2–230 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff?

TRIGger : MAIn : HOLdoff ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF?
for the TDS 684A and 7XXA, might return
:TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:TIME 250.0E-9;BY DEFAULT
or, for other TDS 4XXA, 5XXA, and 6XXA, might return
:TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE 0.

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff:ACTUal? (Query Only)

TDS 684A and 7XXA Only
Returns the main trigger holdoff value in seconds. This is equivalent to selecting
Mode & Holdoff from the main Trigger menu and viewing the value in the side
menu Holdoff Default or Holdoff Time items (whichever is highlighted).

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff:ACTUal?

TRIGger : MAIn : HOLdoff : ACTUal ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:ACTUAL?
might return 4E–6 showing the holdoff time is set to 4 ms.

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff:BY
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the main trigger holdoff default. This is equivalent to selecting
Mode & Holdoff from the main Trigger menu, then setting Default Holdoff or
Holdoff (Time) in the resulting side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff:BY { TIMe | DEFAult }

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–231

Command Descriptions

! 

!      

 

#"




Arguments  enables the user to set the holdoff time.

#" automatically calculates a holdoff time to use. This time is typically
equivalent to the greater of ½ screen (5 divisions) of time or 250 ns. The
maximum value is 12 seconds. For example, if the oscilloscope is set to
1 msec/division then the default holdoff will be 1 msec/division × 25 divs =
25 msec.

Examples 
   

set the holdoff to the by time setting. This enables the user to set the holdoff
time.

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff:TIMe
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the main trigger holdoff time. This is equivalent to setting
Holdoff Time in the Mode & Holdoff side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax !  

! 

!     

  
 


Arguments  holdoff time in seconds. The range is 250 ns to 12.0 seconds.

2–232 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples    

sets the holdoff time to be 10 seconds.

TRIGger:MAIn:HOLdoff:VALue
Not in TDS 684A & 7XXA
Sets or queries the main trigger holdoff value. This is equivalent to setting
Holdoff in the Mode & Holdoff side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax $ !" % 

$ !" %

# 
$   !  "   %


Arguments  is from 0 to 100, and is a percent of the holdoff range.

Examples     

set the holdoff value to be 10% of the holdoff range.

TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel
Sets the main trigger level. This command is equivalent to adjusting the
front-panel TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL knob.

Group Trigger

Syntax $ ! & 

 '  '  (
$ ! 

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–233

Command Descriptions

ECL

<Space> TTL

<NR3>
TRIGger : MAIn : LEVel
?

Arguments ECL specifies a preset ECL level of –1.3 V.

TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the main trigger level, in volts.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL?
might return TTL, indicating that the main edge trigger is set to 1.4 V.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc? (Query Only)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Returns all main logic trigger parameters.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc?

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;
FUNCTION AND;WHEN TRUE;THRESHOLD:CH1 0;CH2 0;CH3 0;
CH4 0;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;
CH3 X;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X;
:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the type of main logic trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting Class in the Trigger menu when the Type is set to Logic.

Group Trigger

2–234 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax  !  "" $ #! % 

  (TDS 684A & 7XXA only)&
 !  ""

 !        ""
#!


 
 

Arguments #! means that the instrument triggers when the specified logical combina-
tions of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met.
 means that the instrument triggers when the specified conditions of
channels 1, 2, and 3 are met after the channel 4 condition is met.
  means the oscilloscope will trigger on the setup and hold violations
between a data source and a clock source (TDS 684A & 7XXA only).

Examples     

might return  .

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the logical combination of the input channels for the main logic
trigger.
When TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is PATtern, this command applies to
channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. When TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is STATE, only
channels 1, 2, and 3 are logically combined. This command is equivalent to
selecting the function in the Logic Pattern Function side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax  !  

# $  %  %  %  &
 !  
#

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–235

Command Descriptions




$ 


 %  
"    &!#"

Arguments
 specifies that the instrument will trigger if all the conditions are true.

 specifies that the instrument will trigger if any of the conditions are false.
 specifies that the instrument will trigger if all of the conditions are false.
 specifies that the instrument will trigger if any of the conditions are true.

Examples  

 
sets the logical combination of channels to be true when none of the conditions
are true.
 

might return 
.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut? (Query Only)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Returns the main logic trigger input for all channels.

Group Trigger

Syntax  %

"'&

 %  
"    '&

Examples  


might return  
   

2–236 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the main logic trigger input for the specified channel. The
channel is specified by <x> and is 1, 2, or 3. This is equivalent to setting the
inputs in the Logic Pattern Inputs side menu.

Group Trigger

Related Commands TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> { HIGH | LOW | X }

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc : HIGH

<Space> LOW

X
INPut : CH <x>
?

Arguments HIGH specifies logic high.

LOW specifies logic low.
X specifies a do not care state.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2 LOW

sets the main logic trigger input to logic low for channel 2.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the main logic trigger input for channel 4. These are the inputs
used when TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is set to PATtern. This is equivalent to
setting the channel 4 input in the Logic Pattern Inputs side menu.

Group Trigger

Related Commands TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–237

Command Descriptions

Syntax     !  "! #   $  $  %

    !  "!

        
 

 


!   "!  


Arguments   specifies logic high.

 specifies logic low.
 specifies a do not care state.

Examples        

sets the main logic trigger input to logic low for channel 4 when the logic class is
set to ! .
      
might return , indicating that the logic input for channel 4 is do not care.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries a condition for generating a main logic pattern trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax     !   #  $

 $   $
  %
      !   

2–238 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc : PATtern

TRUe

FALSe

<Space> LESSThan

MOREThan
: WHEn
?

Arguments TRUe specifies the trigger to occur when the pattern becomes true.
FALSe specifies the trigger to occur when the pattern becomes false.
LESSThan specifies trigger to occur if the specific pattern is true less than the
LESSLimit. (see Figure 2–5 and TRIGger:MAIn:LOGic:PATĆ
tern:WHEn:LESSLimit) Trigger is evaluated at the true-false transition.
MOREThan specifies trigger to occur if the specific pattern is true longer than the
more limit. (see Figure 2–5 and TRIGger:MAIn:LOGic:PATtern:WHEn:MORELiĆ
mit) Trigger is evaluated at the true-false transition.

to MORELimit LESSLimit

Specified Pattern
Result

Figure 2–5: LESSThan and MOREThan Arguments

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the maximum time the selected pattern may be true and still
generate a main logic pattern trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn: LOGIc: PATtern: WHEn: LESSLimit?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–239

Command Descriptions

$  !    %$!

# 
 
!  
 %


Arguments  time to hold pattern true.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the minimum time the selected pattern may be true and still
generate a main logic pattern trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax $!%$!

!
 % 
$!  %$! 
! 
 %

$  !    %$!

# 
 
!  
 %


Arguments  time to hold pattern true.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
TDS 684A & 7XXA only
Sets or queries the clock edge polarity for setup and hold violation triggering.
This is equivalent to selecting Define Clock from the main Trigger menu and
Polarity in the resulting side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax $!

 "

&  '  (
$!
 "



2–240 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc :

FALL
<Space>
RISe
SETHold : CLOCk : EDGE
?

Arguments FALL specifies falling edge.

RISe specifies rising edge.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE

specifies the polarity as the rising edge.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel
TDS 684A & 7XXA only
Sets or queries the main logic setup/hold clock voltage trigger level. This is
equivalent to selecting Levels from the main Trigger menu and Clock Level in
the resulting side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel { ECL | TTL | <NR3> }

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel?

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc : ECL

<Space> TTL

<NR3>
SETHold : CLOCk : LEVel
?

Arguments ECL specifies a preset ECL level of –1.3 V.

TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the main trigger level, in volts.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:LEVEL 1.4

sets the main logic trigger setup/hold clock level to 1.4 volts.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–241

Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the source for the clock for the main logic trigger setup/hold
input. The channel is specified by <x> and is 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to
to selecting Define Clock from the main Trigger menu and CH1, CH2, CH3, or
CH4 in the resulting side menu.

Group Trigger

Related Commands TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss

Syntax $! "   $ %

$! "   $

$  !     " 

# 
   $


Arguments % specifies one of the input channels (CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4).

Examples   

    
selects Channel 2 as the clock source for the main logic trigger setup/hold.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:LEVel
TDS 684A & 7XXA only
Sets or queries the main logic set/hold data level. This is equivalent to to
selecting Levels from the main Trigger menu and Data Level in the resulting
side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax $! " 

 &   '  '  (
$! " 
 

2–242 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc : ECL

<Space> TTL

<NR3>
SETHold : DATa : LEVel
?

Arguments ECL specifies a preset ECL level of –1.3 V.

TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
<NR3> is the main trigger level, in volts.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:LEVEL 1.4

sets the main logic setup/hold data level to 1.4 volts.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the data channel for the main logic trigger set/hold input. The
channel is specified by <x> and is 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to to selecting
Data Source from the main Trigger menu and CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4 in the
resulting side menu.

Group Trigger

Related Commands TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce CH<x>

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc : SETHold

<Space> CH <X>
: DATa : SOUrce
?

Arguments CH<x> specifies one of the input channels (CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4)

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–243

Command Descriptions

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2

selects Channel 2 as the source for the main logic trigger set/hold.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
TDS 684A & 7XXA only
Sets or queries the main logic trigger hold time. This is equivalent to to selecting
Setup/Hold Times from the main Trigger menu and Hold Time in the resulting
side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime?

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc : SETHold : HOLDTime

<Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for hold time
occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the clock edge.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 200 E-12

sets the main logic trigger sethold holdtime to 200 nanoseconds.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
TDS 684A & 7XXA only
Sets or queries the main logic trigger set time. This is equivalent to to selecting
Setup/Hold Times from the main Trigger menu and Setup Time in the resulting
side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime?

2–244 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc : SETHold : SETTime

<Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> specifies the setup time setting in seconds. Positive values occur before
the clock edge. Negative values occur after the clock edge.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 600 E-12

sets the main logic trigger sethold time to 600 nanoseconds.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the main logic trigger input for channel 4. This input is used
when TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is set to STATE. This is equivalent to
setting the channel 4 input in the Logic Pattern Inputs side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4 { FALL | RISe }

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4?

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc :

FALL
<Space>
RISe
STATE : INPut : CH4
?

Arguments FALL specifies falling edge.

RISe specifies rising edge.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE

specifies that the main logic trigger input for channel 4 is the rising edge when
the logic class is set to STATE.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–245

Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the main logic state trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn { TRUe | FALSe }

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn ?

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc : STATE

TRUe
<Space>
FALSe
: WHEn
?

Arguments TRUe specifies the trigger to occur when the condition is met on the fourth
channel and the pattern of the first three channels are at the desired states.
FALSe

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold? (Query Only)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Returns the main logic trigger threshold voltage for all channels.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold?

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc : THReshold ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 0;CH2 0;
CH3 0;CH4 0

2–246 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the main logic trigger threshold voltage for the channel specified
by <x>. This is equivalent to setting the thresholds in the Logic State Threshold
and Logic Pattern Threshold side menus.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>?

TRIGger : MAIn : LOGIc : THReshold :

<Space> <NR3>
CH <x>
?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the threshold voltage.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 .5
sets the main logic trigger threshold for channel 1 to .5 volts.

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Specifies whether the main logic trigger occurs when the specified state goes true
or false when TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is set to PATtern. This is equivalent
to selecting Trigger When in the Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn { FALSe | TRUe }

TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–247

Command Descriptions





          


Examples       

specifies that the main logic trigger when the logic pattern is true.

TRIGger:MAIn:MODe
Sets or queries the main trigger mode. This command is equivalent to selecting
Mode & Holdoff in the Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax       !

  





      


Arguments  generates a trigger if a trigger is not detected within a specific time period.
 waits for a valid trigger event.

Examples     

specifies that a trigger event is automatically generated.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse? (Query Only)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Returns the main pulse trigger parameters.

Group Trigger

2–248 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;
GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0E-9;FILTER ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:
MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW
800.0E-3;:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0E-9;HIGHLIMIT
2.0E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE as the current main pulse trigger
parameters.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the type of pulse to trigger on. This command is equivalent to
selecting Class in the Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss { GLItch | RUNT | WIDth |

SLEWRate (TDS 684A & 7XXA only)}
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss?

GLItch
TRIGger : MAIn : PULse :
RUNT

<Space> WIDth

SLEWRate
CLAss
?

Arguments GLItch triggers when a pulse is found that is of the specified polarity and width.
These are set with the commands TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity and
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth.
RUNT triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not
cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first. The thresholds are
set with the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW and TRIG-
ger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH commands. The crossing can be
either positive or negative as specified by TRIGger:MAIn:PULse: RUNT:PO-
Larity.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–249

Command Descriptions

WIDth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either
inside or outside the limits as specified by TRIGger:MAIn:PULse: WIDth:LOW-
Limit and TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit. The polarity is selected
using the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity command.
SLEwrate triggers when the slew rate of the source violates the specified
conditions (TDS 684A & 7XXA only).

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS WIDTH

specifies a width pulse for the main trigger.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch? (Query Only)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Returns the current main glitch pulse trigger parameters.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : GLItch ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;
GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0E-9;FILTER ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Controls glitch detection. This command is equivalent to selecting Filter in the
Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer { ACCept | REJect }

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer?

2–250 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

ACCept
TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : <Space>
REJect

GLItch : FILTer
?

Arguments ACCept specifies that the digitizing oscilloscope will trigger only on pulses that
are narrower than the specified width when the main trigger type is set to pulse
glitch. The width is specified using TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
command.
REJect specifies that the digitizing oscilloscope will trigger only on pulses that
are wider than the specified width when the main trigger type is set to pulse
glitch. The width is specified using TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
command.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:FILTER?
returns either ACCept or REJect, indicating whether glitches are filtered.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse glitch trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Polarity & Width in the Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity { EITher | NEGAtive |

POSITIVe }
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse :

EITher

<Space> NEGAtive

POSITIVe
GLItch : POLarity
?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY EITHER

specifies that the polarity of the glitch can be either positive or negative.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–251

Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the width for the main pulse glitch trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Polarity & Width in the Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : GLItch : WIDth

<Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the width of the glitch, in seconds.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH 15E-6

sets the width of the glitch to 15 ms.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT? (Query Only)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Returns the current parameters for the main pulse runt trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : RUNT ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHĆ
OLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW 800.0E-3.

2–252 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse runt trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Polarity in the Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity { EITher | NEGAtive | POSITIVe }

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse :

EITher

<Space> NEGAtive

POSITIVe
RUNT : POLarity
?

Arguments NEGAtive indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising
edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low
threshold.
POSITIVe indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling
edge recrosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high
threshold.
EITher indicates either NEGAtive or POSITIVe polarity.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY NEGATIVE

specifies that the polarity of the main pulse runt trigger is negative.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold? (Query Only)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Returns the upper and lower thresholds for the main pulse runt trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–253

Command Descriptions

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : RUNT : THReshold ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW
800.0E-3.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the trigger level switching thresholds for the main pulse runt
trigger. This command is equivalent to setting Set to TTL or Set to ECL in the
Main Pulse Runt Trigger menu’s Thresholds side menu item.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh { TTL | ECL }

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : RUNT : THReshold

TTL
: BOTh <Space>
ECL

Arguments TTL sets the upper threshold to 1.8 V and the lower threshold to 0.8 V.
ECL sets the upper threshold to –1.1 V and the lower threshold to –1.5 V.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:BOTH TTL

sets the threshold of the pulse runt trigger to the nominal TTL voltage levels.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
TDS 5XXA 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the upper limit for the main pulse runt trigger. This command is
equivalent to setting the threshold in the Pulse Runt Threshold side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>

2–254 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : RUNT : THReshold

<Space> <NR3>
HIGH
?

Arguments <NR3> is the threshold, in volts.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 120E-3

sets the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger to 120 mV.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the lower limit for the main pulse runt trigger. This command is
equivalent to setting the threshold in the Pulse Runt Threshold side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : RUNT : THReshold

<Space> <NR3>
LOW
?

Arguments <NR3> is the threshold, in volts.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW 50E-3

sets the lower limit of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–255

Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it uncovers a
runt. This is equivalent to to selecting Trigger When from the main Trigger’s
Pulse, Runt menu and Occurs or Wider Than in the resulting side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax    

 # " $ 
! %
   


"
         

!

  



Arguments " specifies a trigger if a runt of any detectable width occurs.


! specifies a trigger if a runt of greater than the specified width occurs.

Examples  
 

 

sets the runt trigger to occur when the oscilloscope detects a runt in a pulse wider
than the specified width.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the minimum width for a valid main pulse runt trigger. This
command is equivalent to entering a value in the Trigger menu’s Wider Than
side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax     ! 

    !

2–256 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : RUNT :

<Space> <NR3>
WIDth
?

Arguments <NR3> is the minimum width in seconds.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH 15E-6

sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger to 15 ms.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:DELTATime
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the delta time used in calculating the slew rate trigger. This is
equivalent to to selecting Trigger When from the main Trigger’s Slew Rate
menu and Delta Time in the resulting side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:DELTATime <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:DELTATime?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : SLEWRate :

<Space> <NR3>
DELTATime
?

Arguments <NR3> is the delta time in seconds.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:DELTATIME 15E-6

sets the slew rate trigger’s delta time to 15 ms.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–257

Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:POLarity
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse slew rate trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Polarity in the Trigger menu with Type set to SlewRate.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:POLarity { EITher | NEGAtive |

POSITIVe }
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:POLarity?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse :

EITher

<Space> NEGAtive

POSITIVe
SLEwrate : POLarity
?

Arguments NEGAtive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most
positive) to lower (most negative) level for slew rate triggering to occur.
POSITIVe indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most
negative) to higher (most positive) level for slew rate triggering to occur.
EITher indicates either NEGAtive or POSITIVe polarity.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEwrate:POLARITY EITHER

specifies that the polarity of the slew rate can be either positive or negative.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:SLEwrate? (Query Only)

TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Returns the slew rate value. This is the
((Upper Threshold – Lower Threshold) / Delta Time)
The value is limited to the three most significant digits.

Group Trigger

2–258 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:SLEwrate?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : SLEwrate : SLEwrate ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:SLEWRATE?
Returns the slew rate. It is given as an appropriate amount of volts per second.
For example, 1.2E+6 would represent a slew rate of 1.2 megavolts/second.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:THReshold:BOTh
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets the upper and lower slew rate trigger thresholds. This is equivalent to to
selecting Thresholds from the main Trigger’s Slew Rate menu and entering a
value in the resulting side menu’s High Threshold or Low Threshold items.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:THReshold:BOTh { TTL | ECL }

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : SLEwrate : THReshold

TTL
BOTh
ECL

Arguments TTL sets the upper threshold to 1.8 V and the lower threshold to 0.8 V.
ECL sets the upper threshold to –1.1 V and the lower threshold to –1.5 V.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEwrate:THRESHOLD:BOTH TTL

sets the trigger runt threshold to TTL.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:THReshold:HIGH
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the upper (most positive) limit of the two threshold levels that a
pulse edge must traverse for the slew rate trigger to occur. This command is
equivalent to setting the higher threshold in the Pulse Slew Rate Trigger’s
Thresholds side menu item.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–259

Command Descriptions

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:THReshold:HIGH?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : SLEwrate : THReshold

<Space> <NR3>
HIGH
?

Arguments <NR3> is the threshold, in volts.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESHOLD:HIGH 120E-3

sets the upper limit of the pulse slew rate trigger to 120 mV.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:THReshold:LOW
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the lower (most negative) limit of the two threshold levels that a
pulse edge must traverse for the slew rate trigger to occur. This command is
equivalent to setting the lower threshold in the Pulse Slew Rate Trigger’s
Thresholds side menu item.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:THReshold:LOW <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:THReshold:LOW?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : SLEwrate : THReshold

<Space> <NR3>
LOW
?

Arguments <NR3> is the threshold, in volts.

2–260 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESHOLD:LOW 50E-3

sets the lower limit of the pulse slew rate trigger to 50 mV.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:WHEn
TDS 684A & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries whether to check for a slewing signal that is faster or slower than
the specified delta time. This is equivalent to to selecting Trigger When from
the main Trigger’s Slew Rate menu and entering a value in the resulting side
menu’s Trig if Less Than or Trig if Greater Than items.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:WHEN { FASTERthan | SLOWERthan }

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEwrate:WHEN?

FASTERthan
TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : <Space>
SLOWERthan

SLEwrate : WHEN
?

Arguments FASTERthan sets the trigger to occur when the slew is faster than the set
volts/second rate.
SLOWERthan sets the trigger to occur when the slew is slower than the set
volts/second rate.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:WHEN FASTERTHAN

sets the slew rate trigger to work when the slew is faster than the set volts/second
rate.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the source for the main pulse trigger. This is equivalent to
selecting the source in the Pulse Runt Source side menu.

Group Trigger

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–261

Command Descriptions

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce CH<x>

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : SOUrce

<Space> CH <X>

Arguments CH<x> specifies one of the input channels.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH2

selects Channel 2 as the source for the main pulse trigger.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth? (Query Only)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Returns the width parameters for the main pulse width trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : WIDth ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH?
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0E-9;HIGHLIMIT
2.0E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE as the current main pulse trigger
parameters.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the upper limit for the main pulse width trigger. This is equiva-
lent to setting the Upper Limit in the Pulse Width Trig When side menu.

Group Trigger

2–262 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : WIDth :

<Space> <NR3>
HIGHLimit
?

Arguments <NR3> is the upper limit, in seconds.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the lower limit for the main pulse width trigger. This is equiva-
lent to setting the Lower Limit in the Pulse Width Trig When side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : WIDth :

<Space> <NR3>
LOWLimit
?

Arguments <NR3> is the lower limit, in seconds.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse width trigger. This is equivalent to
selecting the polarity in the Pulse Width Polarity side menu.

Group Trigger

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–263

Command Descriptions

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity { NEGAtive | POSITIVe }

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : WIDth : POLarity

NEGAtive
<Space>
POSITIVe

Arguments NEGAtive specifies a negative pulse.

POSITIVe specifies a positive pulse.

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Only
Selects the condition when the trigger occurs. This is equivalent to selecting the
condition in the Pulse Width Trig When side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn { OUTside | WIThin }

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn?

TRIGger : MAIn : PULse : WIDth :

OUTside
<Space>
WIThin

WHEn
?

Arguments OUTside specifies a trigger when the duration of the pulse is greater than the
high limit or less than the low limit specified. The high and low limits are
specified with the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit commands respectively.
WIThin specifies a trigger when the duration of the pulse is within the high and
low limits. The high and low limits are specified with the

2–264 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit commands respectively.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN?
returns either OUTSIDE or WITHIN, indicating the conditions for generating a
pulse trigger.

TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe
Sets or queries the type of main trigger. This is equivalent to setting Type in the
Trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe { EDGE | LOGIc | PULse | VIDeo }

(Note: only the TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA use the LOGIc and PULse
arguments. Only digitizing oscilloscopes with option 5 use the VIDeo argument.)
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe?

EDGE

LOGIc

<Space> PULse

VIDeo
TRIGger : MAIn : TYPe
?

Arguments EDGE is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through a
specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the TRIG-
ger:MAIn:EDGE commands.
LOGIc (TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA only) specifies that a trigger occurs when
specified conditions are met and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc
commands.
PULse (TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA only) specifies that a trigger occurs when
a specified pulse is found and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse
commands.
VIDeo (option 05 only) specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified signal is
found and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo commands.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–265

Command Descriptions

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE?
might return PULSE indicating that the main trigger type is a pulse trigger.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo? (Query Only)

Option 5 Only
Returns the main video trigger parameters.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?

TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO?
might return: NTS;CH1;NEGA;NUMER;2;1;COLO;COLO;787;
59.94E+0;1050;2;890.0E-9;3.56E-6;15.00E-6;11.56E-6;
15.89E-6 as the current main video trigger parameters.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY
TDS 4XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger delay mode. This is equivalent to using the
Video TV Delay Mode side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY { TIMe | LINES | LINE }

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY?

TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : BY

TIMe

<Space> LINES

LINE

2–266 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Arguments TIMe specifies a delay by time.

LINES specifies a delay by a number of video lines. For the TDS 4XXA, this
argument is available only for backward compatibility. If the TDS 4XXA
receives this argument, it will convert it to LINE. The TDS 4XXA will not
output this argument in response to a query.
LINE specifies a delay by a number of video lines.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:BY TIME

specifies a delay by time.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD
TDS 4XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the field the video trigger acts on. This is equivalent to using the
Video Scan side menu when Class is NOT set to Custom.

Group Trigger

Syntax    

 !$ "

 "  " 
  " 
  "


 $#
   
 




         
 

 

 
 



 

Arguments ODD specifies interlaced video field 1.

EVEN specifies interlaced video field 2.
ALL specifies alternating both video field 1 and video field 2.
FIELD1 specifies interlaced video field 1. For the TDS 4XXA, this argument is
available only for backward compatibility. If the TDS 4XXA receives this

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–267

Command Descriptions

argument, it will convert it to ODD. The TDS 4XXA will not output this
argument in response to a query.
FIELD2 specifies interlaced video field 2. For the TDS 4XXA, this argument is
available only for backward compatibility. If the TDS 4XXA receives this
argument, it will convert it to EVEN. The TDS 4XXA will not output this
argument in response to a query.
FIELDEither specifies alternating both video field 1 and video field 2. For the
TDS 4XXA, this argument is available only for backward compatibility. If the
TDS 4XXA receives this argument, it will convert it to ALL. The TDS 4XXA
will not output this argument in response to a query.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCAN ODD

selects odd fields.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the field the video trigger acts on. This is equivalent to pressing
Field in the video main menu, then Field in the side menu, and entering a value
with the keypad or general purpose knob.

Group Trigger

Syntax    

 
   
 

 
         



Arguments  specifies the video (color) field. For example,  specifies interlaced video
field one and  specifies interlaced video field two.
PAL signals have 1 to 8 fields, HDTV signals have 1 or 2, and FlexFormat
supports 1 or 2.

Examples  
 

 
selects field 1.

2–268 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the field the video trigger acts on. This is equivalent to pressing
Field in the video main menu and then Field, Odd, Even or All in the side
menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType {ĂNUMERic | ALL | EVEN | ODDĂ}

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType?

NUMERic
TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo :
ALL

<Space> EVEN

ODD
FIELDType
?

Arguments NUMERic specifies a selected line in the selected field. If you send this
command when the mode is MONO or SECAM, the digitizing oscilloscope will
generate an SRQ.
ALL specifies a selected line in all fields.
EVEN specifies a selected line in even fields.
ODD specifies a selected line in odd fields.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELDTYPE ALL

selects a selected line in all fields.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat? (Query Only)

TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Returns the main flexible-format video trigger parameters.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat?

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–269

Command Descriptions

TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : FLEXformat ?

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT?
might return: 59.94E+0;1050;2;890.0E-9;3.56E-6;15.00E-6;11.56E-6;
15.89E-6 as the flexible-format video trigger parameters.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDRATE
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the flexible-format video frames per second (e.g. 59.94 frames
per second for 1050 and 50 for 1250). This is equivalent to selecting Setup from
the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), Field Rate from the side
menu, and entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDRATE <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDRATE?

TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : FLEXformat :

<Space> <NR3>
FIELDRATE
?

Arguments <NR3> the field rate.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:FIELDRATE?
returns the specified field rate.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDS
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the flexible-format video fields. This is equivalent to pressing
Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), Fields from
the side menu, and entering the value with the keypad or the general purpose
knob.

2–270 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Group Trigger

Syntax     

 !
  
    
 !
 

         
 ! 

 

 


Arguments  the number of fields in the standard.

Examples  
 

 !
 
returns the number of fields in the format.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:LINES
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the flexible-format video lines in a frame. This is equivalent to
pressing Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard),
Lines from the side menu, and entering the value with the keypad or the general
purpose knob.

Group Trigger

Syntax     

 ! 
 
    
 ! 


         
 ! 

 
 



Arguments  the frame lines.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–271

Command Descriptions

Examples 




returns the specified number of lines.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:NEGSyncwidth
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the flexible-format negative sync width. The HDTV horizontal
sync is a tri-level sync. The first of the two consecutive sync pulses used is
negative and the second is positive. The positive sync pulse starts on the rising
edge of the negative sync. The two pulses have the same width such that
specifying the negative pulse is only required. Setting the width is equivalent to
pressing Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard),
Sync Width from the side menu, and entering the value with the keypad or the
general purpose knob.

Group Trigger

Syntax &# $

$&"'
)#(!' 
&# $
$&"'
)#(!' 

&  #   $  

$&"' 

% 

)#(!'


Arguments  the negative sync width.

Examples 



  
returns the specified flexible-format negative sync width.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STArttime
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the time from the positive edge of the tri-sync pulse for the last
line in the selected field (t0) to the leading edge (negative) of the first negative
vertical sync pulse. This is equivalent to selecting Setup from the video main
menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), pressing the V1 Start Time in the side
menu, and entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.

2–272 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Group Trigger

Syntax  !  

!"!"" 
 !  
!"!""

 !        
!" 

  
!""


Arguments  the v1 starttime.

Examples  
 

 

returns the specified HDTV v1starttime.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STOptime
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the time from t0 to the trailing edge (positive) of the first negative
vertical sync pulse. This is equivalent selecting Setup from the video main menu
(with FlexFmt as the Standard), pressing the V1 Stop Time in the side menu,
and entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.

Group Trigger

Syntax  !  

!" " 
 !  
!" "

 !        
!" 

  
 "


Arguments  the v1 stoptime.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–273

Command Descriptions

Examples   

 
returns the specified v1stoptime.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STArttime
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the time from the positive edge of the tri-sync pulse for the last
line in the selected field (t0) to the leading edge (positive) of the second vertical
sync pulse. Note: the second pulse may be a negative pulse or the negative
portion of a tri-sync pulse that is within the last line (usually located at the ½
line point). This is equivalent to selecting Setup from the video main menu
(with FlexFmt as the Standard), pressing the V2 Start Time in the side menu,
and entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.

Group Trigger

Syntax  #  

!!#$ #$$ 
 #  
!!#$ #$$

 #     
!  !#$ 

" 
 #$$


Arguments  the v2 starttime.

Examples   

  
returns the specified v2 starttime.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the time from t0 to the trailing edge (positive) of the second
negative vertical sync pulse. This is equivalent selecting Setup from the video
main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), pressing the V2 Stop Time in the
side menu, and entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.

2–274 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime?

TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : FLEXformat :

<Space> <NR3>
V2STOptime
?

Arguments <NR3> the v2 stoptime.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V2STOPTIME?
returns the specified v2 stoptime.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the high definition TV frame rate. This is equivalent to toggling
HDTV from the Video main-menu Standard pop-up, pressing Format, and then
selecting a frame rate from the side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv <NR1>

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv?

<Space> <NR1>
TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : HDTv
?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the frame rate. More precisely, 787 selects a 787/59.94/2:1
format. 1050 selects a 1050/59.94/2:1 format. 1125 selects a 1125/60/2:1 format.
1250 selects a 1250/50/2:1 format.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–275

Command Descriptions

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HDTV 787

specifies 787/59.94/2:1 format.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff? (Query Only)

TDS 4XXA Option 5 Only
Returns the video trigger holdoff value.

Group Trigger

Syntax !  

!        

Examples 

  
might return 

  
.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue
TDS 4XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger holdoff value. This is equivalent to setting
Holdoff in the Mode & Holdoff side menu of the video trigger menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax !  " 

!  "

!        

  
"


Arguments  is from 0 to 100, and is a percent of the holdoff range.

2–276 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples   

  
set the holdoff value to be 10% of the holdoff range.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:INTERLAce
TDS 4XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger interlace format. This is equivalent to setting
Interlace in the Scan Rate and Interlace main menu of the video trigger menu
when Class is set to Custom.

Group Trigger

Syntax  " 

   $ 
 % 
 % 
#" %
 &
 " 
  

 "     
 






! 
#"


 


TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE
Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger in terms of a number of lines. This is equivalent
to pressing the Line (TV Delay Mode in the TDS 4XXA) item in the video
main menu, pressing Line in the side menu (if needed), and entering a value
with the keypad or the general purpose knob. The minimum line number is the
starting line in the field. For PAL, field 1 (odd fields in the TDS 4XXA) has line
2 (1 in the TDS 4XXA) as the minimum, and field 2 (even fields in the TDS
4XXA) has line 315 (314 in the TDS 4XXA).

Group Trigger

Syntax  " 

  
 " 
 

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–277

Command Descriptions

 
      
   


Arguments  specifies a number of lines to delay by.

Examples   

  
selects 5 lines for the desired delay period.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES
TDS 4XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger delay in terms of a number of lines. This is
equivalent to entering data in the Line item in the Video TV Delay Mode side
menu. This command is available for backwards compatibility.

Group Trigger

Syntax   

  
  
 

 
      
   


Arguments <nr3> specifies a number of lines to delay by.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINES 5
selects 5 lines for the desired delay period.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the NTSC mode selection. This is equivalent to choosing
525/NTSC in the video main-menu pop-up, Mode in the main menu, and a side
menu item (NTSC or Mono).

Group Trigger

2–278 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc { MONo | COLOr }

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc?

TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : NTSc

MONo
<Space>
COLOr

Arguments MONo specifies mode for noncolor signals.

COLOr specifies mode for color field triggering and enables numeric triggering.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:NTSC MONO

specifies numeric fields are invalid.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the PAL video trigger mode selection. This is equivalent to
toggling 625/PAL in the video main-menu pop-up, Mode in the main menu, and
a side menu item (PAL, Mono, or SECAM).

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL { MONo | COLOr | SECAm }

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL?

TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : PAL MONo

COLOr
<Space>
SECAm

Arguments MONo specifies mode for non-color signals.

COLOr specifies mode for color field triggering and enables numeric triggering.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–279

Command Descriptions

SECAm specifies mode for SECAM signals.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:PAL MONO

specifies non-color PAL signals.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN
TDS 4XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger scan parameters. This is equivalent to using the
Video Scan Parameters side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN { RATE1 | RATE2 | RATE3 | RATE4 }

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN?

RATE1
TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : SCAN
RATE2

<Space> RATE3

RATE4

Arguments RATE1 specifies a 15 to 20 kHz video line rate.

RATE2 specifies a 20 to 25 kHz video line rate.
RATE3 specifies a 25 to 35 kHz video line rate.
RATE4 specifies a 35 to 64 kHz video line rate.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCAN RATE1

selects rate 1.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod
TDS 4XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger scan period.

2–280 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod?

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce
Option 05 Only
Sets or queries the source for the main video trigger. This is equivalent to
selecting the Source in the video main menu and a desired channel from the side
menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce CH<x>

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce?

TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : SOUrce

<Space> CH <x>

Arguments CH<x> specifies one of the input channels (CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4; or CH1,
CH2, AUX1, or AUX2 on the TDS 520A, 524A, & 620A).

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1

selects channel 1 as the source for the main video trigger.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard
TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger standard. This is equivalent to selecting the
standard in the video Standard pop-up (525/NTSC, 625/PAL, HDTV, or
FlexFmt).

Group Trigger

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–281

Command Descriptions

Syntax  $ ! "$ '  (  ( & (

 "$ %)
 $ ! "$


 $   !   " 


# &

 "$ %
$


Arguments  specifies the NTSC 525/59.94/2:1 standard.

 specifies the PAL 625/59.94/2:1 standard.
& allows selection of the following HDTV formats: 787/59.94/1:1,
1050/59.94/2:1, 1050/59.94/2:1, 1125/60/2:1, 1250/50/2:1.

 "$ % allows the user to specify the video parameters. The default table is
1050/59.94/2:1.

Examples       

selects the NTSC video format.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc
Option 05 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger sync polarity. This is equivalent to selecting
Sync Polarity from the video main menu and a side-menu item (Neg Sync or
Pos Sync).

Group Trigger

Syntax  $ ! " '    (  %& )

 $ ! "

2–282 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : SYNc

POSITIVe
<Space>
NEGAtive

Arguments POSITIVe specifies a positive going voltage.

NEGAtive specifies a negative going voltage.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYNC POSITIVE

selects a positive going voltage for the desired synchronization pulse.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem
TDS 4XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger class. This is equivalent to selecting the class in
the Video Class side menu of the Video menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem { NTSc | PAL | SECAM | CUSTom }

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem?

NTSc
TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : SYStem
PAL

<Space> SECAM

CUSTom

Arguments NTSc selects a condition that adheres to the National Television System
Committee standards. Specifically, it assumes a line rate of 525 lines per frame
and a frame rate of 30 Hz.
PAL selects a condition that adheres to the Phase Alternate Line standard.
Specifically, it assumes a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a frame rate of
25 Hz.
SECAM selects a condition that adheres to the SECAM standard.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–283

Command Descriptions

CUSTom selects a condition that adheres to the frequency range of the video
signal as you have defined them from the available ranges.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:SYSTEM NTSC

selects triggering to occur on an NTSC compatible signal.

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe
TDS 4XXA Option 5 Only
Sets or queries the video trigger delay time. This is equivalent to entering the
time in the Delay by Time item of the Video TV Delay Mode side menu.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe <NR3>

TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe?

<Space> <NR3>
TRIGger : MAIn : VIDeo : TIMe
?

Arguments <NR3> specifies a delay time.

Examples TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:TIME 5E–6

selects 5 ms for the desired delay time.

TRIGger:STATE? (Query Only)

Returns the current state of the triggering system.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:STATE?

TRIGger : STATE ?

2–284 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Returns ARMed indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information. All
triggers are ignored when TRIGger:STATE is ARMING.
AUTO indicates that the digitizing oscilloscope is in auto mode and acquires data
even in the absence of a trigger.
FASTframe (TDS 5XXA and 7XXA only) indicates that the instrument is in
FastFrame mode. This means normal trigger status monitoring is turned off. The
digitizing oscilloscope will not return armed, partial, ready, trigger, or auto while
in this state.
INStavu (TDS 7XXA only) indicates that the instrument is in InstaVu mode.
PARTial indicates that the main trigger has occurred and the digitizing oscillo-
scope is waiting for trigger(s) for the delay by events.
REAdy indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and the
digitizing oscilloscope is ready to accept a trigger.
SAVe indicates that the digitizing oscilloscope is in save mode and is not
acquiring data.
TRIGger indicates that the digitizing oscilloscope has seen a trigger and is
acquiring the posttrigger information.

Examples TRIGGER:STATE?
might return ARMED, indicating that pretrigger data is being acquired.

*TRG (No Query Form)

(Trigger) executes commands that are defined by *DDT.
The Group Execute Trigger (GET) interface message has the same effect as the
*TRG command.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands Alias commands, *DDT

Syntax *TRG

*TRG

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–285

Command Descriptions

Examples  
immediately executes all commands that have been defined by *DDT.

*TST? (Query Only)

(Self-Test) Tests the GPIB interface and returns a 0.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax   

  

Returns 
 and is always 0.

UNLock (No Query Form)

Unlocks the front panel. This command is equivalent to LOCk NONe.

NOTE. If the digitizing oscilloscope is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS),
the UNLOCk command has no effect. For more information see the ANSI-IEEE
Std. 488.1-1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation,
section 2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands LOCk

Syntax 
 


  

Arguments  specifies all front-panel buttons and knobs.

2–286 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

VERBose
Sets and queries the Verbose State that controls the length of keywords on query
responses. Keywords can be both headers and arguments. This command does
not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands (those starting with an
asterisk).

Group Miscellaneous

Related Commands HEADer, *LRN?, SET?

Syntax  
 
   






 



Arguments
or    0 sets the Verbose State true, which returns full-length keywords
for applicable setting queries.

 or   = 0 sets the Verbose State false, which returns minimum-length
keywords for applicable setting queries.

Examples 


sets the Verbose State true.


might return the value , showing that the Verbose State is true.

*WAI (No Query Form)

(Wait) Prevents the digitizing oscilloscope from executing further commands or
queries until all pending operations finish. This command allows you to
synchronize the operation of the digitizing oscilloscope with your application
program. Synchronization methods are described on page 3–7.

Group Status and Error

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–287

Command Descriptions

Related Commands BUSY?, *OPC

Syntax 



WAVFrm? (Query Only)

Returns WFMPre? and CURVe? data for the waveform or waveforms as
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. This command is equivalent to
sending WFMPre?; CURVe?
TDS 4XXA: when the TDS 4XXA is in external clock mode, the time-per-div
field will contain  .

Group Waveform

Related Commands CURVe?, DATa:SOUrce, WFMPre?

Syntax  

  

WFMPre? (Query Only)

Returns the waveform formatting data for the first ordered waveform as specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command. The channel and math waveforms selected by
the  command must be displayed.
TDS 4XXA: when the TDS 4XXA is in external clock mode, the time-per-div
field will contain  .

Group Waveform

Related Commands WAVFrm?

Syntax  

2–288 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

WFMPre ?

Returns The format of the response is:

BYT_Nr <NR1>;BIT_Nr <NR1>;ENCdg { ASC | BIN };
BN_Fmt { RI | RP };BYT_Or { LSB | MSB };
<wfm>:WFID <Qstring>;NR_PT <NR1>;PT_FMT { ENV | Y };
XUNit <QString>;XINcr <NR3>;PT_Off <NR1>;YUNit <QString>;YMUlt
<NR3>; YOFf <NR3>;YZEro<NR3>[;<wfm>:
WFID <Qstring>;NR_PT <NR1>;PT_FMT{ ENV | Y };
XUNit<QString>;XINcr <NR3>;PT_Off <NR1>;YUNit <QString>;
YMUlt <NR3>; YOFf <NR3>;YZEro <NR3>...]

WFMPre:BIT_Nr
Returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the first ordered
waveform as specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The WFMPre:BIT_Nr
command is ignored on input.

Group Waveform

Related Commands DATa:WIDth, WFMPre:BYT_Nr

Syntax WFMPre:BIT_Nr <NR1>

WFMPre:BIT_Nr?

<Space> <NR1>
WFMPre : BIT_Nr
?

Arguments <NR1> is either 8 or 16, and is equivalent to WFMPre:BYT_Nr * 8.

Examples WFMPRE:BIT_NR?
might return 8, indicating that there are 8 bits per waveform point.

WFMPre:BN_Fmt
Sets or queries the format of binary data for the first ordered waveform as
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–289

Command Descriptions

Group Waveform

Related Commands DATa:ENCdg, WFMPre:BYT_Or, WFMPre:ENCdg

Syntax WFMPre:BN_Fmt { RI | RP }
WFMPre:BN_Fmt?

RI
<Space>
RP

WFMPre : BN_Fmt
?

Arguments RI specifies signed integer data-point representation.

RP specifies positive integer data-point representation.

Examples WFMPRE:BN_FMT RP
specifies that the binary waveform data are positive integer data-points.
WFMPRE:BN_FMT?
returns either RI or RP as the current waveform data format.

WFMPre:BYT_Nr
Sets or queries the binary field data width for the first ordered waveform as
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. This command is equivalent to the
DATa:WIDth command.

Group Waveform

Related Commands DATa:WIDth, WFMPre:BIT_Nr

Syntax WFMPre:BYT_Nr <NR1>

WFMPre:BYT_Nr?

2–290 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

<Space> <NR1>
WFMPre : BYT_Nr
?

Arguments <NR1> is the number of bytes per point and can be 1 or 2.

Examples WFMPRE:BYT_NR 2
specifies that there are 2 bytes per waveform data point.

WFMPre:BYT_Or
Selects which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first during a
waveform data transfer when DATa:WIDth (or WFMPre:BYT_Nr) is set to 2.

Group Waveform

Related Commands DATa:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN_Fmt, WFMPre:ENCdg

Syntax WFMPre:BYT_Or { LSB | MSB }

WFMPre:BYT_Or?

LSB
<Space>
MSB

WFMPre : BYT_Or
?

Arguments LSB selects the least significant byte to be transmitted first.

MSB selects the most significant bye to be transmitted first.

Examples WFMPRE:BYT_OR MSB

specifies that the most significant byte in the waveform data will be transferred
first.
WFMPRE:BYT_OR?
returns either MSB or LSB depending on which data byte is transferred first.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–291

Command Descriptions

WFMPre:ENCdg
Sets or queries the type of encoding for waveform data transferred with the
CURVe command.

Group Waveform

Related Commands DATa:ENCdg, WFMPre:BYT_Or, WFMPre:BN_Fmt

Syntax 
 !  "   #





 

 



Arguments  specifies ASCII curve data.

  specifies binary curve data.

Examples 

  
specifies that the waveform data is in ASCII format.


 
might return  , indicating that the waveform data is in binary format.

WFMPre:PT_Fmt (No Query Form)

Selects the point format of the waveform data for the first ordered waveform as
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.

Group Waveform

Syntax  !
 "  #

2–292 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

 
    


Arguments   specifies that the waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum point
pairs. Only y values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given
by:

X n  0
XINcr (n  PT_Off)

Y n max  YZEro
YMUlt (y n max  YOFf)

Y n min  YZEro
YMUlt (y n min  YOFf)

 specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is
transmitted for each point in the waveform record. Only y values are explicitly
transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:

X n  0
XINcr (n  PT_Off)

Y n  YZEro
YMUlt (y n  YOFf)

Examples   

sets the waveform data point format to enveloped.

WFMPre:PT_Off (No Query Form)

Specifies the trigger point within the waveform record for the reference
waveform specified by the DATa:DESTination command.

Group Waveform

Related Commands HORizontal:TRIGger:POsition

Syntax 

  

  
    

Arguments   = 0 to the recordlength, and is the position of the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt.

Examples 
 
specifies that the trigger point is the first point in the waveform record.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–293

Command Descriptions

WFMPre:XINcr (No Query Form)

Specifies the horizontal sampling interval for the reference waveform specified
by the DATa:DESTination command.

Group Waveform

Syntax    

       

Arguments   is the sampling interval in seconds per point.

WFMPre:YMUlt (No Query Form)

Specifies the vertical scale factor for the reference waveform specified by the
DATa:DESTination command.

Group Waveform

Syntax   

      

Arguments   is the vertical scale factor in YUNits (usually volts) per division.

WFMPre:YOFf (No Query Form)

Specifies the offset of the vertical component for the reference waveform
specified by the DATa:DESTination command.

Group Waveform

Syntax 

  

  
    

2–294 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical offset in digitizing levels.

WFMPre:YZEro (No Query Form)

Specifies the offset voltage for the reference waveform specified by the
DATa:DESTination command.

Group Waveform

Syntax WFMPre:YZEro <NR3>

WFMPre : YZEro <Space> <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is of the offset in YUNits (usually volts).

Table 2–32 lists additional WFMPre commands that are included for compatibil-
ity purposes.

NOTE. These commands do not support a query form and all information is
ignored.

Table 2–32: Additional WFMPre Commands

Command Argument Description

WFMPre:CRVchk {CHKsmo|NONe} Binary curve error check
WFMPre:NR_PT <NR1> Number of waveform points
WFMPre:WFId <QString> Waveform identifier
WFMPre:XUNit <QString> Horizontal units
WFMPre:XMUlt <NR3> Horizontal (X-axis) scale factor
WFMPre:XOFf <NR3> Horizontal (X-axis) offset
WFMPre:XZEro <NR3> Horizontal (X-axis) origin offset
WFMPre:YUNit <QString> Vertical units
WFMPre:ZMUlt <NR3> Z-axis scale factor
WFMPre:ZOFf <NR3> Z-axis offset
WFMPre:ZUNit <QString> Z-axis units
WFMPre:ZZEro <NR3> Z-axis origin offset

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–295

Command Descriptions

NOTE. When returning WFMPRE:<wfm> information from the oscilloscope,

<wfm> specifies the waveform source (CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x>). The
source must also be set using the DAta:SOUrce command. When sending
WFMPRE:<wfm> information to the scope, the <wfm> specification is ignored
and the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination is used instead.

WFMPre:<wfm>? (Query Only)

Returns the waveform formatting data for first ordered waveform as specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command. Channel and math waveforms must be displayed
before they can be queried. Querying an invalid reference waveform generates an
execution error.

Group Waveform

Syntax ( +!%

(  +!%

Returns The format of the response is:

+!%
)*(#&"  ,  -  .
#* *(#&" ( !! #* *(#&"$*
! (' 
+!%
)*(#&" 
 ,  -  .#* *(#&" ( 
!! #* *(#&"$* ! 
(' 

WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt
Sets or queries the number of points that are in the transmitted waveform record.
This value is ignored on input.

Related Commands DATa:DESTination

Group Waveform

Syntax ( +!%* 

2–296 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

 

 
     


Arguments  is the number of data points. If DATa:WIDth is 2 then there are twice as
many bytes.
 = 0 means that the waveform record is of an unspecified length.

Examples  
 
might return  as the number of data points in the waveform record trans-
ferred from channel 1.

WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt
Selects the data point format for the first ordered waveform as selected by the
DATa:SOUrce command. On input <wfm> always defaults to the reference
location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.

Group Waveform

Related Commands DATa:DESTination

Syntax  
 !  "
 





     



Arguments
 specifies that the waveform is transmitted as minimum and maximum point
pairs. Only y values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given
by:

X n  0
XINcr (n  PT_Off)

Y n min  YZEro
YMUlt (y n min  YOFf)

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–297

Command Descriptions

Y n max  YZEro
YMUlt (y n max  YOFf)

 specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is
transmitted for each point in the waveform record. Only y values are explicitly
transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:

X n  0
XINcr (n  PT_Off)

Y n  YZEro
YMUlt (y n  YOFf)

Examples  
  
might return
, indicating that the MATH1 waveform data format is enveloped.

WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off
Returns the trigger point within the waveform record. On input <wfm> always
defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of
what is sent.

Group Waveform

Syntax   

 

 
     


Arguments  = 0 to the recordlength, and is the position of the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt when queried.

Examples  
 
returns  indicating the trigger position within the waveform record.

WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId
Returns information about the waveform such as input coupling, volts per
division, time per division, acquisition mode, and record length.
The WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId command is ignored on input.

2–298 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

TDS 4XXA: when the TDS 4XXA is in external clock mode, the time-per-div
field will contain “50 clks/div”.

Group Waveform

Syntax   

 

 
     


Arguments  is the waveform identifier string.

WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr
Sets or queries the horizontal sampling interval. On input <wfm> always
defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of
what is sent.
TDS 4XXA: when the TDS 4XXA is in external clock mode, the time-per-div
field will contain “50 clks/div”.

Group Waveform

Syntax  
 

 


 

     



Arguments 
 is the sampling interval.

WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit
Returns the horizontal (X-axis) units of the waveform data at the time of
creation.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–299

Command Descriptions

The WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit command is ignored on input.

TDS 4XXA: when the TDS 4XXA is in external clock mode, the time-per-div
field will contain “50 clks/div”.

Group Waveform

Syntax #& % %#!

#& %

" %#!
#  &   %


Arguments %#! is “s” for seconds and specifies the units.

Examples 
  
might return $, indicating that the horizontal units for channel 1 are seconds.

WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt
Sets or queries the vertical scale factor, in YUNit per unscaled data point value.
On input <wfm> always defaults to the reference location specified by
DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.

Group Waveform

Syntax #& % 

#& %

" 
#  &   %


Arguments  is the scale factor, in YUNits (usually volts), per digitizing level.

2–300 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf
Sets or queries the vertical position of the waveform. On input <wfm> always
defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of
what is sent.

Group Waveform

Syntax #%  

#% 

" 
#  %   


Arguments  is the position in digitizing levels.

WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit
Returns the vertical (Y-axis) units of the waveform data at the time of creation.
The WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit command is ignored on input.

Group Waveform

Syntax #% $ $#!

#% $

" $#!
#  %   $


Arguments $#! is  for volts or  for volts2, and specifies the units.

Examples 
  
might return , meaning that the units for the vertical component of the
channel 2 waveform data are volts.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–301

Command Descriptions

WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro
Sets or queries the vertical (Y-axis) offset voltage. On input <wfm> always
defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of
what is sent.

Group Waveform

Syntax WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro <NR3>

WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro?

<Space> <NR3>
WFMPre : <wfm> : YZEro
?

Arguments <NR3> is the offset in YUNits (usually volts).

ZOOm
Resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces or live traces. The
ZOOm query returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling
of the display. This command is equivalent to selecting Reset All Factors or
Reset Live Factors in the TDS 7XXA Zoom Reset menu or selecting Reset
Zoom Factors in the Zoom menu of other TDS oscilloscopes.

Group Zoom

Syntax ZOOm { RESET | RESETLive (TDS 4XXA and 7XXA only) }

ZOOm?

RESET
<Space>
RESETLive
ZOOm
?

Arguments RESET resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces.
RESETLive (TDS 4XXA and 7XXA only) resets the zoom transforms to default
values for live traces.

2–302 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples ZOOM?
might return :ZOOM:STATE OFF;HORIZONTAL:SCALE 2.00E+0;POSITION
500.0E-3;LOCK LIVE;:ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE 2.0E+0;POSITION 0.0E+0.

ZOOm:DUAl
TDS 4XXA & 7XXA Only
Turns Dual Zoom mode on and off.

Group Zoom

Syntax ZOOm:DUAl { OFF | ON | <NR1> }

ZOOm:DUAl?

OFF

<Space> ON

<NR1>
ZOOm : DUAl
?

Arguments OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns Dual Zoom mode off.

ON or <NR1>  0 turns Dual Zoom mode on.

Examples ZOOM:DUAL ON
enables the Dual Zoom feature.
ZOOM:DUAL?
returns either 0 or 1 depending on the state of Dual Zoom mode.

ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet
TDS 4XXA & 7XXA Only
Adjusts the requested horizontal offset between the centers of the main and
second zoom boxes.

Group Zoom

Syntax ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet <NR3>

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–303

Command Descriptions

ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet?

<Space> <NR3>
ZOOm : DUAl : OFFSet
?

Arguments <NR3> is the offset time in seconds.

Examples ZOOM:DUAL:OFFSET 100.0E-6

adjusts the offset time in seconds between the centers of the main and second
zoom boxes.

ZOOm:GRAticule
TDS 4XXA & 7XXA Only
Selects between the upper and lower graticule for use by the zoom preview state.
If you select the lower graticule, horizontal and vertical knob changes will affect
the underlying acquisition system. If you select the upper graticule, horizontal
and vertical knob changes will affect the zoom factors.

Group Zoom

Syntax ZOOm:GRAticule { LOWEr | UPPer }

ZOOm:GRAticule?

LOWEr
<Space>
UPPer

ZOOm : GRAticule
?

Arguments LOWEr selects the lower graticule.

UPPer selects the upper graticule.

Examples ZOOM:GRATICULE?
might return UPPER, indicating that the upper graticule is selected.

2–304 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk
Specifies the waveforms that the horizontal zoom parameters affect. This is
equivalent to setting Horizontal Lock in the Zoom side menu.

Group Zoom

Syntax ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk { ALL | LIVe | NONe }

ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk?

ALL

LIVe
<Space>
NONe

ZOOm : HORizontal : LOCk

?

Arguments LIVe specifies that all live (CH<x>) waveforms will be horizontally positioned
and scaled together.
NONe specifies that only the selected waveform is positioned and scaled using the
horizontal zoom parameters.
ALL specifies that all (CH<x>, Ref<x>, Math<x>) waveforms will be horizontal-
ly positioned and scaled together.

Examples ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK LIVE

specifies that all live waveforms are positioned and scaled together.
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK?
returns either ALL, LIVE, or NONE.

ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or queries the horizontal position of zoomed waveforms. The setting of the
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk command determine the waveforms affected. For
example, if ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk is set to LIVe then only live (as opposed
to reference and math) waveforms are affected.

Group Zoom

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–305

Command Descriptions

Syntax   

 

 
     


Arguments  is from 0 to 100, and is the percent of the waveform that is to the left of
screen center when the zoom factor is 1x or greater.

It is the percent of the graticule to the right of the waveform center when the
zoom factor is less than 1. It can be less than 1 when using Fit to Screen.

Examples   

centers the waveform on the display.

ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or queries the horizontal expansion factor. This command is equivalent to
using the front-panel Horizontal Scale knob when Zoom is on. It is also
equivalent to using Zoom Preview with the upper graticule selected in the
TDS 7XXA.

Group Zoom

Syntax  

 
 


 
     



Arguments  is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction.

It is less than 1 if there is horizontal compression.

It is more than 1 if there is horizontal expansion.

2–306 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Command Descriptions

Examples ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:SCALE?
might return 1.00E+0 as the horizontal scale factor.

ZOOm:STATE
Turns Zoom mode on and off. When Zoom mode is on, the horizontal and
vertical position and scale commands affect the waveform display, not the
acquisition. This is the only way to position and scale math and reference
waveforms. This command is equivalent to turning Zoom on and off in the
Zoom side menu.

Group Zoom

Syntax ZOOm:STATE { <NR1> | OFF | ON | PREView (TDS 4XXA and 7XXA) }

ZOOm:STATE?

<NR1>

OFF

<Space> ON

PREView
ZOOm : STATE
?

Arguments OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns Zoom mode off.

ON or <NR1>  0 turns Zoom mode on. When InstaVu is in use, the state value
becomes a requested value, to be restored when InstaVu is switched off. Do not
use this condition if InstaVu is on. InstaVu overrides the zoom on state.
PREView (TDS 4XXA and 7XXA) sets ZOOM:STATE to preview. Also, it
causes the oscilloscope to display both the ZOOM:STATE OFF and
ZOOM:STATE ON traces simultaneously in dual, half-height graticules. Do not
use this condition if InstaVu is on. InstaVu overrides the zoom preview state.

Examples ZOOM:STATE ON
enables the Zoom feature.
ZOOM:STATE?
returns either 0 or 1 (OFF, PREVIEW, or ON for the TDS 4XXA and 7XXA)
depending on the state of Zoom mode.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 2–307

Command Descriptions

ZOOm:VERTical:POSition
Sets or queries the vertical position of waveforms.

Group Zoom

Syntax ZOOm:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

ZOOm:VERTical:POSition?

<Space> <NR3>
ZOOm : VERTical : POSition
?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position in divisions.

Examples ZOOM:VERTICAL:POSITION?
might return :ZOOM:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0

ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or queries the vertical expansion and compression factor.

Group Zoom

Related Commands ACQuire:MODe

Syntax ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle?

<Space> <NR3>
ZOOm : VERTical : SCAle
?

Arguments <NR3> is the amount of vertical expansion or compression.

Examples ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE?
might return :ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE 2.0E+0

2–308 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Status and Events

The digitizing oscilloscope provides a status and event reporting system for the
GPIB interface. This system informs you of certain significant events that occur
within the digitizing oscilloscope.
The digitizing oscilloscope status handling system consists of five 8-bit registers
and two queues. This section describes these registers and components. It also
explains how the event handling system operates.

Registers
The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups:
H Status Registers contain information about the status of the digitizing
oscilloscope. They include the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and
the Status Byte Register (SBR).
H Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to
the Status Registers and the Event Queue. They include the Device Event
Status Enable Register (DESER), the Event Status Enable Register (ESER),
and the Service Request Enable Register (SRER).

Status Registers The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR)
record certain types of events that may occur while the digitizing oscilloscope is
in use. IEEE Std 488.2–1987 defines these registers.
Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event, such as an
execution error or service request. When an event of a given type occurs, the
digitizing oscilloscope sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of
one. (You can disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero. See the
Enable Registers section on page 3–3.) Reading the status registers tells you
what types of events have occurred.

The Standard Event Status Register (SESR). The SESR, shown in Figure 3–1,
records eight types of events that can occur within the digitizing oscilloscope.
Use the *ESR? query to read the SESR register. Reading the register clears the
bits of the register so that the register can accumulate information about new
events.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 3–1

Status and Events

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC

Figure 3–1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR)

Table 3–1: SESR Bit Functions

Bit Function
7 (MSB) PON (Power On). Shows that the digitizing oscilloscope was powered on. The
completion of the diagnostic tests also sets this bit.
6 URQ (User Request). Shows that an Application menu button was pressed.
5 CME (Command Error). Shows that an error occurred while the digitizing
oscilloscope was parsing a command or query. Command error messages are
listed in Table 3–4 on page 3–12.
4 EXE (Execution Error). Shows that an error occurred while the digitizing
oscilloscope was executing a command or query. Execution error messages are
listed in Table 3–5 on page 3–14.
3 DDE (Device Error). Shows that a device error occurred. Device error
messages are listed in Table 3–6 on page 3–17.
2 QYE (Query Error). Shows that either an attempt was made to read the Output
Queue when no data was present or pending, or that data in the Output Queue
was lost.
1 RQC (Request Control). Not used.
0 (LSB) OPC (Operation Complete). Shows that the operation is complete. This bit is
set when all pending operations complete following an
 command.

The Status Byte Register (SBR) — shown in Figure 3–2, records whether output
is available in the Output Queue, whether the digitizing oscilloscope requests
service, and whether the SESR has recorded any events.
Use a Serial Poll or the *STB? query to read the contents of the SBR. The bits in
the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR, the Event
Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Output Queue. When you use a Serial
Poll to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the RQS bit. When you use the *STB? query to
obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS bit. Reading the SBR does not clear the bits.

6
7 RQS 5 4 3 2 1 0
— 6 ESB MAV — — — —
MSS

Figure 3–2: The Status Byte Register (SBR)

3–2 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Table 3–2: SBR Bit Functions

Bit Function
7 (MSB) Not used.
6 RQS (Request Service), obtained from a serial poll. Shows that the digitizing
oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB controller.
6 MSS (Master Status Summary), obtained from *STB? query. Summarizes the
ESB and MAV bits in the SBR.
5 ESB (Event Status Bit). Shows that status is enabled and present in the SESR.
4 MAV (Message Available). Shows that output is available in the Output Queue.
3–0 Not used.

Enable Registers DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the
Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a
Status Register (the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue) and can
prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue.
Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it
controls. In order for an event to be reported to its bit in the Status Register, the
corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one. If the bit in the
Enable Register is set to zero, the event is not recorded.
Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers. The Enable Registers and
the commands used to set them are described below.

The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) — is shown in Figure 3–3. This
register controls which types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event
Queue. The bits in the DESER correspond to those in the SESR, as described
earlier.
Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER. Use the
DESE? query to read the DESER.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC

Figure 3–3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)

The Event Status Enable Register (ESER) — is shown in Figure 3–4. It controls
which types of events are summarized by the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the SBR.
Use the *ESE command to set the bits in the ESER. Use the *ESE? query to
read it.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 3–3

Status and Events

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC

Figure 3–4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER)

The Service Request Enable Register (SRER) — is shown in Figure 3–5. It

controls which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized
by the Master Status Summary (MSS) bit.
Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to read it. The
RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is read with a
Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — ESB MAV — — — —

Figure 3–5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER)

The Enable Registers and The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on.
the *PSC Command Sending *PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
H DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)
H ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)
H SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)
Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in non-volatile
memory through a power cycle.

NOTE. To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a Service Request, send
*PSC 0, use the DESe and *ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and
ESER, and use the *SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER. Subsequent
power-on cycles will generate a Service Request.

3–4 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Queues
The digitizing oscilloscope status and event reporting system contains two
queues: the Output Queue and the Event Queue.

The Output Queue The digitizing oscilloscope stores query responses in the Output Queue. It
empties this queue each time it receives a new command or query message after
an <EOM>. The controller must read a query response before it sends the next
command (or query) or it will lose responses to earlier queries.

WARNING. When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a second query,

the digitizing scope normally clears the first response and outputs the second
while reporting a Query Error (QYE bit in the ESER) to indicate the lost
response. A fast controller, however, may receive a part or all of the first
response as well. To avoid this situation, the controller should always read the
response immediately after sending any terminated query message or send a
DCL (Device Clear) before sending the second query.

The Event Queue The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 20 events. If more than 20
events stack up in the Event Queue, the 20th event is replaced by event code
350, “Too many events.”
Read the Event Queue with the EVENT? query (which returns only the event
number), with the EVMSG? query (which returns the event number and a text
description of the event), or with the ALLEV? query (which returns all the event
numbers along with a description of the event). Reading an event removes it
from the queue.
Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the *ESR? query to
read the summary of the event from the SESR. This makes the events summa-
rized by the *ESR? read available to the EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and
empties the SESR.
Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous *ESR?
reads but not read from the Event Queue. Events that follow an *ESR? read are
put in the Event Queue but are not available until *ESR? is used again.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 3–5

Status and Events

Event Handling Sequence

Figure 3–6, on page 3–6, shows how to use the status and event handling
system. In the explanation that follows, numbers in parentheses refer to numbers
in Figure 3–6.

Device Event Status Enable Register

(DESER) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read using DESE? PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC
Write using DESE
2

Standard Event Status Register

(SESR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read using *ESR? PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Event Event
Cannot be written Queue
Event
3 Event

Event Status Enable Register

(ESER) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read using *ESE? PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Byte Output
Write using *ESE Byte Queue
Byte
4
5
Status Byte Register 6
(SBR) 7 RQS 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read using *STB? — 6 ESB MAV — — — —
Cannot be written MSS
6
7

Service Request Enable Register

(SRER) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read using *SRE? — — ESB MAV — — — —
Write using *SRE

Figure 3–6: Status and Event Handling Process

When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of event is
enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is set to 1), the
appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one, and the event is recorded in the Event
Queue (2). If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled (3), then the ESB
bit in the SBR is set to one (4).

3–6 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the SBR is set to
one (5).
When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER is
enabled (6), the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is
generated (7).

Synchronization Methods
Although most GPIB commands are completed almost immediately after being
received by the digitizing oscilloscope, some commands start a process that
requires more time. For example, once a HARDCOPY START command is
executed it may be a few seconds before the hardcopy operation is complete.
Rather than remain idle while the operation is in process, the digitizing
oscilloscope will continue processing other commands. This means that some
operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent.
Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier
operation. A first operation must complete before the next one gets processed.
The digitizing oscilloscope status and event reporting system provide ways to do
this.
For example, a typical application might involve acquiring a single-sequence
waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform. You could
use the following command sequence to do this:
/** Set up single-sequence acquisition **/


  

 
 






 



/** Acquire waveform data **/




/** Set up the measurement parameters **/












 
/** Take amplitude measurement on acquired data **/







The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time. It may not
finish before the digitizing oscilloscope takes an amplitude measurement (See
Figure 3–7). This can result in an incorrect amplitude value.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 3–7

Status and Events

  

Acquiring Waveform Data




Processing Time

Figure 3–7: Command Processing Without Using Synchronization

To ensure the digitizing oscilloscope completes waveform acquisition before

taking the measurement on the acquired data, you can synchronize the program.
Figure 3–8 shows the desired processing sequence.

  

Acquiring Waveform Data




Processing Time

Figure 3–8: Processing Sequence With Synchronization

You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the digitizing
oscilloscope with your application program: *WAI, BUSY?, *OPC, and *OPC?.

Using the *WAI Command You can force commands to execute sequentially by using the *WAI command.
This command forces completion of the previous commands before processing
new ones.
The same command sequence using the *WAI command for synchronization
looks like this:
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */
   
 
  
 
 
   
/* Acquire waveform data */
  
/* Set up the measurement parameters */

 


  
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement */


3–8 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */




Though *WAI is one of the easiest ways to achieve synchronization, it is also the
most costly. The processing time of the digitizing oscilloscope is slowed since it
is processing a single command at a time. This time could be spent doing other
tasks.
The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the
digitizing oscilloscope, but the commands will not be processed by the digitizing
oscilloscope until all operations in process are complete. If the input buffer
becomes full, the controller will be unable to write more commands to the buffer.
This can cause a time-out.

Using the BUSY Query The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the digitizing oscilloscope is
busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such as
single-sequence acquisition.
The same command sequence using the BUSY? query for synchronization looks
like this:
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */
   
 
  
 
 
   
/* Acquire waveform data */
  
/* Set up the measurement parameters */

 


  
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement */
 !#  "& #%%&!$
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */



This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the *WAI
command. The BUSY? query helps you avoid time-outs caused by writing too
many commands to the input buffer. The controller is still tied up, though, and
the repeated BUSY? query will result in more bus traffic.

Using the *OPC Command If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC command sets the
OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when an operation is
complete. You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a
serial poll or service request handler.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 3–9

Status and Events

Serial Poll Method. Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands. When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the
Standard Event Status Register (SESR) will be enabled and the Event Status Bit
(ESB) in the Status Byte Register will be enabled.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization
with serial polling looks like this:
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 0
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement. */
*OPC
While serial poll = 0, keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY?.

Service Request Method. Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands. You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB
bit in the Service Request Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE command.
When the operation is complete, a Service Request will be generated.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization
looks like this:
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1

3–10 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

*ESE 1
*SRE 32
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement */
*OPC
Program can now do different tasks such as talk to other
devices. The SRQ, when it comes, interrupts those tasks and
returns control to this task.
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

This technique is more efficient but requires more sophisticated programming.

Using the *OPC? Query The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation is complete.
A timeout could occur if you try to read the output queue before there is any data
in it.
The same command sequence using the *OPC? query for synchronization looks
like this:
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement */
*OPC?
Wait for read from Output Queue.
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

This is the simplest approach. It requires no status handling or loops. However,

you must set the controller time-out for longer than the acquisition operation.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 3–11

Status and Events

Messages
Tables 3–3 through 3–9 list all the programming interface messages the
digitizing oscilloscope generates in response to commands and queries.
For most messages, a secondary message from the digitizing oscilloscope gives
more detail about the cause of the error or the meaning of the message. This
message is part of the message string, and is separated from the main message by
a semicolon.
Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a specific bit in
the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER. Thus, each
message is associated with a specific SESR bit. In the message tables that follow,
the associated SESR bit is specified in the table title, with exceptions noted with
the error message text.
Table 3–3 shows the messages when the system has no events or status to report.
These have no associated SESR bit.

Table 3–3: No Event Messages

Code Message
0 No events to report – queue empty
1 No events to report – new events pending *ESR?

Table 3–4 shows the error messages generated by improper command syntax.
Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules in
Command Syntax starting on page 2–1.

Table 3–4: Command Error Messages – CME Bit 5

Code Message
100 Command error
101 Invalid character
102 Syntax error
103 Invalid separator
104 Data type error
105 GET not allowed
106 Invalid program data separator
108 Parameter not allowed
109 Missing parameter
110 Command header error

3–12 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Table 3–4: Command Error Messages – CME Bit 5 (Cont.)

Code Message
111 Header separator error
112 Program mnemonic too long
113 Undefined header
118 Query not allowed
120 Numeric data error
121 Invalid character in number
123 Exponent too large
124 Too many digits
128 Numeric data not allowed
130 Suffix error
131 Invalid suffix
134 Suffix too long
138 Suffix not allowed
140 Character data error
141 Invalid character data
144 Character data too long
148 Character data not allowed
150 String data error
151 Invalid string data
152 String data too long
158 String data not allowed
160 Block data error
161 Invalid block data
168 Block data not allowed
170 Expression error
171 Invalid expression
178 Expression data not allowed
180 Alias error
181 Invalid outside alias definition
183 Invalid inside alias definition
184 Command in alias requires more/fewer parameters

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 3–13

Status and Events

Table 3–5 lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of a
command. In these error messages, you should read “macro” as “alias.”

Table 3–5: Execution Error Messages – EXE Bit 4

Code Message
200 Execution error
201 Invalid while in local
202 Settings lost due to rtl
210 Trigger error
211 Trigger ignored
212 Arm ignored
220 Parameter error
221 Settings conflict
222 Data out of range
223 Too much data
224 Illegal parameter value
230 Data corrupt or stale
240 Hardware error
241 Hardware missing
242 Hardware configuration error
243 Hardware I/O device error
250 Mass storage error
251 Missing mass storage
252 Missing media
253 Corrupt media
254 Media full
255 Directory full
256 File name not found
257 File name error
258 Media protected
260 Expression error
261 Math error in expression
2200 Measurement error, Measurement system error
2201 Measurement error, Zero period
2202 Measurement error, No period found

3–14 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Table 3–5: Execution Error Messages – EXE Bit 4 (Cont.)

Code Message
2203 Measurement error, No period, second waveform
2204 Measurement error, Low signal amplitude
2205 Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
2206 Measurement error, Invalid gate
2207 Measurement error, Measurement overflow
2208 Measurement error, Waveform does not cross Mid Ref
2209 Measurement error, No second Mid Ref crossing
2210 Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform
2211 Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing
2212 Measurement error, No negative crossing
2213 Measurement error, No positive crossing
2214 Measurement error, No crossing
2215 Measurement error, No crossing, second waveform
2216 Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
2217 Measurement error, Constant waveform
2218 Measurement error, Unused
2219 Measurement error, No valid edge – No arm sample
2220 Measurement error, No valid edge – No arm cross
2221 Measurement error, No valid edge – No trigger cross
2222 Measurement error, No valid edge – No second cross
2223 Measurement error, Waveform mismatch
2224 Measurement error, WAIT calculating
2225 Measurement error, No waveform to measure
2226 Null Waveform
2227 Positive and Negative Clipping
2228 Measurement error, Positive Clipping
2229 Measurement error, Negative Clipping
2230 Measurement error, High Ref < Low Ref
2235 Math error, Invalid math description
2236 Math error, Reference waveform is invalid
2237 Math error, Out of acquisition memory
2240 Invalid password
2241 Waveform requested is invalid

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 3–15

Status and Events

Table 3–5: Execution Error Messages – EXE Bit 4 (Cont.)

Code Message
2242 Data start and stop > record length
2243 Waveform requested is not a data source
2244 Waveform requested is not turned on
2245 Saveref error, Selected channel is turned off
2246 Saveref error, Selected channel data invalid
2247 Saveref error, Out of reference memory
2248 Saveref error, Source reference data invalid
2249 Reference deletion error, Waveform in use for math
2260 Calibration error
2270 Alias error
2271 Alias syntax error
2272 Alias execution error
2273 Illegal alias label
2274 Alias parameter error
2275 Alias definition too long
2276 Alias expansion error
2277 Alias redefinition not allowed
2278 Alias header not found
2279 Alias label too long
2280 Alias table full
2285 TekSecureR Pass
2286 TekSecureR Fail
2290 Limit error, Reference in use
2291 Limit error, Reference data invalid
2292 Limit error, Out of reference memory
2293 Limit error, Selected channel is turned off
2301 Cursor error, Off-screen
2302 Cursor error, cursors in different frames
2311 Group requested has not been selected or has been deleted

3–16 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Table 3–6 lists the device errors that can occur during digitizing oscilloscope
operation. These errors may indicate that the oscilloscope needs repair.

Table 3–6: Device Error Messages – DDE Bit 3

Code Message
300 Device-specific error
310 System error
311 Memory error
312 PUD memory lost
313 Calibration memory lost
314 Save/recall memory lost
315 Configuration memory lost
350 Queue overflow (does not set DDE bit)

Table 3–7 lists the system event messages. These messages are generated
whenever certain system conditions occur.

Table 3–7: System Event Messages

Code Message
400 Query event
401 Power on (PON bit 7 set)
402 Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)
403 User request (URQ bit 6 set)
404 Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)
405 Request control
410 Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)
420 Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)
430 Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)
440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response (QYE bit 2 set)
450 Right menu button #1 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
451 Right menu button #2 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
452 Right menu button #3 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
453 Right menu button #4 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
454 Right menu button #5 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
460 Bottom menu button #1 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 3–17

Status and Events

Table 3–7: System Event Messages (Cont.)

Code Message
461 Bottom menu button #2 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
462 Bottom menu button #3 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
463 Bottom menu button #4 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
464 Bottom menu button #5 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
465 Bottom menu button #6 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)
466 Bottom menu button #7 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)

Table 3–8 lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of command
execution. These notify you that you may get unexpected results.

Table 3–8: Execution Warning Messages – EXE Bit 4

Code Message
500 Execution warning
510 String data too long, truncated
525 Parameter underrange
526 Parameter overrange
527 Parameter rounded
528 Parameter out of range
530 Data stop > stop, Values swapped internally
531 Data stop > record length, Curve truncated
532 Curve data too long, Curve truncated
540 Measurement warning
541 Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542 Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
543 Measurement warning, Low resolution
544 Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545 Measurement warning, Invalid in minmax
546 Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547 Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548 Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549 Measurement warning, Clipping negative

3–18 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Table 3–8: Execution Warning Messages – EXE Bit 4 (Cont.)

Code Message
550 InstaVu active – deactivate to see change
551 InstaVu active – deactivate to use math

Table 3–9 shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the digitizing
oscilloscope.

Table 3–9: Internal Warning Messages

Code Message
600 Internal warning
620 Internal warning, Bad thermistor
630 Internal warning, 50 W overload

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 3–19

Status and Events

3–20 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Programming Examples

The example programs illustrate methods you can use to control the digitizing
oscilloscope from the GPIB interface. The diskettes that come with this manual
contain listings for these programs written in Microsoft QuickBASIC 4.5 and
Microsoft QuickC 2.5.
The programs run on a PC-compatible system equipped with a Tektronix
(National Instruments) GPIB board and associated drivers. For example, the
programs will work with a Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-
PCII/IIA) GPIB package (See Figure 4–1).

GPIB Board

(Tektronix S3FG210 or National

Instruments PCII/IIA)

and

or

PC Compatible

Figure 4–1: Equipment Needed to Run the Example Programs

All the example programs assume that the GPIB system recognizes the digitizing
oscilloscope as DEV1 and the PC (controller) as GPIB0. You can use the


 program to assign these names.
The example software includes:
H : automatically measures waveform parameters.
H 
: shows communication between controller and oscilloscope.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 4–1

Program Examples

H GETWFM: reads a waveform from an oscilloscope and stores it in a file.

H CURSOR: uses cursors to measure waveform parameters.
H TL: a talker-listener program.

Compiling the Example Programs

The example programs diskette contains programs written in Microsoft
QuickBASIC 4.5 and Microsoft QuickC 2.5.
Executable versions of the programs are in the PROGRAMS directory. Source
versions are in the SOURCES directory. Within this directory, the QuickBASIC
programs are in the Q-BASIC subdirectory and the QuickC programs are in the
QUICK-C subdirectory.
A README file in each directory explains how to build executable code from the
source files provided.
The QuickC directory also comes with sample MAKE files and sample
executable files. These have the suffix .MAK.
If you wish to develop code, you will need to use files that come with the
GPIB system. Specifically, the QuickBASIC programs use QBDECL.BAS
and QBIB.OBJ. The QuickC programs use DECL.H and MCIB.OBJ.

NOTE. The programs you compile in the Sources directory work with the
Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII-IIA) GPIB system. It may
take extra steps or changes to get them to work with older Tektronix GURU and
other GPIB systems.

Compiling and Linking To make an executable for any example, perform the following:
Your Example Quick-C
1. Install QuickC. Select the SMALL memory model. Be sure to set up your
Programs
path so DOS can access the QuickC directory.
2. Install the Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB
board and drivers. Remember to identify the GPIB device as DEV1. You can
use the IBCONF.EXE program to do this.
3. Copy the files from the examples diskette to your hard disk. You might also
create a special directory to store them. For example, if the current drive is
hard disk C, you want to store the examples in drive C, and the examples
diskette is in drive B, you might type:
mkdir examples

4–2 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Program Examples

 1'*&-
)*2 +/#% 
4. For this installation, you will also want to copy 
 and 
   from
your Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB
drivers directory to this directory. For example, if the GPIB drivers are in the
!*#3* directory and you are in the example programs directory, you
would type:
)*2 !*#*&" 
)*2 !*#*'#)$ 
5. To compile and link your TDS sample C programs, simply type: ('%
 #& (''%
where <file name> refers to the name of the example program you wish to
compile and link. Specifically:
To compile and link 
, type: ('% '-'%
To compile and link

, type: ('% )'''%
To compile and link  
, type: ('% !.0 ''%
To compile and link

, type: ('% /,-),'%
To compile and link 
, type: ('% .&'%
6. Run the program by simply typing the program name.
To run '-, type: '-
To run )'', type: )''
To run !.0 ', type: !.0 '
To run /,-),, type: /,-),
To run .&, type: .&

Compiling and Linking To make an executable for any of the following files, perform the following:
Your Example
1. Install QuickBASIC.
QuickBASIC Programs
2. Install the Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB
board and drivers. Remember to reboot your PC to initialize the GPIB
drivers.
3. Copy the files from the examples diskette to your hard disk. You might also
create a special directory to store them. For example, if the current drive is

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 4–3

Program Examples

hard disk C, you want to store the examples in drive C, and the examples
diskette is in drive B, you might type:
mkdir examples
cd examples
copy b:\q-basic\*.* .
4. For this installation, you will also want to copy QBDECL.BAS and QBIB.OBJ
from your Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB
drivers directory to the directory your example programs are in. For
example, if the GPIB drivers are in the gpib-pc directory and you are in the
example programs directory, you would type:
copy \gpib-pc\qbdecl.bas .
copy \gpib-pc\qbib.obj .
5. Perform the following two steps for example programs:
a. Compile the program by using the following command:
bc /o <file>.bas;
where <file> is one of the example program names.
To compile MEAS.BAS, type: bc /o meas.bas;
To compile COMM.BAS, type: bc /o comm.bas;
To compile GETWFM.BAS, type: bc /o getwfm.bas;
To compile CURSOR.BAS, type: bc /o cursor.bas;
To compile TL.BAS, type: bc /o tl.bas;
b. Link the compiled program with the qbib.obj module to create the
executable program (file.EXE) by using the following command:
link <file>.obj+qbib.obj;
where <file> is one of the above program names.
To link MEAS.OBJ, type: link meas.obj+qbib.obj;
To link COMM.OBJ, type: link comm.obj+qbib.obj;
To link GETWFM.OBJ, type: link getwfm.obj+qbib.obj;
To link CURSOR.OBJ, type: link cursor.obj+qbib.obj;
To link TL.OBJ, type: link tl.obj+qbib.obj;

4–4 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Program Examples

 is a collection of input/output routines used by the other

programs and is included for proper file compilation.
6. Run the program by simply typing the program name.
To run , type: 
To run , type: 
To run , type: 
To run , type: 
To run , type: 

NOTE. The example programs disable front-panel operation while they are
running and reenable it when they terminate. If your program terminates
prematurely, front-panel operation may remain disabled. To reenable front-panel
operation, do one of the following: cycle power on the digitizing oscilloscope or
send the GPIB command 
  to unlock the front panel. You can send the

  command with the TL program included in your sample programs
disk.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual 4–5

Program Examples

4–6 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Appendix A: Character Charts

The characters in Table A–1 are available for the digitizing oscilloscope.
Numbers in the lower left corners are character widths in pixels.

Table A–1: The TDS Character Set

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 NUL space 0 @ P ‘ p
0 0 12 16 5 32 10 48 14 64 10 80 5 96 11 112

1 W ! 1 A Q a q
251 1 14 17 5 33 10 49 12 65 13 81 8 97 10 113
?
2 D ” 2 B R b r
7 2 15 18 7 34 10 50 10 66 10 82 11 98 7 114

3 Ç BW # 3 C S c s
8 3 11 19 10 35 10 51 10 67 9 83 8 99 8 115

4 .. $ 4 D T d t
10 4 12 20 10 36 10 52 12 68 10 84 10 100 7 116

5 % 5 E U e u
10 5 12 21 12 37 10 53 9 69 12 85 9 101 11 117

6 m & 6 F V f v
12 6 12 22 12 38 10 54 9 70 11 86 6 102 10 118

7 ‘ ’ 7 G W g w
5 7 10 23 5 39 10 55 11 71 15 87 10 103 14 119

8 ! ( 8 H X h x
5 8 16 24 6 40 10 56 13 72 10 88 11 104 9 120

9 HT ) 9 I Y i y
0 9 16 25 6 41 10 57 6 73 10 89 5 105 10 121

A LF * : J Z j z
0 10 12 26 8 42 6 58 7 74 10 90 5 106 8 122

B ESC + ; K [ k {
10 11 0 27 11 43 6 59 10 75 6 91 10 107 6 123

C x , < L \ l
11 12 9 28 6 44 11 60 8 76 9 92 5 108 6 124

D CR — = M ] m }
0 13 11 29 11 45 11 61 15 77 6 93 15 109 6 125

E ~ . > N ^ n ~
10 14 10 30 6 46 11 62 13 78 11 94 11 110 11 126

F D / ? O _ o
7 15 10 31 9 47 7 63 13 79 11 95 10 111 3 127

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual A–1

Appendix A: Character Charts

Table A–2: ASCII & GPIB Code Chart

B7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
B6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
B5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
BITS
T
NUMBERS
B4 B3 B2 B1 CONTROL SYMBOLS UPPER CASE LOWER CASE
0 20 40 LA0 60 LA16 100 TA0 120 TA16 140 SA0 160 SA16
0 0 0 0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P p
0 0 10 16 20 32 30 48 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112
1 GTL 21 LL0 41 LA1 61 LA17 101 TA1 121 TA17 141 SA1 161 SA17
0 0 0 1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
1 1 11 17 21 33 31 49 41 65 51 81 61 97 71 113
2 22 42 LA2 62 LA18 102 TA2 122 TA18 142 SA2 162 SA18
0 0 1 0 STX DC2 " 2 B R b r
2 2 12 18 22 34 32 50 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 114
3 23 43 LA3 63 LA19 103 TA3 123 TA19 143 SA3 163 SA19
0 0 1 1 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
3 3 13 19 23 35 33 51 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115
4 SDC 24 DCL 44 LA4 64 LA20 104 TA4 124 TA20 144 SA4 164 SA20
0 1 0 0 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
4 4 14 20 24 36 34 52 44 68 54 84 64 100 74 116
5 PPC 25 PPU 45 LA5 65 LA21 105 TA5 125 TA21 145 SA5 165 SA21
0 1 0 1 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
5 5 15 21 25 37 35 53 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117
6 26 46 LA6 66 LA22 106 TA6 126 TA22 146 SA6 166 SA22
0 1 1 0 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
6 6 16 22 26 38 36 54 46 70 56 86 66 102 76 118
7 27 47 LA7 67 LA23 107 TA7 127 TA23 147 SA7 167 SA23
0 1 1 1 BEL ETB ' 7 G W g w
7 7 17 23 27 39 37 55 47 71 57 87 67 103 77 119
10 GET 30 SPE 50 LA8 70 LA24 110 TA8 130 TA24 150 SA8 170 SA24
1 0 0 0 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
8 8 18 24 28 40 38 56 48 72 58 88 68 104 78 120
11 TCT 31 SPD 51 LA9 71 LA25 111 TA9 131 TA25 151 SA9 171 SA25
1 0 0 1 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
9 9 19 25 29 41 39 57 49 73 59 89 69 105 79 121
12 32 52 LA10 72 LA26 112 TA10 132 TA26 152 SA10 172 SA26
1 0 1 0 LF SUB * : J Z j z
A 10 1A 26 2A 42 3A 58 4A 74 5A 90 6A 106 7A 122
13 33 53 LA11 73 LA27 113 TA11 133 TA27 153 SA11 173 SA27
1 0 1 1 VT ESC + ; K [ k {
B 11 1B 27 2B 43 3B 59 4B 75 5B 91 6B 107 7B 123
14 34 54 LA12 74 LA28 114 TA12 134 TA28 154 SA12 174 SA28
1 1 0 0 FF FS , < L \ l
C 12 1C 28 2C 44 3C 60 4C 76 5C 92 6C 108 7C 124
15 35 55 LA13 75 LA29 115 TA13 135 TA29 155 SA13 175 SA29
1 1 0 1 CR GS – = M ] m }
D 13 1D 29 2D 45 3D 61 4D 77 5D 93 6D 109 7D 125
16 36 56 LA14 76 LA30 116 TA14 136 TA30 156 SA14 176 SA30
1 1 1 0 SO RS . > N ^ n ~
E 14 1E 30 2E 46 3E 62 4E 78 5E 94 6E 110 7E 126
17 37 57 LA15 77 UNL 117 TA15 137 UNT 157 SA15 177
1 1 1 1 SI US / ? O – o RUBOUT
(DEL)
F 15 1F 31 2F 47 3F 63 4F 79 5F 95 6F 111 7F 127
ADDRESSED UNIVERSAL LISTEN TALK SECONDARY ADDRESSES
COMMANDS COMMANDS ADDRESSES ADDRESSES OR COMMANDS

octal 5 PPC GPIB code (with ATN asserted) Tektronix

KEY ENQ ASCII character REF: ANSI STD X3.4-1977
hex 5 5 decimal IEEE STD 488.1-1987
ISO STD 646-2973

A–2 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Appendix B: Reserved Words

The following is a list of the reserved words of the digitizing oscilloscope. Do

not use these words for aliases. Capital letters identify the required minimum
spelling. Hint: Use the full spelling for the most robost code as the minimum
spelling rules may change over time and from model to model.

*CAL BACKGround CLEARSNapshot DISplay

*CLS BACKWards CLEARSpool DOTs
*DDT BANdwidth CLOCk DPU411
*ESE BASe CMEan DPU412
*ESR BAUd COLLision DUAl
*IDN BELl COLOr ECL
*LRN BIN COMPARE EDGE
*OPC BIT_Nr CONTRast EDGE1
*PSC BLAckman CONTROl EDGE2
*PUD BMP COPy EITher
*RCL BMPCOLOR COUNt ENCdg
*RST BN_Fmt COUPling ENV
*SAV BOLd CPU ENVElope
*SRE BOTh CRMs EPSColor
*STB BOTTOM1 CROSSHair EPSCOLImg
*TRG BOTTOM2 CRVchk EPSImage
*TST BOTTOM3 CURRent EPSMono
*WAI BOTTOM4 CURSor EPSOn
ABOrt
BOTTOM5 CURSOR1 EVEN
ABSolute
BOTTOM6 CURSOR2 EVENT
AC
BOTTOM7 CURVe EVENTS
ACCept
BOX CUSTom EVENTSTime
ACQuire
ACQUISition BURst CWD EVMsg
ACTivate BUSY DATa EVQty
ACTUal BY DATE EXECute
ALIas BYCONTents DC FACtory
ALL BYT_Nr DEFAult FALL
ALLEv BYT_Or DEFINE FALSe
ALLOcate CALibrate DELay FASTERthan
AMPlitude CATalog DELAYEd FASTframe
AND CARea DELEte FFT
APPMenu CENtronics DELTa FIELD
AREa CH1 DELTATime FIELD1
ARMed CH2 DELWarn FIELD2
ASC CH3 DESE FIELDEither
ASCIi CH4 DESKJet FIELDRATE
AUTO CHKsm0 DESTination FIELDS
AUTOSet CLAss DIAg FIELDType
AUXiliary CLEar DIR FIFty
AVErage CLEARMenu DIREction

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual B–1

Appendix B: Reserved Words

FILEName INTENSIFied NANd PROCessing

FILESystem INTENSITy NDUty PT_Fmt
FILTer INTERLAce NEGAtive PT_Off
FIRst INTERLeaf NEGSynchwidth PULse
FITtoscreen INVert NEWpass PWIdth
FLAg IRE NOISErej RATE1
FLEXformat LABel NONe RATE2
FORCe LANdscape NOR RATE3
FORMat LASERJet NORMal RATE4
FORWards LAYout NOVershoot REAdy
FPAnel LENgth NR_Pt RECAll
FRAme LESSLimit NTSc RECOrdlength
FREE LESSThan NUMACq RECTangular
FREESpace LEVel NUMAVg REF
FREQuency LFRej NUMEnv REF1
FULl LIMit NUMERic REF2
FUNCtion LINE NWIdth REF3
GATing LINES ODD REF4
GLItch LINEAr OFF REFLevel
GND LIVe OFFSet REGular
GPIb LOCk ON REJect
GRAticule LOG ONCe REM
GRAYscale LOGIc OR REName
GRId LONG OPTion REPEt
HALt LOW
OUTside RESET
HAMming LOWLimit
OVERAll RESETAll
HARDCopy LSB
OVERWrite RESUlt
HARDFlagging MAIn
PAIred RI
HBArs MAP
PAL RIBinary
HDELTA MATH
PALEtte RIGHT1
HDR MATH1
HDTv MATH2 PARity RIGHT2
HEADer MATH3 PARTial RIGHT3
HERtz MAXimum PASSWord RIGHT4
HFRej MAXRate PATtern RIGHT5
HIGH MEAN PCX RISe
HIGHLimit MEAS1 PCXCOLOR RLE
HIRes MEAS2 PDUty RMDir
HIStogram MEAS3 PEAKdetect RMS
HOLdoff MEAS4 PERCent ROLL
HOLDTime MEASUrement PERIod RP
HORizontal MEG PERSistence RPBinary
HPGl MESSage PHAse RS232
HPOS1 METHod PK2pk RUN
HPOS2 MID POLarity RUNSAfter
HUNdred MID2 PORT RUNSTop
ID MINImum PORTRait RUNT
IMMed MINMax POSition SAMple
IMPedance MKDir POSITION1 SAVe
INDependent MODe POSITION2 SCAle
INFInite MONo POSITIVe SCAN
INFPersist MORELimit POVershoot SCANPeriod
INIT MOREThan PREView SCROLLBAR
INPut MSB PRInt SCROLLTEXT
NS avu N M R

B–2 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Appendix B: Reserved Words

SECAm STANdard TRIGger WFId

SECdiv STARt TRIGT WFMPre
SECOnds STATE TRUe WHEn
SELect STOP TTL WIDth
SEQuence STOPAfter TWEnty WIThin
SET STOPBits TWOfifty X
SETHold STORe TYPe XINcr
SETLevel STYle UNITS XMUlt
SETTime SYNc UNITSTring XOFf
SETUp SYStem UNLock XUNit
SHORt TARget VALue XY
SHOW TEKSecure VARpersist
XZEro
SINX TEMPErature VBArs
Y
SLEWRate TEMPLate VDELTA
SLOpe TEXt VECtors YMUlt
SLOWERthan THInkjet VERBose YOFf
SNAp THReshold VERTical YT
SNAPShot TIFf VIDeo YUNit
SOFTFlagging TIMe VOLts YZEro
SOUrce TITLe V1STArttime ZMUlt
SOURCE1 TO V1STOptime ZOFf
SOURCE2 TOLerance V2STArttime ZONe
SPECTral TRACk V2STOptime ZOOm
SRIbinary TRIGAfter WAVEform ZUNit
SRPbinary TRIGBar WAVFrm ZZEro

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual B–3

Appendix B: Reserved Words

B–4 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Interface Specifications

This appendix describes details of the GPIB remote interface of the digitizing
oscilloscope. Normally, you will not need this information to use the digitizing
oscilloscope, but the information is useful when connecting to controllers of
unusual configuration.

GPIB Function Subsets

The digitizing oscilloscope supports many GPIB function subsets, as listed
below. Some of the listings describe subsets that the digitizing oscilloscope does
not support.
H SH1 (Source Handshake). The digitizing oscilloscope can transmit multiline
messages across the GPIB.
H AH1 (Acceptor Handshake). The digitizing oscilloscope can receive
multiline messages across the GPIB.
H T5 (Talker). The digitizing oscilloscope becomes a talker when its talk
address is sent with the ATN (Attention) line asserted. It can send both
response data and status information when responding to a serial poll. It
ceases to be a talker when the talk address if another device is sent with ATN
asserted. The digitizing oscilloscope has talk-only capability for hardcopy
operation.
H L4 (Listener). The digitizing oscilloscope becomes a listener when its listen
address is sent with the ATN (Attention) line asserted. The digitizing
oscilloscope does not have listen-only capability.
H SR1 (Service Request). The digitizing oscilloscope asserts an SRQ (Service
Request) line to notify the controller when it requires service.
H RL1 (Remote/Local). The digitizing oscilloscope responds to both the GTL
(Go To Local) and LLO (Local Lock Out) interface messages.
H PP0 (Parallel Poll). The digitizing oscilloscope has no parallel poll capabili-
ty. It does not respond to the following interface messages: PPC, PPD, PPE,
and PPU. The digitizing oscilloscope does not send out a status message
when the ATN (Attention) and EOI (End or Identify) lines are asserted
simultaneously.
H DC1 (Device Clear). The digitizing oscilloscope responds to the DCL
(Device Clear) and, when made a listener, the SDC (Selected Device Clear)
interface messages.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual C–1

Appendix C: Interface Specifications

H DT1 (Device Trigger). When acting as a listener, the digitizing oscilloscope

responds to the GET (Group Execute Trigger) interface message.
H C0 (Controller). The digitizing oscilloscope cannot control other devices.
H E2 (Electrical). The digitizing oscilloscope uses tristate buffers to provide
optimal high-speed data transfer.

Interface Messages
Table C–1 shows the standard interface messages that are supported by the
digitizing oscilloscope.

Table C–1: TDS Family Oscilloscope Standard

Interface Message

Message GPIB
DCL Yes
GET Yes
GTL Yes
LLO Yes
PPC No
PPD No
PPE No
PPU No
SDC Yes
SPD Yes
SPE Yes
TCT No
UNL Yes
UNT Yes
Listen Addresses Yes
Talk Addresses Yes

C–2 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings

The factory initialization settings provide you a known state for the digitizing
oscilloscope.
Factory initialization sets values as shown in Table D–1.

Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings

Control Changed by Factory Init to

Acquire mode Sample
Acquire repetitive signal ON (Enable ET)
(TDS 4XXA, 5XXA, & 7XXA)
Acquire stop after RUN/STOP button only
Acquire # of averages 16
Acquire # of envelopes 10
Channel selection Channel 1 on, all others off
Cursor H Bar 1 position 10% of graticule height
(–3.2 divs from the center)
Cursor H Bar 2 position 90% of the graticule height
(+3.2 divs from the center)
Cursor V Bar 1 position 10% of the record length
Cursor V Bar 2 position 90% of the record length
Cursor amplitude units Base
Cursor function Off
Cursor mode Independent
Cursor time units Seconds
Date and time No change
Delay events, TDS 4XXA: 1
triggerable after main TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA: 2
Delay time, TDS 4XXA: 10 ns
delayed runs after main TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA: 16 ns
Delay time, TDS 4XXA: 60 ns
delayed triggerable after main TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA: 16 ns
Delay trigger average # 16
Delay trigger envelope # 10
Delayed, delay by ... Delay by Time

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual D–1

Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings

Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings (Cont.)

Control Changed by Factory Init to

Delayed edge trigger coupling DC
All except TDS 684A & 7XXA Main Trigger
Delayed edge trigger level 0V
Delayed edge trigger slope Rising
Delayed edge trigger source Channel 1
Delayed, time base mode Delayed Runs After Main
Display clock No Change
Display color – collision contrast Off
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA)
Display color – map math colors Color ‘Math’
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA)
Display color – map reference colors Color ‘Ref’
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA)
Display color – palette Normal
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA)
Display color – palette colors All palette colors are reset to factory hue,
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA) saturation, and lightness (HLS) values
Display color – persistence palette Temperature
(TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA)
Display format YT
Display graticule type Full
Display instavu persistence Varpersist
Display instavu style Vectors
Display instavu varpersist 500 e–3
Display intensity – contrast 150%
(TDS 4XXA, 5X0A, & 6X0A)
Display intensity – text TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA: 100%
TDS 4XXA, 520A, & 540A, 620A, & 640A:
60%
Display intensity – waveform TDS 524A, 544A, 644A, 684A, & 7XXA: 100%
TDS 4XXA, 520A, 540A, 620A, & 640A: 75%
Display intensity – overall 85%
(TDS 4XXA, 5X0A, & 6X0A)
Display interpolation filter Sin(x)/x
Display mode Normal
Display style Vectors
Display trigger bar style Short

D–2 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings

Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings (Cont.)

Control Changed by Factory Init to

Display trigger “T” On
Display variable persistence 500 ms
Edge trigger coupling DC
Edge trigger level 0.0 V
Edge trigger slope Rising
Edge trigger source Channel 1
GPIB parameters No change
Hardcopy Format Unchanged
Layout Unchanged
Palette Unchanged
Port Unchanged
Horizontal – delay time/division 50 ms
Horizontal – delay trigger position 50%
Horizontal – delay trigger record length 500 points (10 divs)
Horizontal – fit to screen Off
Horizontal – FastFrame Off
(TDS 520A, 524A, 540A, 544A, & 7XXA)
Horizontal – FastFrame, frame count 2
(TDS 520A, 524A, 540A, 544A, & 7XXA)
Horizontal – FastFrame, frame length 500
(TDS 520A, 524A, 540A, 544A, & 7XXA)
Horizontal – main time/division 500 ms
Horizontal – main trigger position 50%
Horizontal – main trigger record length 500 points (10 divs)
Horizontal – time base Main only
Limit template ±V Limit 40 mdiv
±H Limit 40 mdiv
Limit template destination Ref1
Limit template source Ch1
Limit test sources Ch1 compared to Ref1; all others compared to
none.
Limit Testing Off
Limit Testing – hardcopy if condition met Off
Limit Testing – ring bell if condition met Off
Logic pattern trigger Ch4 (Ax2) input X (do not care)
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual D–3

Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings

Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings (Cont.)

Control Changed by Factory Init to

Logic state trigger Ch4 (Ax2) input Rising edge
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Logic trigger input Channel 1 = H (high),
(pattern and state) Channels 2 & 3 (Ax1) = X (do not care)
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Logic trigger pattern time qualification
Lower limit 5 ns
Upper limit 5 ns
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Logic trigger sources and levels Data Source = Channel 1 = 1.4 V
(Setup/Hold) Clock Source = Channel 2 = 1.4 V
(TDS 684A & 7XXA)
(Source levels are clipped to 1.2 V at the
default volts/division setting established by
Factory Init)
Clock Edge = Rising
Logic trigger threshold (all channels) (pattern 1.4 V (when 10X probe attached)
and state)
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Logic trigger class Pattern
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Logic trigger logic AND
(pattern and state)
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Logic trigger triggers when ... Goes TRUE
(pattern and state)
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Main trigger holdoff 0%
Main trigger mode Auto
Main trigger type Edge
Math1 definition Ch 1 + Ch 2
Math1 extended processing No extended processing
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Math2 definition Ch 1 – Ch 2 (FFT of Ch 1 for instruments with
Option 2F Advanced DSP Math)
Math2 extended processing No extended processing
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Math3 definition Inv of Ch 1
Math3 extended processing No extended processing
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)

D–4 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings

Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings (Cont.)

Control Changed by Factory Init to

Measure Delay edges Both rising and forward searching
Measure Delay to Channel 1 (Ch1)
Measure Gating Off
Measure High Ref 90% and 0 V (units)
Measure High-Low Setup Histogram
Measure Low Ref 10% and 0 V (units)
Measure Mid Ref 50% and 0 V (units)
Measure Mid2 Ref 50% and 0 V (units)
Pulse glitch filter state On (Accept glitch)
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse glitch trigger polarity Positive
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse glitch width 2.0 ns
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse runt high threshold 1.2 V
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse runt low threshold 0.8 V
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse runt trigger polarity Positive
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse slew rate Delta Time 2.0 ns
Pulse slew rate polarity Positive
Pulse slew rate setting
Pulse slew rate thresholds Trig if faster than
Upper 1.80 V
Lower 800 mV
Pulse slew rate triggers when ... Trig if faster than
Pulse trigger class Glitch
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse trigger level 0.0 V
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse trigger source Channel 1 (Ch1)
(Glitch, runt, and width)
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse width lower limit 2.0 ns
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual D–5

Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings

Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings (Cont.)

Control Changed by Factory Init to

Pulse width trigger polarity Positive
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse width trigger when ... Within limits
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
Pulse width upper limit 2.0 ns
(TDS 5XXA, 6XXA, & 7XXA)
RS-232 parameters No change
Saved setups No change
Saved waveforms No change
Stop after R/S button
Vertical bandwidth (all channels) Full
Vertical coupling (all channels) DC
Vertical impedance (termination) (all channels) 1 MW
Vertical offset (all channels) 0V
Vertical position (all channels) 0 divs.
Vertical volts per division (all channels) 100 mV per division
Zoom dual Off
Zoom dual offset 5 e–3
Zoom graticule Upper
Zoom horizontal (all channels) 1.0X
Zoom horizontal lock All
Zoom horizontal position (all channels) 50% = 0.5 (the middle of the display)
Zoom state Off
Zoom vertical (all channels) 1.0X
Zoom vertical position (all channels) 0 divs.

D–6 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Glossary

ASCII
Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
Controllers transmit commands to the digitizing oscilloscope using ASCII
character encoding.
Address
A 7-bit code that identifies an instrument on the communication bus. The
digitizing oscilloscope must have a unique address for the controller to
recognize and transmit commands to it.
Backus-Naur Form (BNF)
A standard notation system for command syntax diagrams. The syntax
diagrams in this manual use BNF notation.
Controller
A computer or other device that sends commands to and accepts responses
from the digitizing oscilloscope.
EOI
A mnemonic referring to the control line “End or Identify” on the GPIB
interface bus. One of the two possible end-of-message terminators.
EOM
A generic acronym referring to the end-of-message terminator. The
end-of-message terminator can be either an EOI or the ASCII code for line
feed (LF).
Equivalent-time sampling (ET)
A sampling mode in which the oscilloscope acquires signals over many
repetitions of the event. The TDS Family Series Digitizing Oscilloscopes use
a type of equivalent time sampling called random equivalent time sampling.
It utilizes an internal clock that runs asynchronously with respect to the input
signal and the signal trigger. The oscilloscope takes samples continuously,
independent of the trigger position, and displays them based on the time
difference between the sample and the trigger. Although the samples are
taken sequentially in time, they are random with respect to the trigger.
Real-time sampling
A sampling mode where the digitizing oscilloscope samples fast enough to
completely fill a waveform record from a single trigger event. Use real-time
sampling to capture single-shot or transient events.
GPIB
Acronym for General Purpose Interface Bus, the common name for the
communications interface system defined in IEEE Std 488.

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual Glossary–1

Glossary

IEEE
Acronym for the Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
QuickBASIC
A computer language (distributed by Microsoft) that is based on the
Beginner’s All-Purpose Symbolic Instruction Code.
QuickC
A computer language (distributed by Microsoft) that is based on C.
TEKSecure
A Tektronix custom command that initializes both waveform and setup
memories. This overwrites any previously stored data.

Glossary–2 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

Index
A APPMENU:LABEL:TITLE, 2–58
APPMENU, 2–55
Abbreviating, command, 2–4 APPMENU:LABEL, 2–56
ACQUIRE?, 2–39 APPMENU:LABEL:BOTTOM, 2–56
ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE, 2–39 APPMENU:LABEL:RIGHT, 2–57
ACQUIRE:MODE, 2–40 APPMENU:LABEL:TITLE, 2–58
ACQUIRE:NUMACQ?, 2–42 Argument, command, 2–2
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG, 2–43 ASCII, 2–1, Glossary–1
ACQUIRE:NUMENV, 2–43 Audio indicator, 2–59
ACQUIRE:REPET, 2–44 AUTOSET, 2–59
ACQUIRE:STATE, 2–45
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER, 2–46
Acquisition command group, 2–11, 2–12 B
Acquisition commands
Backus-Naur Form, 2–1
ACQUIRE?, 2–39
Definition of, Glossary–1
ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE, 2–39
BELL, 2–59
ACQUIRE:MODE, 2–40
Block, command argument, 2–9
ACQUIRE:NUMACQ?, 2–42
BNF, Glossary–1
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG, 2–43
BNF (Backus-Naur form), 2–1
ACQUIRE:NUMENV, 2–43
Break, 2–3
ACQUIRE:REPET, 2–44
BUSY?, 2–60
ACQUIRE:STATE, 2–45
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER, 2–46
Address, Definition of, Glossary–1
ALIAS, 2–47
C
Alias commands *CAL?, 2–60
ALIAS, 2–47 Calibration and diagnostic command group, 2–13
ALIAS:CATALOG?, 2–48 Calibration and diagnostic commands
ALIAS:DEFINE, 2–48 *CAL?, 2–60
ALIAS:DELETE, 2–50 DIAG:RESULT:FLAG?, 2–97
ALIAS:DELETE:ALL, 2–50 DIAG:RESULT:LOG?, 2–98
ALIAS:DELETE:NAME, 2–50 DIAG:SELECT:ACQUISITION, 2–99
ALIAS:STATE, 2–51 DIAG:SELECT:ALL, 2–99
ALIAS:CATALOG?, 2–48 DIAG:SELECT:CPU, 2–99
ALIAS:DEFINE, 2–48 DIAG:SELECT:DISPLAY, 2–100
ALIAS:DELETE, 2–50 DIAG:SELECT:FPANEL, 2–100
ALIAS:DELETE:ALL, 2–50 DIAG:STATE, 2–101
ALIAS:DELETE:NAME, 2–50 CH<x>?, 2–61
ALIAS:STATE, 2–51 CH<x>:BANDWIDTH, 2–61
ALLEV?, 2–51 CH<x>:COUPLING, 2–62
ALLOCATE?, 2–52 CH<x>:IMPEDANCE, 2–63
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM?, 2–53 CH<x>:OFFSET, 2–64
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:FREE?, 2–53 CH<x>:POSITION, 2–65
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF<x>, 2–54 CH<x>:PROBE?, 2–66
Application menu command group, 2–12 CH<x>:SCALE, 2–66
Application menu commands CH<x>:VOLTS, 2–67
APPMENU, 2–55 Channel, command mnemonic, 2–7
APPMENU:LABEL, 2–56 CH<x>, command mnemonic, 2–7
APPMENU:LABEL:BOTTOM, 2–56 Clear Status, 2–68
APPMENU:LABEL:RIGHT, 2–57 CLEARMENU, 2–68

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual Index–1

Index

*CLS, 2–68 Command syntax, 2–1

Command BNF (Backus-Naur form), 2–1
Abbreviating, 2–4 Commands, 1–1
Argument, 2–2 Parts of, 1–1
Block argument, 2–9 Syntax diagrams, 1–1
Common, 2–21, 2–23 Common command, 2–21, 2–23
Concatenating, 2–4 Common GPIB commands
Header, 2–2 *CAL?, 2–60
Message, 2–2 *CLS, 2–68
Mnemonic, 2–2 Concatenating, command, 2–4
Query, 2–1 Configuration, Command query, 2–156
Rules for forming, 2–1 Controller, Definition of, Glossary–1
Separator, 2–2 Cursor command group, 2–13
Set, 2–1 Cursor commands
Syntax, 2–1 CURSOR?, 2–69
BNF (Backus-Naur form), 2–1 CURSOR:FUNCTION, 2–69
Command argument CURSOR:HBARS?, 2–70
Numeric, 2–7 CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA?, 2–70
Quoted string, 2–8 CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION<x>, 2–71
Command Descriptions, 1–1 CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–71
Command group CURSOR:HBARS:SELECT, 2–72
Acquisition, 2–11, 2–12 CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS, 2–73
Application menu, 2–12 CURSOR:MODE, 2–73
Calibration and diagnostic, 2–13 CURSOR:PAIRED, 2–74
Cursor, 2–13 CURSOR:PAIRED:HDELTA, 2–75
Display, 2–14 CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS1, 2–75
File system, 2–16 CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS2, 2–76
Hardcopy, 2–17 CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION<x>, 2–76
Horizontal, 2–17 CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–77
Limit test, 2–19 CURSOR:PAIRED:SELECT, 2–77
Measurement, 2–19 CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS, 2–78
Miscellaneous, 2–21 CURSOR:PAIRED:VDELTA, 2–79
RS-232, 2–22 CURSOR:VBARS, 2–79
Save and recall, 2–22 CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA?, 2–80
Status and error, 2–23 CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION<x>, 2–81
Trigger, 2–24 CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–81
Vertical, 2–31 CURSOR:VBARS:SELECT, 2–82
Waveform, 2–32 CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS, 2–83
Zoom, 2–37 CURSOR:VBARS:UNITSTring, 2–85
Command Groups, 1–1 Cursor position, command mnemonic, 2–6
Command mnemonic CURSOR?, 2–69
Channel, 2–7 CURSOR:FUNCTION, 2–69
CH<x>, 2–7 CURSOR:HBARS?, 2–70
Cursor position, 2–6 CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA?, 2–70
Math waveform, 2–7 CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION<x>, 2–71
MATH<x>, 2–7 CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–71
Measurement specifier, 2–6 CURSOR:HBARS:SELECT, 2–72
MEAS<x>, 2–6 CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS, 2–73
POSITION<x>, 2–6 CURSOR:MODE, 2–73
Reference waveform, 2–7 CURSOR:PAIRED, 2–74
REF<x>, 2–7 CURSOR:PAIRED:HDELTA, 2–75
Waveform, 2–7 CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS1, 2–75
<wfm>, 2–7 CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS2, 2–76

Index–2 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Index

CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION<x>, 2–76 DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:item:BYCONTENTS,

CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–77 2–104
CURSOR:PAIRED:SELECT, 2–77 DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:palette name:item
CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS, 2–78 name, 2–108
CURSOR:PAIRED:VDELTA, 2–79 DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:palette name:RESET,
CURSOR:VBARS, 2–79 2–107
CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA?, 2–80 DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:PERSISTENCE,
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION<x>, 2–81 2–106
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–81 DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:REGULAR, 2–106
CURSOR:VBARS:SELECT, 2–82 DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RESETALL, 2–107
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS, 2–83 DISPLAY:DATE/TIME. See DISPLAY:CLOCK
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITSTring, 2–85 DISPLAY:FILTER, 2–110
CURVE, 2–85 DISPLAY:FORMAT, 2–111
DISPLAY:GRATICULE, 2–112
DISPLAY:INSTAVU:PERSISTENCE, 2–113
D DISPLAY:INSTAVU:STYLE, 2–114
DATA, 2–87 DISPLAY:INSTAVU:VARPERSIST, 2–114
DATA:DESTINATION, 2–87 DISPLAY:INTENSITY?, 2–115
DATA:ENCDG, 2–88 DISPLAY:INTENSITY:CONTRAST, 2–115
DATA:SOURCE, 2–90 DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL, 2–116
DATA:START, 2–91 DISPLAY:INTENSITY:TEXT, 2–117
DATA:STOP, 2–92 DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM, 2–117
DATA:TARGET, 2–92 DISPLAY:MODE, 2–118
DATA:WIDTH, 2–93 DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE, 2–118
DATE, 2–94 DISPLAY:STYLE, 2–119
DCL, C–2 DISPLAY:TRIGBAR, 2–120
*DDT, 2–94 DISPLAY:TRIGT, 2–121
Delayed trigger, 2–220, 2–221, 2–222, 2–223, 2–224, MESSAGE, 2–196
2–225, 2–226, 2–227 MESSAGE:BOX, 2–196
DELETE:SETUP, 2–95 MESSAGE:SHOW, 2–198
DELETE:WAVEFORM, 2–96 MESSAGE:STATE, 2–199
DESE command, 2–96, 3–3 DISPLAY?, 2–102
DESER register, 2–96, 2–202, 3–3 DISPLAY:CLOCK, 2–102
Device Clear, 2–3, C–2 DISPLAY:COLOR:CONTRAST, 2–103
DIAG:RESULT:FLAG?, 2–97 DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:item name:TO, 2–105
DIAG:RESULT:LOG?, 2–98 DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:item:BYCONTENTS, 2–104
DIAG:SELECT:ACQUISITION, 2–99 DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:palette name:item name,
DIAG:SELECT:ALL, 2–99 2–108
DIAG:SELECT:CPU, 2–99 DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:palette name:RESET,
DIAG:SELECT:DISPLAY, 2–100 2–107
DIAG:SELECT:FPANEL, 2–100 DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:PERSISTENCE, 2–106
DIAG:STATE, 2–101 DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:REGULAR, 2–106
Diagram, syntax, 2–10 DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RESETALL, 2–107
Disks included with this manual, 1–2 DISPLAY:DATE/TIME. See DISPLAY:CLOCK
Display command group, 2–14 DISPLAY:FILTER, 2–110
Display commands DISPLAY:FORMAT, 2–111
CLEARMENU, 2–68 DISPLAY:GRATICULE, 2–112
DISPLAY?, 2–102 DISPLAY:INSTAVU:PERSISTENCE, 2–113
DISPLAY:CLOCK, 2–102 DISPLAY:INSTAVU:STYLE, 2–114
DISPLAY:COLOR:CONTRAST, 2–103 DISPLAY:INSTAVU:VARPERSIST, 2–114
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:item name:TO, 2–105 DISPLAY:INTENSITY?, 2–115

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual Index–3

Index

DISPLAY:INTENSITY:CONTRAST, 2–115 FILESYSTEM:COPY, 2–126

DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL, 2–116 FILESYSTEM:CWD, 2–127
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:TEXT, 2–117 FILESYSTEM:DELETE, 2–127
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM, 2–117 FILESYSTEM:DELWARN, 2–128
DISPLAY:MODE, 2–118 FILESYSTEM:DIR, 2–129
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE, 2–118 FILESYSTEM:FORMAT, 2–129
DISPLAY:STYLE, 2–119 FILESYSTEM:FREESPACE, 2–129
DISPLAY:TRIGBAR, 2–120 FILESYSTEM:MKDIR, 2–130
DISPLAY:TRIGT, 2–121 FILESYSTEM:OVERWRITE, 2–130
FILESYSTEM:PRINT, 2–131
FILESYSTEM:RENAME, 2–132
E FILESYSTEM:RMDIR, 2–132
FITTOSCREEN, 2–149
Edge trigger, 2–228, 2–229, 2–230, 2–265
End or Identify, Glossary–1
EOI, Glossary–1
EOM, Glossary–1
G
EOM (end of message), 2–5 GET, C–2
Equivalent-time sampling, random, Glossary–1 Glitch trigger, 2–249, 2–250, 2–251, 2–252
Error message, programming interface, 3–12 Go to local, C–2
Error messages, 1–2 GPIB, Glossary–1
*ESE, 2–121, 3–3 Configurations, 1–4
ESER register, 2–121, 2–202, 3–3 Connection rules, 1–4
*ESR?, 2–122 EOM (end of message), 2–5
*ESR? query, 3–1 Function subsets, C–1
Event handling, 3–1, 3–6 Group execute trigger, C–2
Event query, 2–123 GTL, C–2
Event queue, 2–123, 3–5
EVENT?, 2–123
EVMSG?, 2–123 H
EVQTY?, 2–124
HARDCOPY, 2–133
Example programs, 1–2
Hardcopy command group, 2–17
On disk, 1–2
Hardcopy commands
HARDCOPY, 2–133
F HARDCOPY:FILENAME, 2–134
HARDCOPY:FORMAT, 2–135
FACTORY, 2–125 HARDCOPY:LAYOUT, 2–137
Factory initialization settings, D–1–D–6 HARDCOPY:PALETTE, 2–137
FASTFRAME, 2–147, 2–148 HARDCOPY:PORT, 2–138
File system command group, 2–16 HARDCOPY:FILENAME, 2–134
File system commands HARDCOPY:FORMAT, 2–135
FILESYSTEM:COPY, 2–126 HARDCOPY:LAYOUT, 2–137
FILESYSTEM:CWD, 2–127 HARDCOPY:PALETTE, 2–137
FILESYSTEM:DELETE, 2–127 HARDCOPY:PORT, 2–138
FILESYSTEM:DELWARN, 2–128 HDR, 2–139
FILESYSTEM:DIR, 2–129 HEADER, 2–139
FILESYSTEM:FORMAT, 2–129 Header
FILESYSTEM:FREESPACE, 2–129 Command, 2–2, 2–139
FILESYSTEM:MKDIR, 2–130 Included in query response, 2–139, 2–287
FILESYSTEM:OVERWRITE, 2–130 Horizontal command group, 2–17
FILESYSTEM:PRINT, 2–131 Horizontal commands
FILESYSTEM:RENAME, 2–132 HORIZONTAL?, 2–140
FILESYSTEM:RMDIR, 2–132 HORIZONTAL:CLOCK, 2–141

Index–4 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Index

HORIZONTAL:CLOCK:MAXRATE, 2–141
HORIZONTAL:DELAY?, 2–142
I
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE, 2–142 ID?, 2–156
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE, 2–143 *IDN?, 2–156
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SECDIV, 2–144 IEEE, Glossary–2
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME, 2–144 IEEE Std 488.2-1987, 1–3, 2–1, 2–21, 2–23
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME?, 2–145 Instrument setup, 1–3
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:RUNSAFTER, Interface message, C–2
2–145
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:TRIGAFTER, 2–146
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT, 2–147 L
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH, 2–147
Limit test command group, 2–19
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:POSITION, 2–148
Limit Test commands
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE, 2–148
LIMIT:BELL, 2–157
HORIZONTAL:FITTOSCREEN, 2–149
LIMIT:COMPARE:CH<x>, 2–158
HORIZONTAL:MAIN?, 2–150
LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH<x>, 2–159
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE, 2–150
LIMIT:HARDCOPY, 2–159
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SECDIV, 2–151
LIMIT:STATE, 2–160
HORIZONTAL:MODE, 2–152
LIMIT:TEMPLATE, 2–161
HORIZONTAL:POSITION, 2–153
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:DESTINATION, 2–162
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH, 2–153
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:SOURCE, 2–162
HORIZONTAL:SCALE, 2–154
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE: VERTICAL,
HORIZONTAL:SECDIV, 2–155
2–164
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER?, 2–155
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL,
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION, 2–155
2–163
HORIZONTAL?, 2–140
LIMIT:BELL, 2–157
HORIZONTAL:CLOCK, 2–141
LIMIT:COMPARE:CH<X>, 2–158
HORIZONTAL:CLOCK:MAXRATE, 2–141
LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH<X>, 2–159
HORIZONTAL:DELAY?, 2–142
LIMIT:HARDCOPY, 2–159
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE, 2–142
LIMIT:STATE, 2–160
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE, 2–143
LIMIT:TEMPLATE, 2–161
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SECDIV, 2–144
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:DESTINATION, 2–162
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME, 2–144
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:SOURCE, 2–162
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME?, 2–145
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE: VERTICAL,
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:RUNSAFTER, 2–145
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:TRIGAFTER, 2–146 2–164
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT, 2–147 LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL,
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH, 2–147 2–163
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:POSITION, 2–148 LLO, C–2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE, 2–148 Local lock out, C–2
HORIZONTAL:FITTOSCREEN, 2–149 LOCK, 2–165
HORIZONTAL:MAIN?, 2–150 Logic trigger, 2–234, 2–235, 2–236, 2–237, 2–238,
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE, 2–150 2–239, 2–240, 2–241, 2–242, 2–243, 2–244,
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SECDIV, 2–151 2–245, 2–246, 2–247, 2–265
HORIZONTAL:MODE, 2–152 *LRN?, 2–165
HORIZONTAL:POSITION, 2–153
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH, 2–153
HORIZONTAL:SCALE, 2–154
M
HORIZONTAL:SECDIV, 2–155 Manual trigger, Simulation with command, 2–285
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER?, 2–155 Math waveform, command mnemonic, 2–7
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION, 2–155 MATH<x>?, 2–166

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual Index–5

Index

MATH<x>:DEFINE, 2–166 MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: PERCENT:MID2,

MATH<x>:NUMAVg, 2–168 2–195
MATH<x>:PROCessing, 2–169 MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW,
MATH<x>, command mnemonic, 2–7 2–190
Measurement command group, 2–19 MEASUREMENT:SNAPSHOT, 2–196
Measurement commands Measurement specifier, command mnemonic, 2–6
MEASUREMENT?, 2–170 MEASUREMENT?, 2–170
MEASUREMENT:CLEARSNAPSHOT, 2–170 MEASUREMENT:CLEARSNAPSHOT, 2–170
MEASUREMENT:GATING, 2–171 MEASUREMENT:GATING, 2–171
MEASUREMENT:IMMED?, 2–171 MEASUREMENT:IMMED?, 2–171
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY?, 2–172 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY?, 2–172
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION, MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION,
2–172 2–172
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1, 2–173 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1, 2–173
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2, 2–174 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2, 2–174
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1, 2–175 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1, 2–175
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2, 2–176 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2, 2–176
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE, 2–176 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE, 2–176
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNITS?, 2–179 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNITS?, 2–179
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?, 2–179 MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?, 2–179
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>?, 2–180 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>?, 2–180
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY?, 2–180 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY?, 2–180
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY: MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:DIRECTION?,
DIRECTION?, 2–180 2–180
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:EDGE1, MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:EDGE1, 2–181
2–181 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:EDGE2, 2–182
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:EDGE2, MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:SOURCE1,
2–182 2–183
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:SOURCE1, MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:SOURCE2,
2–183 2–184
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:SOURCE2, MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: STATE, 2–184
2–184 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: TYPE, 2–185
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: STATE, 2–184 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: UNITS?, 2–188
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: TYPE, 2–185 MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: VALUES?, 2–188
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: UNITS?, 2–188 MEASUREMENT:METHOD, 2–189
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: VALUES?, 2–188 MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL?, 2–189
MEASUREMENT:METHOD, 2–189 MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH,
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL?, 2–189 2–190
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW,
ABSOLUTE:HIGH, 2–190 2–190
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: ABSOLUTE:MID, MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID,
2–191 2–191
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2,
ABSOLUTE:MID2, 2–192 2–192
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: METHOD, 2–192 MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD, 2–192
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: PERCENT:HIGH, MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH,
2–193 2–193
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: PERCENT:LOW, MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW,
2–194 2–194
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: PERCENT:MID, MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID,
2–194 2–194

Index–6 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Index

MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2,
2–195
P
MEASUREMENT:SNAPSHOT, 2–196 Parallel poll, C–2
MEAS<x>, command mnemonic, 2–6 Parts of commands, 1–1
MESSAGE, 2–196 PASSWORD, 2–201
Message Pattern trigger, 2–237, 2–238, 2–239, 2–240
Command, 2–2 POSITION<x>, command mnemonic, 2–6
Command terminator, 2–5 Power-on status clear command, 2–202
Handling, 3–1 PPC, C–2
Table of program messages, 3–12 PPD, C–2
MESSAGE:BOX, 2–196 PPE, C–2
MESSAGE:SHOW, 2–198 PPU, C–2
MESSAGE:STATE, 2–199 Programming Examples, 1–2, 4–1
Messages, Status and error, 1–2 *PSC, 2–202
Miscellaneous, LOCK, 2–165 *PSC command, 3–4
Miscellaneous command group, 2–21 *PUD, 2–203
Miscellaneous commands Pulse trigger, 2–248, 2–249, 2–250, 2–251, 2–252,
AUTOSET, 2–59 2–253, 2–254, 2–255, 2–256, 2–257, 2–258,
BELL, 2–59 2–259, 2–260, 2–261, 2–262, 2–263, 2–264, 2–265
DATE, 2–94
*DDT, 2–94
FACTORY, 2–125 Q
HDR, 2–139
Query, Header in query response, 2–139, 2–287
HEADER, 2–139
Query command, 2–1
*IDN?, 2–156
Queue
*LRN?, 2–165
Event, 3–5
NEWPASS, 2–199
Output, 3–5
PASSWORD, 2–201
QuickBASIC, 4–1, Glossary–2
*PUD, 2–203
QuickC, 4–1, Glossary–2
REM, 2–206
Quoted string, command argument, 2–8
SET, 2–216
TEKSECURE, 2–218
TIME, 2–218 R
*TRG, 2–285
UNLOCK, 2–286 *RCL, 2–204
VERBOSE, 2–287 Real-time sampling, Glossary–1
Mnemonic, command, 2–2 Recall setting command, 2–204
RECALL:SETUP, 2–204
RECALL:WAVEFORM, 2–205
N Reference waveform, command mnemonic, 2–7
REF<x>, command mnemonic, 2–7
NEWPASS, 2–199
Register
Numeric, command argument, 2–7
DESER, 2–96, 2–202, 3–3
ESER, 2–121, 2–202, 3–3
O SBR, 2–217, 3–2
SESR, 2–68, 2–122, 2–200, 3–1
*OPC, 2–200 SRER, 2–202, 2–217, 3–4
Operation complete command, 2–200 REM, 2–206
Operation complete wait, 2–287 Reset
*OPT, 2–201 Command, 2–206
Option Identification Query, 2–201 Factory, 2–125
Output queue, 3–5 RS-232 command group, 2–22

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual Index–7

Index

RS-232 commands Service request enable command, 2–217

RS232?, 2–210 Service request enable register, 2–217
RS232:BAUD, 2–207 Service Requests, 1–2
RS232:HARDFLAGGING, 2–208 SESR register, 2–68, 2–122, 2–200, 3–1
RS232:PARITY, 2–208 Set command, 2–1
RS232:SOFTFLAGGING, 2–209 SET?, 2–216
RS232:STOPBITS, 2–210 Sethold trigger, 2–240, 2–241, 2–242, 2–243, 2–244
RS232?, 2–210 Setting
RS232: BAUD, 2–207 Command query, 2–165
RS232:HARDFLAGGING, 2–208 Query, 2–165
RS232:PARITY, 2–208 Recall command, 2–204
RS232:SOFTFLAGGING, 2–209 Save command, 2–211
RS232:STOPBITS, 2–210 Setup, Instrument preparation, 1–3
*RST, 2–206 Slewrate trigger, 2–249, 2–257, 2–258, 2–259, 2–260,
Rules, command forming, 2–1 2–261
Runt trigger, 2–249, 2–252, 2–253, 2–254, 2–255, SPD, C–2
2–256 SPE, C–2
*SRE command, 2–217, 3–4
SRER register, 2–202, 2–217, 3–4
S SRQ, 1–2
State trigger, 2–245, 2–246
*SAV, 2–211
Status, 3–1
Save and recall command group, 2–22
Status and error command group, 2–23
Save and recall commands
Status and error commands
ALLOCATE?, 2–52
*OPT, 2–201
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM?, 2–53
ALLEV?, 2–51
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:FREE?, 2–53
BUSY?, 2–60
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF<x>, 2–54
*CLS, 2–68
DELETE:SETUP, 2–95
DESE, 2–96, 3–3
DELETE:WAVEFORM, 2–96
*ESE, 2–121, 3–3
*RCL, 2–204
*ESR?, 2–122, 3–1
RECALL:SETUP, 2–204
EVENT?, 2–123
RECALL:WAVEFORM, 2–205
EVMSG?, 2–123
*SAV, 2–211
EVQTY?, 2–124
SAVE:SETUP, 2–211
ID?, 2–156
SAVE:WAVEFORM, 2–212
*OPC, 2–200
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMT, 2–213
*PSC, 2–202, 3–4
Save setting command, 2–211
*RST, 2–206
SAVE:SETUP, 2–211
*SRE, 2–217, 3–4
SAVE:WAVEFORM, 2–212
*STB?, 2–217, 3–2
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMT, 2–213
*TST?, 2–286
SBR register, 2–217, 3–2
*WAI, 2–287
SDC, C–2
Status and Events, 1–2
SELECT?, 2–214
*STB?, 2–217
SELECT:<wfm>, 2–215
*STB? query, 3–2
SELECT:CONTROL?, 2–215
Syntax
Selected device clear, C–2
BNF (Backus-Naur form), 2–1
Self test, 2–286
Command, 2–1
Separator, command, 2–2
Diagram, 2–10
Serial poll, 3–2
Syntax and Commands, 1–1
Disable, C–2
Syntax diagrams, 1–1
Enable, C–2

Index–8 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Index

T TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:
SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE, 2–240
Table, programming message, 3–12 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:
TCT, C–2 SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE, 2–242
Tek Standard Codes and Formats 1989, 2–23 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:
TEKSECURE, 2–218 SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE, 2–243
TEKSecure, Glossary–2 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME,
Terminator, command message, 2–5 2–244
TIME, 2–218 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME,
Time base, Manual trigger simulation, 2–285 2–244
*TRG, 2–285 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE: INPUT:CH4?,
TRIGGER, 2–219 2–245
Trigger command group, 2–24 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN, 2–246
Trigger commands TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD?, 2–246
TRIGGER, 2–219 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH<x>,
TRIGGER:DELAY, 2–220 2–247
TRIGGER:DELAY:BY, 2–221 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:WHEN, 2–247
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE?, 2–222 TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE, 2–248
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:COUPLING, 2–222 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE?, 2–248
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SLOPE, 2–223 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS, 2–249
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SOURCE, 2–224 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH?, 2–250
TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS?, 2–224 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:FILTER, 2–250
TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT, 2–225 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY,
TRIGGER:DELAY:LEVEL, 2–225 2–251
TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME, 2–226 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH, 2–252
TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE, 2–227 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT?, 2–252
TRIGGER:MAIN, 2–227 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY,
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE?, 2–228 2–253
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:COUPLING, 2–228 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD?,
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SLOPE, 2–229 2–253
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE, 2–230 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF?, 2–230 THRESHOLD:BOTH, 2–254
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:ACTUAL?, 2–231 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:BY, 2–231
THRESHOLD:HIGH, 2–254
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:TIME, 2–232
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE, 2–233
THRESHOLD:LOW, 2–255
TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL, 2–233
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN, 2–256
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC?, 2–234
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH, 2–256
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS, 2–234
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLOCK:LEVEL, 2–241
THRESHOLD:HIGH, 2–259
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:DATA:LEVEL, 2–242
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:FUNCTION, 2–235
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT?, 2–236 DELTATIME, 2–257
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT: CH<x>?, 2–237 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:POLARITY,
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: INPUT:CH4?, 2–258
2–237 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: WHEN, SLEWRATE, 2–258
2–238 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: THRESHOLD:BOTH, 2–259
WHEN:LESSLIMIT, 2–239 TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: WHEN: THRESHOLD:LOW, 2–260
MORELIMIT, 2–240

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual Index–9

Index

TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:WHEN, TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:COUPLING, 2–222

2–261 TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SLOPE, 2–223
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE, 2–261 TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SOURCE, 2–224
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH?, 2–262 TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS?, 2–224
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:HIGHLIMIT, TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT, 2–225
2–262 TRIGGER:DELAY:LEVEL, 2–225
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT, TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME, 2–226
2–263 TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE, 2–227
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY, TRIGGER:MAIN, 2–227
2–263 TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE?, 2–228
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN, 2–264 TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:COUPLING, 2–228
TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE, 2–265 TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SLOPE, 2–229
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO?, 2–266 TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE, 2–230
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:BY, 2–266 TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF?, 2–230
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELD, 2–267, 2–268 TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:ACTUAL?, 2–231
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELDTYPE, 2–269 TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:BY, 2–231
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT?, 2–269 TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:TIME, 2–232
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:FIELD, TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE, 2–233
2–270 TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL, 2–233
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC?, 2–234
FRAMERATE, 2–270 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS, 2–234
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:LINES, TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:FUNCTION, 2–235
2–271 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT?, 2–236
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:NEG- TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT: CH<x>?, 2–237
SYNCWIDTH, 2–272 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: INPUT:CH4?,
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO: 2–237
FLEXFORMAT:V1STARTTIME, 2–272 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: WHEN, 2–238
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: WHEN:
FLEXFORMAT:V1STOPTIME, 2–273 LESSLIMIT, 2–239
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: WHEN:
FLEXFORMAT:V2STARTTIME, 2–274 MORELIMIT, 2–240
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO: TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE,
FLEXFORMAT:V2STOPTIME, 2–274 2–240
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HDTV, 2–275 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF?, 2–276 LEVEL, 2–241
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:VALUE, TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:
2–276, 2–277 SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE, 2–242
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINE, 2–277 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:LEVEL,
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINES, 2–278 2–242
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:NTSC, 2–278 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:PAL, 2–279 SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE, 2–243
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCAN, 2–280 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME,
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCANPERIOD, 2–280 2–244
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE, 2–281 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME,
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:STANDARD, 2–281 2–244
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYNC, 2–282 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE: INPUT:CH4?,
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYSTEM, 2–283 2–245
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:TIME, 2–284 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN, 2–246
TRIGGER:STATE?, 2–284 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD?, 2–246
TRIGGER:DELAY, 2–220 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD<x>, 2–247
TRIGGER:DELAY:BY, 2–221 TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:WHEN, 2–247
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE?, 2–222 TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE, 2–248

Index–10 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Index

TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE?, 2–248 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:

TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS, 2–249 NEGSYNCWIDTH, 2–272
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH?, 2–250 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:FILTER, 2–250 V1STARTTIME, 2–272
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY, TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:
2–251 V1STOPTIME, 2–273
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH, 2–252 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT?, 2–252 V2STARTTIME, 2–274
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY, 2–253 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD?, V2STOPTIME, 2–274
2–253 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HDTV, 2–275
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT: TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF?, 2–276
THRESHOLD:BOTH, 2–254 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:VALUE, 2–276,
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT: 2–277
THRESHOLD:HIGH, 2–254 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINE, 2–277
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW, TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINES, 2–278
2–255 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:NTSC, 2–278
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN, 2–256 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:PAL, 2–279
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH, 2–256 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCAN, 2–280
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:DELTATIME, TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCANPERIOD, 2–280
2–257 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE, 2–281
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:POLARITY, TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:STANDARD, 2–281
2–258 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYNC, 2–282
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:SLEWRATE?, TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYSTEM, 2–283
2–258 TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:TIME, 2–284
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE: TRIGGER:STATE?, 2–284
THRESHOLD:BOTH, 2–259 *TST? query, 2–286
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:
THRESHOLD:HIGH, 2–259
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE: U
THRESHOLD:LOW, 2–260 UNL, C–2
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:WHEN, 2–261 Unlisten, C–2
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE, 2–261 UNLOCK, 2–286
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH?, 2–262 UNT, C–2
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:HIGHLIMIT, Untalk, C–2
2–262
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT, 2–263
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY, 2–263 V
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN, 2–264
TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE, 2–265 VERBOSE, 2–287
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO?, 2–266 Vertical
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:BY, 2–266 MATH<x>?, 2–166
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELD, 2–267, 2–268 MATH<x>:DEFINE, 2–166
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELDTYPE, 2–269 MATH<x>:NUMAVg, 2–168
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT?, 2–269 MATH<x>:PROCessing, 2–169
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:FIELD, Vertical bar cursors, 2–79
2–270 Vertical command group, 2–31
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT: Vertical commands
FRAMERATE, 2–270 CH<x>?, 2–61
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:LINES, CH<x>:BANDWIDTH, 2–61
2–271 CH<x>:COUPLING, 2–62

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual Index–11

Index

CH<x>:IMPEDANCE, 2–63 WFMPRE:WFID, 2–295

CH<x>:OFFSET, 2–64 WFMPRE:XINCR, 2–294
CH<x>:POSITION, 2–65 WFMPRE:XMULT, 2–295
CH<x>:PROBE?, 2–66 WFMPRE:XOFF, 2–295
CH<x>:SCALE, 2–66 WFMPRE:XUNIT, 2–295
CH<x>:VOLTS, 2–67 WFMPRE:XZERO, 2–295
SELECT?, 2–214 WFMPRE:YMULT, 2–294
SELECT:<wfm>, 2–215 WFMPRE:YOFF, 2–294
SELECT:CONTROL?, 2–215 WFMPRE:YUNIT, 2–295
Video trigger, 2–265, 2–266, 2–267, 2–268, 2–269, WFMPRE:YZERO, 2–295
2–270, 2–271, 2–272, 2–273, 2–274, 2–275, WFMPRE:ZMULT, 2–295
2–276, 2–277, 2–278, 2–279, 2–280, 2–281, WFMPRE:ZOFF, 2–295
2–282, 2–283, 2–284 WFMPRE:ZUNIT, 2–295
WFMPRE:ZZERO, 2–295
WAVFRM?, 2–288
W <wfm>, command mnemonic, 2–7
WFMPRE?, 2–288
*WAI, 2–287 WFMPRE:<wfm>?, 2–296
Wait for operation complete, 2–287 WFMPRE:<wfm>:NR_PT, 2–296
Waveform, command mnemonic, 2–7 WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_FMT, 2–297
Waveform command group, 2–32 WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_OFF, 2–298
Waveform commands WFMPRE:<wfm>:WFID, 2–298
CURVE, 2–85 WFMPRE:<wfm>:XINCR, 2–299
DATA, 2–87 WFMPRE:<wfm>:XUNIT, 2–299
DATA:DESTINATION, 2–87 WFMPRE:<wfm>:YMULT, 2–300
DATA:ENCDG, 2–88 WFMPRE:<wfm>:YOFF, 2–301
DATA:SOURCE, 2–90 WFMPRE:<wfm>:YUNIT, 2–301
DATA:START, 2–91 WFMPRE:<wfm>:YZERO, 2–302
DATA:STOP, 2–92 WFMPRE:BIT_NR, 2–289
DATA:TARGET, 2–92 WFMPRE:BN_FMT, 2–289
DATA:WIDTH, 2–93 WFMPRE:BYT_NR, 2–290
WAVFRM?, 2–288 WFMPRE:BYT_OR, 2–291
WFMPRE?, 2–288 WFMPRE:CRVCHK, 2–295
WFMPRE:<wfm>?, 2–296 WFMPRE:ENCDG, 2–292
WFMPRE:<wfm>:NR_PT, 2–296 WFMPRE:NR_PT, 2–295
WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_FMT, 2–297 WFMPRE:PT_FMT, 2–292
WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_OFF, 2–298 WFMPRE:PT_OFF, 2–293
WFMPRE:<wfm>:WFID, 2–298 WFMPRE:WFID, 2–295
WFMPRE:<wfm>:XINCR, 2–299 WFMPRE:XINCR, 2–294
WFMPRE:<wfm>:XUNIT, 2–299 WFMPRE:XMULT, 2–295
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YMULT, 2–300 WFMPRE:XOFF, 2–295
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YOFF, 2–301 WFMPRE:XUNIT, 2–295
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YUNIT, 2–301 WFMPRE:XZERO, 2–295
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YZERO, 2–302 WFMPRE:YMULT, 2–294
WFMPRE:BIT_NR, 2–289 WFMPRE:YOFF, 2–294
WFMPRE:BN_FMT, 2–289 WFMPRE:YUNIT, 2–295
WFMPRE:BYT_NR, 2–290 WFMPRE:YZERO, 2–295
WFMPRE:BYT_OR, 2–291 WFMPRE:ZMULT, 2–295
WFMPRE:CRVCHK, 2–295 WFMPRE:ZOFF, 2–295
WFMPRE:ENCDG, 2–292 WFMPRE:ZUNIT, 2–295
WFMPRE:NR_PT, 2–295 WFMPRE:ZZERO, 2–295
WFMPRE:PT_FMT, 2–292 Width trigger, 2–249, 2–262, 2–263, 2–264
WFMPRE:PT_OFF, 2–293

Index–12 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual

 Index

Z ZOOM:STATE, 2–307
ZOOM:VERTICAL:POSITION, 2–308
ZOOM, 2–302 ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE, 2–308
Zoom command group, 2–37 ZOOM GRATICULE, 2–304
Zoom commands ZOOM:DUAL, 2–303
ZOOM, 2–302 ZOOM:DUAL:OFFSET, 2–303
ZOOM:DUAL, 2–303 ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK, 2–305
ZOOM:DUAL:OFFSET, 2–303 ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:POSITION, 2–305
ZOOM:GRATICULE, 2–304 ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:SCALE, 2–306
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK, 2–305 ZOOM:STATE, 2–307
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:POSITION, 2–305 ZOOM:VERTICAL:POSITION, 2–308
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:SCALE, 2–306 ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE, 2–308

TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual Index–13

Index

Index–14 TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual